Flï31-75 (TEST) DEPARTMENT of the ARMY FIELD MANUAL

» Flï31-75 (TEST) DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FIELD MANUAL

RIVERINE EPATONS

THE ARMY LIBRARY WASHINGTON» D. C.

gasa

orti

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY JUNE 1968 TAGO 20012A « FM 31-75 (TEST)

FIELD MANUAL HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY No. 31-75 (TEST) WASHINGTON, D.C., 2U June 1968

RIVERINE OPERATIONS

Paragraphs Page

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION Section I. General 1—1—1-3 3 II. Nature of riverine operations 1-4,1-5 5 CHAPTER 2. OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT Section I. General 2-1—2-3 ^ II. Enemy forces - 2-4—2-7 8 III. Host country and Free World forces 2-8,2-9 10 CHAPTER 3. ORGANIZATION AND COMMAND Section I. General 3_i__3_3 12 II. Command and control - 3_4 3-7 12 III. Army forces 3_8,3-9 15 IV. Naval forces - 3_iO—3-13 16 V. Air Force forces -. 3-14, 3-15 19 CHAPTER 4. OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS , Section I. General 4-1—4-6 20 II. Division/brigade operations - 4-7—4-11 26 III. Battalion operations 4-12—4-15 28 IV. Enemy positions - 4-16—4-18 49 CHAPTER 5. OTHER TACTICAL OPERATIONS Section I. Patrolling 5-1—5-7 56 II. Raids 5—8—5—12 58 III. Operations in swamps and forests 5-13—5-19 59 IV. Ambushes/counterambushes 5-20—5-22 60 V. Clearance of water ^obstacles 1' 5-23—5-25 66 VI. Survival, evasion, and: escape _ r 5-26—5-29 67 CHAPTER 6. COMBAT^SUPPÓRT Section I. Introduction 6-1,6-2 69 II. Fire support 6-3—6-15 69 III. Engineer 6-16—6-19 82 IV. Communications 6-20—6-29 84 V. Intelligence &-30—6-33 90 VI. Tactical airlift 6-34—6-36 94 VII. PSYOP 6-37—6-39 94 VIII. Army aviation 6-40—6-43 96 CHAPTER 7. COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT Section I. General - - - - 7-1, 7-2 97 , II. Supply 7-3—7-6 97 III. Maintenance 7-7—7-14 99 IV. Medical 7-15—7-19 103 V. Military police - 7-20—7-23 104 CHAPTER 8. DEFENSE OF BASE AREAS Section I. General 8-1,8-2 106 II. Fundamentals of base area defense 8-3, 8-4 106 III. Planning and organizing the base defense 8-5—8-9 109 IV. Defense of the afloat base 8-10,8-11 110 V. Defense against enemy mortar, rocket, and recoilles rifle attack - 8-12—8-14 111

*Th¡» tost field manual supersede« USACDC Training Text 31-75, January 1967.

AGO 20012A 1 Paragraphs Page CHAPTER 9. CIVIL AFFAIRS Section I. General 9—1» 9—2 114 II- Military civic action — 9-3—9-5 116 III. Populace and resources control - 9-6—9-9 116 IV. Consolidation psychological operations 9-10, 9-11 120 V. Community relations and other special considerations 9-12—9-14 120 APPENDIX A. REFERENCES 124 B. REFERENCE DATA - 126 C. BOAT PROCEDURES - 178 D. CANAL-CROSSING TECHNIQUES FOR MECHANIZED VEHICLES 182 E. LOAD PLANS - 195

INDEX 202

2 AGO 20012A CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

Section I. GENERAL

V 1-1. Purpose units based afloat or supported by Naval units. а. This test manual presents concepts and It adapts existing doctrine, terminology, and techniques for training and employing forces techniques to riverine operations. in a riverine environment. It outlines interim b. This manual provides guidance in the doctrine, tactics, techniques, and procedures intergration of ground forces, naval units, and for training an infantry division for employ- supporting air forces conducting joint opera- ment in stability operations where inland tions. The nature of riverine operations re- waterways are the primary lines of communi- quires utmost coordination and cooperation cations (LOG). between the forces involved. Their operations б. The manual is written primarily to serve are interdependent, and the combined forces the immediate requirements imposed by opera- operate as a single tactical entity responsive tions in Vietnam and secondarily to provide to the needs and requirements of the ground further information on the development of con- force. cepts and doctrine concerning riverine warfare c. This manual deals primarily with the riv- conducted in a more general riverine environ- erine operations in areas like the Mekong ment. River Delta in South Vietnam. c. The significant operational concept of riv- d. Equipment for use by, and in support of, erine warfare concerns the sustained employ- forces afloat are described in appendix B. ment of forces in a riverine environment, one e. Users of this manual are encouraged to element of which is the force operating on the submit recommendations to improve its clarity waterways. Military forces equipped and or accuracy. Comments will be keyed to the trained to operate on rivers and canals in con- specific page, paragraph, and line of the text junction with airmobile and overland forces in which they recommend a change. Users will can add a new dimension to mobility and fire- provide reasons for each comment to insure power, can successfully dominate the overall understanding and complete evaluation. Users environment, and can control its routes of will forward comments direct to the Com- communication and populated areas. manding General, U.S. Army Combat Devel- d. The contents of this manual are applicable opments Command Institute of Combined to— Arms and Support, Fort Leavenworth, Kansas (1) Nuclear and nonnuclear warfare. 66027. Originators of proposed changes that (2) Employment of, and protection from, would constitute a significant modification of chemical, biological, and radiological (NBC) approved Army doctrine may send an informa- weapons or agents. tion copy, through command channels, to the (3) Stability operations. Commanding General, U.S. Army Combat Developments Command, Fort Belvoir, Vir- 1-2. Scope ginia 22060, to facilitate review and followup. a. This manual covers doctrinal concepts, Comments based on tests, maneuvers, and operating techniques, and procedures for in- combat experience are especially solicited to fantry divisions; and it specifically applies to assist in preparing FM 31-75.

AGO 20O12A 3 11—3. ûefôiniifi©m barracks ships, supporting ships, and water- The following definitions are associated with craft for use as a mobile base by both ground the terms used throughout this manual. These and naval forces during a riverine campaign. definitions apply to, but are not necessarily The base includes the surrounding land and limited to, riverine operations. water areas required for close-in security. а. Riverine area {environment)—A land en- h. Tactical area of responsibility {TAOR) vironment dominated by water LOG. It may —That area within which a designated unit contain an extensive network of rivers, has certain continuing responsibilities. The streams, canals, paddies, swamps, or muskeg unit coordinates with host country military extending over broad, level terrain, part? of and civil authorities in meeting these responsi- which may be inundated periodically or per- bilities. They include, but are not limited to, manently. It may include sparsely populated the following specific, functions: swamps or forests, rivers and streams that (1) Defense of key installations. have steep banks densely covered with tropical (2) Conduct of operations, including re- trees or bamboo; and relatively flat, open ter- action operations, necessary to secure the area rain. A large agrarian population may concen- against enemy regular (main), regional, or trate along the waterways. Ocean tides may village militia forces. affect riverine areas near the seacoast or far (3) Support of host country internal de- inland. fense and internal development programs. б. Riverine warfare—All military activities i. Area of operations (AO)—A specified area designed to achieve and/or maintain territorial in which designated forces conduct tactical control of a riverine area by destroying enemy operations for prescribed periods of time. Ac- forces and restricting or eliminating their activities in these areas and the responsibilities tivities. The significant characteristic of riv- of the designated units operating within them erine operations is the extensive use of joint are coordinated with host country officials in waterborne forces together with groundmobile the course of operational planning. In an AO, and airmobile forces in a predominantly land operations usually are not of a continuing battle. The basic nature of riverine operations nature, and civil affairs operations are more is sustained ground combat in a land environ- limited in scope. ment dominated by water LOG’S. j. Combat base—A temporary base in an c. River warfare—River warfare refers only AO established by a brigade or battalion, con- to specific tasks by naval components—water sisting of essential command and control, fire patrol, transport, and combat support—as part support, and combat service support elements of overall riverine warfare. of the unit. Supporting naval elements and d. Riverine force—The force organized or attachments needed to accomplish the assigned assembled to conduct riverine operations, com- mission are included in the base. posed of naval; air, when available; and k. Patrol base—A temporary base estab- ground forces operating from afloat or land lished by a company from which it conducts bases responsive to the ground force com- extensive patrolling, reconnaissance, raid, or mander. other operations. e. Waterborne operations—Operations in l. Sector Operations and intelligence coorcK- which combat forces and their combat and nation center {SOICC)—A host country fa- combat service support elements move about cility where representatives of all operations the battlefield in watercraft under the control and intelligence-gathering agencies within the of a ground force commander to engage in political division (state or province) coordi- ground combat. nate. This facility grants clearances to all fire /. Land base—A shore installation for support agencies within the area, identifies ground and naval forces during a riverine friendly and enemy-controlled areas, and des- campaign. The base includes the surrounding ignates free fire areas. Representatives of host land and water areas required for close-in country, U.S., and other Free World military security. forces assist force commanders in planning g. Afloat base—A concentration of naval

AGO 20012A and coordinating all operations within the o. Assault boats—A generic term that in- political division. cludes inflatable boat, small (IBS) ; boat, m. Combat support coordination center landing, inflatable, assault craft; boat, recon- (CSCC)—A facility where representatives of naissance, pneumatic ; assault boat, plastic ; the host country, U.S., and other Free World swimmer support boat ; fire team assault boat ; military forces providing operational assist- and Boston Whaler. ance to combat elements assist force command- /. Air Cushion Vehicle—A vehicle that op- ers in planning, coordinating, and controlling erates over land and water riding on a cushion all available combat support. of air. n. Killing zone—The portion of an ambush site where fires are concentrated to isolate, trap, and destroy the target.

Section II. NATURE OF RIVERINE OPERATIONS

1-4. Background combat actions. Water routes have strategic Riverine warfare is not a new type of military and tactical importance to an insurgent or operation. The U.S. Marine Corps conducted enemy force. They are particularly important riverine operations in the Florida Everglades in situations where an external aggressor sup- from 1837 to 1842, and in Nicaragua in the ports and directs insurgency. Such a situation late 1920’s. The U.S. Navy conducted riverine dictates a doctrine and strategy of interdiction operations along the Yangtze River in China and control of waterways. Operations involv- from 1927 to 1932. The U.S. Army conducted ing this doctrine are known as riverine opera- riverine operations along the James and Mis- tions. sissippi Rivers and in southern swamps during b. In many ways, inland waterways resemble the Civil War and in Mindanao in the Philip- roads or railways and can be considered simply pines in World War II. The British fought as LOG. The enemy may use these LOG for along the Nile River in 1898, and the Japanese access or egress for infiltration of individuals fought along the Yangtze from 1937 to 1945. and small units. The mission of the infiltrators More recently, the French Naval Assault Di- may be a raid or ambush; it also may be visions (Dinassauts) fought against the Viet subversion, espionage, reinforcement of en- Minh in the Tonkin and Mekong Deltas from gaged units, or eventual regroupment for a fu- 1946 to 1954. Since then, Republic of Vietnam ture operation. Tactical principles that govern Army units and Navy river assault groups the control and use of inland waterways for (RAG) have conducted riverine operations military operations are essentially the same as against Viet Cong insurgents along the exten- those that apply to land LOG. Equipment for sive waterways of the Mekong Delta. waterborne operations may look different, but it serves the same purposes as equipment for 1-5. Distinguishing Characteristics ground operations. Ships and watercraft are a. In developing areassubstitutes with limited for wheeledland and tracked vehicles transportation and abundant surface water, in meeting armor, armament, and transport inland waterways provide natural routes for requirements. Ground forces consider water- transportation and are logical centers of popu- ways as LOG rather than obstacles to cross. lation. In some developing countries, inland Navy forces operating on inland waterways waterways are major arteries for economic have to be familiar with the principles of circulation. River transportation of local prod- ground combat because these principles deter- ucts, such as rice and charcoal, may necessitate mine the characteristics of the watercraft re- military operations to keep waterways open quired and their employment. and, in some instances, to transport local pro- c. Military forces equipped and trained to duce to maintain the local economy. These op- operate on rivers and canals, together with erations may not involve extensive, recurring airmobile and groundmobile forces, provide an

AGO 20012A 5 added dimension to mobility and firepower. These special considerations are outlined in Riverine warfare differs from conventional subsequent chapters. ground warfare chiefly in environment. The d. Riverine warfare is not just another as- fundamentals and tactics applicable in conven- pect of amphibious operations. Riverine war- tional ground operations apply in riverine fare is distinct in that it requires continual use operations. Special organization, techniques, of specialized watercraft, equipment, and tech- and operating procedures are required when niques and usually takes place where amphibi- ground forces, supported by Navy ships and ous operations are not practicable. craft, operate directly from inland waterways.

6 AGO 20012A CHAPTER 2

OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT

Section I. GENERAL

2-1. Introduction b. Another solution to the problem of land A thorough understanding of a riverine en- areas for bases is to use Navy ships as a mobile vironment is necessary to plan and conduct afioat base. Such a base can move to an area of riverine operations. In a riverine area, water- operations (AO) as needed. The afloat base craft are the principal means of transport. The provides a suitable launching point for water- people settle along waterways, often the only borne operations and, because it does not oc- lines of communications (LOG). Civilian traf- cupy land, it reduces the impact on the civilian fic and settlements conceal the enemy's move- population. A nearby airfield, providing a base ments and help to conceal mining and ambush for an airborne forward air controller (FAC), operations. The physical characteristics of the is a major consideration in selecting the site environment dictate the sociological and eco- for the afloat base. nomic development of the area. The control of waterways is necessary to establish and maintain control in riverine areas. 2-3. Riverine Areas Riverine areas are not restricted geographi- cally ; they may be found worldwide. Examples 2-2. Riverine Environments of riverine areas follow : A riverine environment is dominated by water a. The Mekong River Delta and the Plain LOG, possibly several major rivers and tribu- of Reeds in South Vietnam. taries or an extensive network of minor water- b. The Red River Delta in North Vietnam. ways, canals, and irrigation ditches. Military c. Portions of Cambodia, Laos, and China movements use air and water transportation (Estuaries of the Yellow River (Shantung extensively because of the lack of a suitable Province) Yangtze River (Shanghai-Man- road net. Suitable land for bases, airfields, and king), and Sikiang River (Hongkong-Canton). artillery firing positions may not always be d. The Ganges River in East Pakistan. available because of the topography, location e. The Congo, Niger, and parts of Nile of civilian population, restrictions on with- River systems in Africa. drawing land from agricultural use, or a com- f. The lower reaches of the Magdalena bination of these factors. River in Colombia. a. Constructing bases andg. airfieldsThe Amazon on the and Parana Rivers and fill from dredging operations is a solution. their tributaries in South America. Major disadvantages to it are the expense in- h. Portions of Alaska. volved and the time expended to reclaim ade- i. The lower reaches of the Mississippi quate land. Normal dredging may create new River. land but at locations unsuitable for bases and j. Burma-Irrawaddy Delta. airfields. Also, dredging equipment may not be k. Thailand-Central Lowland Region, Chao available solely to reclaim land for a base. Phraya River and its tributaries.

AGO 20012A 7 Section DL (ENEMY FORCES

2—4. ©emeraD forces, and provide security for the political This section provides general information on infrastructure at the local level. Members of typical enemy forces that may operate in a riv- village militia units continue to follow their erine environment. It focuses on tactical forces civilian occupations and receive limited mil- rather than underground cadres and political tary training and extensive political indoctrin- organizations. An extensive network of under- ation. As part-time military forces, they harass ground cadres and political organizations nor- or delay friendly forces by sniping, mining, mally provides intelligence, counterintelli- and rigging boobytraps. gence, political activity, and logistic support to enemy units in the area. FM 31-16 provides 2-û. ©f ©eograplhiîesii Areas additional information on underground cadres The disposition of enemy forces in a riverine and political organizations. area depends primarily on control exercised by the host country, supported by U.S. and other 2—5. OrgcmnizaHioin) emd Mossfeiras Free World military forces. The control fluctu- Enemy forces may vary from individuals to ates with the effectiveness of the overall in- squads and from platoons to divisions or larger ternal defense and internal development effort, units. Enemy armed forces normally consist the size and capabilities of enemy forces, and of three principal types: regular (main), re- the attitudes of local civilians. Areas are gen- gional, and village militia. They differ from erally defined as— one another in organization, training, weap- a. Enemy-Controlled Areas. Enemy forces in ons, equipment, and mission. a riverine environment usually do not secure a. Regular armed forces can conduct any and hold terrain. They may have base areas operation normally assigned to military units. or havens where they maintain headquarters, They move throughout the area because of op- hospitals, communications centers, facilities erational requirements or because of the effec- for manufacture of munitions, facilities for tiveness of friendly destruction or neutralized manufacture of clothing and equipment, fa- operations. They normally have the best avail- cilities for storage of supplies, and training able weapons, equipment, and uniforms and areas. These bases may be anywhere ; but they also have, or have access to, enough local wa- are usually in remote areas where some terrain tercraft for complete watermobility. These feature provides protection. Extensive areas of forces, usually battalions, regiments, or divi- mangrove or other swamp forests provide ideal sions, are well trained and well led. They op- positions. The enemy establishes outposts on erate with regional and village militia forces. the routes into the area to provide early warn- The regular units may consist of personnel ing of a ground or waterborne attack. They who are natives, or they may be units intro- may resolutely defend the area or may dis- duced by external sponsoring powers. perse to innumerable hiding places. Friendly b. Regional forces are not as well organized, forces may occupy isolated towns or outposts trained, or equipped as regular forces. Orga- in the area, but enemy forces dominate most nizationally, they may be platoons, companies, of the countryside. battalions, or, occasionally, regiments. These b. Contested Areas. These are the principal units make limited attacks harass friendly areas where regular or regional enemy forces installations and troops, and attempt to am- conduct offensive operations. They may not bush reaction forces. They are normally as- resolutely resist the movement of friendly signed to a specific operational area and forces; however, harassment of these move- seldom operate elsewhere. Regional forces usu- ments is customary. The enemy masses bat- ally consist of personnel who are natives and talion-size units for short, violent attacks on are familiar with the area’s waterways. isolated friendly outposts and troop units. He c. Village militia forces collect intelligence ambushes friendly units of any size when information, build bases, fortify villages, act as heavy casualties can be inflicted. In these scouts or porters for regular or regional areas, when dealing with the local civilians,

AGO 20012A the enemy uses persuasion, threats, and vio- They contain obstacles and boobytraps to lence. canalize an attacking force. The obstacles may c. Friendly Controlled Areas. Enemy offen- be natural plants (cactus) or artificial obsta- sive operations are normally limited to raids, cles (bamboo fences and punji stake barriers). small ambushes, sniping, and mining opera- (3) An enemy unit occupying a hamlet tions in these areas. Battalion or larger units places all-round security well forward of the may make coordinated attacks to penetrate defensive positions. When attacked, the secur- these areas. Enemy activities also include such ity elements alert the main force and take the covert operations as subversion, espionage, psy- attacking force under fire. This fire is nor- chological operations, terrorism, and sabotage. mally long-range sniper fire designed to slow the advance rather than to inflict casualties. 2-7. Activities If possible, the main enemy force withdraws Enemy activities in a riverine environment to succeeding positions as the attack advances though similar to those in other operational and fights only when it detects a weakness in areas, will be affected by the peculiarities of the attacking force. the geographical conditions. (4) If, in attempting to withdraw, the a. Offensive Operations. enemy force is trapped and must stand and (1) The enemy may mass battalions or fight, it usually allows the attacking unit to larger units for short, violent attacks on iso- come within 100 meters before it initiates a lated friendly outposts and troop units. He large volume of fire to stop the attack. By may limit his operations to raids, sniping, min- conducting the firefight at close range, the ing operations, subversion, espionage, psycho- enemy attempts to prevent the attacking force logical operations, terrorism, or sabotage. from employing artillery fires and airstrikes. (2) Host country LOG may be subjected (5) When the attack continues, the to continuous or intermittent harassment to enemy usually attempts to exfiltrate. The deny friendly forces the use of the LOG or to enemy force may break into small groups to delay, harass, and prevent movement along the exfiltrate. To prevent the capture of weapons routes. Bridges and roads may be destroyed and ammunition, the enemy force loads them or they may be blocked sufficiently to stop or into small boats and sinks the boats in the restrict military traffic and to allow civilian major waterways. All civilians leaving the op- traffic to move with difficulty. The use of mines erational area must be screened to prevent and demolitions, to include command detonated enemy personnel from escaping. Once the area mines, is extensive. Obstacles frequently block has been overrun, defensive positions and waterways to military traffic and allow civilian canals must be searched to locate hidden equip- traffic to move with difficulty. ment and boats that may have been sunk. b. Enemy Defensive Operations. In defense, c. Ambushes. Movements on the waterways enemy units take full advantage of heavy vege- and on the limited road net are particularly tation and tree lines. These wooded areas vary vulnerable to ambush. The climate in most in width from a few to several hundred meters; riverine areas permits ambushing forces to re- (1) Enemy forces usually prepare pri- main in position for a considerable time with- mary and alternate defensive positions to out undue physical discomfort. The heavy defend against airmobile attacks along water- vegetation along many of the waterways and ways. Primary positions usually are inside the roads provides concealment, and the terrain tree line on suspected landing zones (LZ), generally provides some cover. Ambushes (ch oriented toward the open field. These positions 5) are similar, whether the ambush site is on provide excellent observation, fields of fire, a road, a trail, or a waterway. and maximum grazing fire into the LZ. Delay- d. Use of Waterways. ing positions are constructed to allow the force (1) Enemy units normally plan opera- to conduct a delay back to a waterway, to tions to use water transport extensively. The break contact, and to withdraw. geographic area or the extent of friendly con- (2) Normally, trails and footpaths are trol in the area may require the enemy to constructed parallel to the banks of waterways. operate during darkness or reduced visibility.

AGO 20012A 9 When cover or concealment is nonexistent tide tables to determine the effects of tides along streams or canals, enemy units may on planned operations. move at night even in their own base areas. (2) In areas under friendly surveillance Enemy movements along canals often can con- during waterborne movements, the enemy uses tinue during high or low tide because their a variety of security measures, to include ad- craft are generally lighter than friendly craft. vance boats, security elements on shore, and During an extremely dry season, the enemy signal systems. When enemy units move during may not be able to use boats at low tide. In daylight, they stay close to shore to prevent contrast, both high and low tides hamper detection from the air. Normally they move friendly forces. During low tide, heavier during daylight only when they control the friendly craft will not float. Armored troop surrounding area or along waterways that pro- carriers (ATC) may run aground when the vide concealment. They usually avoid concen- water is 1 to 1.5 meters deep. During high trating more than three or four boats at one tide, friendly watercraft with high superstruc- location. The enemy may construct inlets in tures cannot pass under many bridges and must concealed locations to hide boats if their move- wait until the tide recedes. Planners study ments are detected.

Section III. HOST COUNTRY AND FREE WORLD FORCES

2-8. Host Country Forces lar armed forces. Paramilitary forces consist Host country forces may consist of regular of indigenous armed volunteers who are fa- armed forces, paramilitary forces, police, ir- miliar with the terrain and people in the area regular forces, and civilian agencies. of operations. Units have individual weapons, a. Regular Armed Forces. light machineguns, light mortars, and limited (1) Army forces, containing standard and communication equipment. The primary mis- specially trained units, make up the largest sion of paramilitary forces is to relieve the contingent of readily available host country regular armed forces of security missions and troops that can move throughout a nation. The local defense duties in a given political divi- specially trained units include airborn and sion. They often enforce laws and maintain ranger units. Both regular and specially public order in rural areas. Their other typical trained units may have an airmobile capa- tasks are defending villages and guarding bility. headquarters, bridges, key installations, and (2) Host country air forces may conduct local airstrips. Paramilitary units from squad close air support, airmobile, tactical airlift, through battalion may be trained to perform visual reconnaissance, radio-relay, and target limited tactical missions. In performing their acquisition missions and may provide liaison security roles, paramilitary units raid and am- elements for forward air control. These forces bush, either alone or with irregular or regular may conduct coordinated operations with U.S. armed forces. They may reinforce outposts un- Air Force operations supporting combined der attack or pursue withdrawing enemy riverine operations or unilateral operations elements. supporting host country forces exclusively. c. Police Forces. Police forces, consisting of, (3) Host country naval forces, including local, regional, and national police elements, naval infantry or marines, can operate in riv- are normally the host country’s primary popu- erine areas or in coastal areas adjacent to them. lace and resources control agency. They are These forces maintain offshore surveillance, oriented on the population and may be the only provide naval gunfire support, and patrol ineffective host country force in a given locale. shore coastal areas and inland waterways. Police forces attempt to detect enemy under- Naval infantry or marines are employed as ground elements and provide intelligence to infantry after an amphibious landing or in military units. They maintain law and order riverine operations. and protect key governmental installations and b. Paramilitary Forces. The organization of public facilities. In areas where police forces paramilitary forces is similar to that of regu- are inadequate to perform these missions,

10 AGO 200I2A regular armed and paramilitary forcea may religious welfare groups are concerned chiefly perform certain police-type functions in the with internal development. These groups may maintenance of law and order. conduct immediate impact programs in areas d. Irregular Forces. Irregular forces, or receiving troop protection for limited times armed groups of individuals who are not mem- and long-range programs where governmental bers of regular armed forces or paramilitary control has been established. forces, may be mobilized, trained, and armed to supplement the regular military, paramili- 2-9. Other Free World Military Forces tary, and police forces. Other Free World military forces may support e. Civilian Agencies. Governmental and host country and U.S. Forces in riverine private civilian agencies, organizations, and operations.

AGO 20012A 11 CHAPTER 3

ORGANIZATION AND COMMAND

Section I. GENERAL

3-1. Introduction 3-2. Type of Forces a. By their nature, riverine operations are Mission, - enemy, terrain and weather, and joint operations undertaken primarily by troops available (METT) are the bases for Army and Navy forces. Joint riverine opera- the task organization. Riverine operations re- tions require the coordinated and integrated quire a balance between types of forces, con- efforts of participating forces to achieve a com- sidering the total forces available. Afloat-based mon objective. Department of Defense (DOD) Army battalions are employed primarily as and Joint Chiefs of Staff (JCS) directives pre- waterborne units. A land-based unit has the scribe joint forces command arrangements to same capability when employed with one or insure coordination and integration. Joint com- more U.S. Navy river assault squadrons (RAS), mand organizations provide for central direc- located on a nearby river line of communication to coordinate the efforts of the forces tions (LOG). A special consideration in task committed, decentralized execution to accom- organization for riverine operations is the modate the detailed action of a large number amount of troop lift and fire support available of commands or individuals and common doc- from Navy, Army aviation, and Air Force trine among the forces involved. units. The major factors determining naval b. Environmental conditions and tactical support requirements are— situations differ from one riverine area to an- a. The extent to which navigable waters will other. Enemy forces may vary from lightly permit movement of naval support to, within, armed village militia units to regular military and around the area of operations (AO). units. The environment varies with the tides b. The size of Army forces needed in the and seasons, which further complicate ex- objective area, the availability of other means, tended operations over an area with many dif- and the desirability of using other means to ferences in terrain. Friendly ground forces deliver them. may be transported by wheeled, mechanized, airmobile, airborne, or waterborne vehicles. They may operate with U.S. Navy river forces, 3-3. Army Requirements U.S. Air Force support units, or host country Army requirements to accomplish the mission forces. The organization is flexible to insure determine the strength and organization of control and coordination of these forces in Navy and other supporting forces. varying operational environments.

Section II. COMMAND AND CONTROL 3-4. General unified or subordinate unified command com- The command relationships outlined herein mander who assigns forces for riverine opera- concern U.S. Army and Navy elements with tions specifies the command structure above possible U.S. Air Force support participating the Army division/Navy flotilla level. When in joint or combined riverine operations. The riverine operations are an integral part of in-

12 AGO 20012A ternal defense and internal development oper- of a designated Army component commander. ations, the unified or subordinate unified com- The Navy element, under the operational con- mand commander also prescribes appropriate trol of a designated Navy component com- relationships with host government agencies mander, has a mission of close support to the in the AO. The variety of environmental in- Army element. Support, as defined in JCS fluences and tactical situations that may be Pub. 2, paragraph 30276, provides for the ac- encountered in a riverine area prevents estab- complishment of the mission. The Army com- lishment of one command arrangement that mander exercises general direction of the Navy is suitable for all situations and areas. effort within the limits permitted by accepted naval tactical procedures. Such direction in- 3-5. Typical Command Arrangements cludes designation of targets or objectives, a. Joint Task Force. The optimum command timing, duration of the supporting action, and arrangement for riverine operations involving other instructions necessary for coordination Army and Navy elements is the joint task force and efficiency. The Navy commander prescribes (JTF) (JCS Pub. 2, para 30251). The senior the tactics, methods, and procedures* that the commander of the Army force is the JTF Navy element, employs to provide the required commander. He organizes or constitutes a support. This arrangement does not provide staff using the assets available among the for unity of command. Army elements may staffs of assigned component forces. be required to provide close support to Navy elements conducting essentially naval opera- (1) The JTF organization provides for tions. unity of command during joint operations. It c. Attachment. See JCS Pub. 2, chapter III, provides for a clearly understood succession of section 2, subsection 6. command, creates a closely integrated force, (1) This command arrangement may pro- and supports planning continuity. These cri- vide for the Navy element to be attached to the teria for establishing a JTF (JCS Pub. 2, para Army element. In this event, the Army com- 30252) apply particularly during riverine op- mander commands both Army and Navy ele- erations. They permit a JTF to organize sub- ments engaged in the operation. This arrange- ordinate JTF’s, which apply particularly at ment provides unity of command of the riv- the maneuver battalion, RAS echelon (fig. erine force (JCS Pub. 2, para 30204). The 3-1). Navy element commander is in tactical control (2) The JTF is under the operational con- (JCS Pub. 1) of the riverine force during trol of an appropriate unified command, subor- those phases identified as Navy command dinate unified command, JTF, or other desig- responsibilities. nated commander. The JTF insures the coordi- (2) This command arrangement may pro- nation of operations with respective Service vide for the Army element to be attached to components of the unified, subordinate unified, the Navy element. In this event, the Navy com- or JTF command. mander commands both Navy and Army ele- (3) The Navy element commander of the ments engaged in the operation. This arrange- JTF is in tactical control when the force is ment provides unity of command of the embarked in watercraft and moving from one riverine force (JCS Pub. 2, para 30204)..The location to another. JCS Pub 1 defines tactical Army element commander is in tactical control control as the detailed and, usually, local direc- (JCS Pub. 1) of the riverine force during tion and control of movements or maneuvers those phases identified as Army command necessary to accomplish missions or tasks responsibilities. assigned. d. Others. Any other command relationship b. Close Support. This command arrange- would be a modification of those discussed ment, though it does not provide unity of com- above. mand, provides for control of riverine operations by mutual cooperation and coordination. The Navy element provides close support (JCS 3-6. Security Responsibilities Pub. 2, para 30276) to the Army element. The The following security responsibilities apply Army element is under the operational control under any command arrangement:

AGO 20012A 13 »*7 (Example: Army 3 I Theater div/Navy Theater xí Army W flotilla) JTF Navy ÿvCompqnCTtxÿ fc^X.v/»p.v.v.v/í &ÊÆBÊ2ÈÊI

I Army xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Navy (Example: Element x Element x (Example: Army div) Navy flotilla)

n (■)(! m LAND AFLOAT ääi BASE •ííSBASE

(Example: bde/one (Example: bde/one more RAS) or more RAS) I” I (3) y/sim MS ase avy waier opp Army unit gnd op 11 Army Unit/Navy I xArmy unit gnd op-; with Navy with Army m % Navy water op| RAS JTF in spt or atch in spt or atch m Army gnd op with no Navy Army gnd.op with small Navy Navy water op with small Army Navy water op with no Army participation. (Example: participation. (Example: A complex, continuing op of participation. (Example: por- participation. (Example: por- mech bn in gnd op) mech bn employing a few type most often occurring. JTF tion of RAS on river patrol with tion of RAS on river patrol) I.CM-6 for transport of a pla- comdr from Svc with primary one platoon for security) LEGEND toon) interest (most often Army). -Cornd. May have sub-JTF. Svc components of JTF are under comd- xxxxx -Op con. less op con of JTF svc com- — — — -Comd less op con. ponents. (Example: bde/two RAS) tvl-x'x'xl -Army. -Navy. -JTF.

taases jointly occupied by Army and Navy forces. Army force is commanded, to include operational control, through Army channels. Navy force is commanded, to include operational control, through Navy channels. Army provides base comdr and is responsible for base security. Navy provides appropriate share of security forces. May be organized as JTF. (Most likely case is afloat base.) fyhen relocating, officer in tactical comd is senior Navy officer assigned. Base comdr (Army) remains responsible for security. In case of naval craft on resupply mission, senior Army commander in riverine area is responsible for security (may be comdr, JTF).

Figure 3-1. JTF organization. at The base commander of all jointly oc- through 4-15 describe waterborne operations cupied Army and Navy riverine bases, afloat in detail. or ashore, is the senior Army commander as- c. The senior Navy commander embarked is signed. in tactical control while the afloat base is en (1) As base commander of a land or an route from one anchorage to another. Higher afloat base, the Army commander is responsi- headquarters normally directs or approves the ble for local base defense (JCS Pub. 2, para relocation of the afloat base. Recommendations 40209). to the afloat base commander and the senior (2) The relationship between Army and Navy commander of the riverine force form Navy elements stationed on a land or an afloat the bases for decisions to relocate the afloat base is one of coordination or mutual support. base. The afloat base commander orders emer- The Army and Navy elements assign their gency relocations and informs both higher and appropriate share of forces for local base de- subordinate headquarters of the move. fense as the base commander directs. The pri- d. The Navy commander of the riverine mary mission of the Navy force in base defense force is responsible for the movement of Navy is provision of gunfire support and protection ships and watercraft between riverine bases against any threat from the water. Chapter 8 and support facilities outside the riverine area. provides details of base defense. The Army commander in the riverine area is 6. During tactical operations, the army com- responsible for the security of movement of mander is responsible for providing security these ships within the area. elements (ground or air) along the route of movement, to inlude the movement to contact 3-7. Liaison and withdrawal to base areas. The Navy ele- Specific liaison requirements and responsibili- ment commander exercises tactical control of ties are outlined in applicable sections of this the movement and maneuver of watercraft un- manual. der the operational control of the Army commander being supported. Paragraphs 4-12 Section III. ARMY FORCES

3-8. Infantry Division (1) Artillery. (Medium- and heavy-caliber field artillery units, aerial rocket artillery, a. Infantry divisions can conduct operations target acquisition battery or battalions, artil- in a riverine environment without major re- lery meteorology detachments.) organization, although specialized items of (2) Armored cavalry regiment or separ- equipment are required, as well as provision ate armored or air cavalry squadrons. for temporary storage and maintenance of (3) Aviation battalions or separate com- vehicles and equipment that will not be used panies. in such operations. These units use water (4) Engineer units: transport as an additional means of mobility. (a) Engineer combat battalion (army Infantry divisions can operate in adverse or corps). weather and on difficult terrain—significant (b) Engineer construction battalion. factors in riverine operations. FM 61-100 pro- (c) Engineer port construction com- vides detailed information on the employment pany. of the division. (d) Engineer light equipment company. b. The division, brigades, and battalions re- (e) Engineer amphibious units. quire augmentation with civil affairs and psy- (/) Engineer mobile assault bridge chological operations (PSYOP) personnel in company. densely populated areas. (p) Engineer cellular teams (TOE 5- 500-series). 3-9. Nondivisional Forces (5) Army intelligence and security units. a. U.S. Army units supporting the division (6) Combat service support units as re- or operating in the area may include— quired.

AGO 2001ZA IS (7) Special forces detachments. country governmental, military, and paramil- (8) Transportation boat companies. itary agencies and forces may be in the river- (9) Provisional air cushion vehicle ine area. These advisors provide a channel for (ACV) units. liaison and coordination with host country b. U.S. military and civilian advisors to host agencies. Section IV. NAVAL FORCES

and Navy elements operating from an afloat Flotilla Commander base. It provides— and Staff (1) Billets for Army and Navy personnel. (2) Command and control facilities for flotilla, brigade, and battalion commanders and staffs to include sufficient office space" to permit accomplishment of all routine and operational tasks. (3) Maintenance facilities for Army and River Support River Assault Navy units. ' Squadron Squadron < (4) Logistic support for Army and Navy units. r 1 (5) Support to base defense forces. (6) Medical facilities for Army and Navy LEGEND units. As required. c. RAS. (1) An RAS (figs. 3-5 and 3-6) contains Figure 8—2. Typical river assault flotilla organization. sufficient armored troop carriers (ATC), command and communications boats (CCB), mon- 3-10. General itors, assault support patrol boats (ASPB), Naval forces in a riverine environment are or- and ATC’s equipped as refuelers to transport ganized to provide an afloat base facility and and support a reinforced infantry battalion combat and combat service support to Army conducting offensive operations in a riverine elements. In addition, Navy elements may pa- environment. The RAS provides— trol and clear inland waterways, conduct am- (a) A command and control facility for phibious operations and raids, and provide embarked forces. coastal patrol and naval gunfire support. (&) Gunfire. (c) Combat resupply. 3-11. River Assault Flotilla (

16 AGO 20012A » Commander

Chief Staff Officer

1 Admin/ ntel Ops/Plans Logistics Comm Pers

Asst Asst Asst Admin/ ■ Plans » Materiel Intel Comm Pers

Asst Asst Boat Chaplain Comm LO Plans Maint to Army

Asst Registered Ship Plans Pub (USMC) Maint Custodian

Asst Ops/Plan Supply LO to Army

LO to Army Asst Supply

Asst Supply

Medical

Figure 8-8. Typical organization of river assault flotilla staff.

AGO 20012A 17 Designation Number Ship/craft type Function APB 2 Barracks ship (self-propelled) Billeting/command APL 2 Barracks lighter (nonself-propelled) Billeting ARL 2 Landing craft repair ship Maintenance FDL 2 Floating dry deck (100-ton) Maintenance LST 2 Landing ship, tank Supply AN 1 Net tender Afloat base security YTB 2 Yard tugboat Salvage; move APL and YFNB LLC 2 Light lift craft Salvage YFNB 1 Covered lighter (large) (nonself-propelled) Miscellaneous Figure S-U. Typical composition of a river support squadron.

Boat ATC Monitor CCB ASPB Commander Crew 11 11 Billet Rate Rate Rate Rate Chief Skipper BM 1 BMC BMC or BM 2 Staff BM 1 Officer Coxswain BM P BM BM 3 Gunner SN (2) GM GM SN (5) SN (4)» FN Commooicatioos Operations SN Engineer EN (2) EN (2) EN (2) Electronics RM RD RM fti1 BMC—Chief boatswain mate. RlYDiy RIVDIV1 BM 1—Boatswain mate first class. BM 2—Boatswain mate second class. EOD BM 3—Boatswain mate third class. Commander Commander BM—Boatswain mate. Tm EN—Engineman. FN—Fireman. T I GM—Gunner's mate. Chief Stf Off-Op Chief Stf f)ff-0p RD—Radarman. RM—Radioman. X I SN—Seaman. 13 ATC 13 ATC Figure 3-6. Composition of crews for iioats of a river 1 CCB 1 CCB 2 Monitors assault división. 3 Monitors 8 ASPB 8 ASPB 1 Refneler (mine hunters, minesweepers, and ordnance disposal personnel) capable of operating var- RIVDIV -• River assault division. ious types of sweep gear in major deep water channels. Figure 3-5. River assault squadron organization. (See app. Bt see. I, for boat nomenclature and description.) c. Coastal patrol units have a variety of ships and craft from destroyers (300 plus ilia; however, they may provide support to feet) down to patrol craft (50 feet or less). elements of the riverine force within their The smaller craft can operate in the lower capabilities. Types of forces that may be pre- reaches of rivers. Coastal patrol units have a sent are— gunfire support capability with weapons rang- a. A waterway patrol unit charged with in- ing from 81-mm mortars to 5-inch naval guns. terdicting enemy LOG along and across major d. Amphibious task forces may conduct waterways. This unit normally has fast, operations in coordination with riverine oper- lightly armored and heavily armed watercraft ations or may conduct diversionary landings designed for use on inland waterways. On re- as part of the riverine area campaign plan. quest, these boats participate in afloat base de- e. Close air support and naval gunfire sup- fense ; act as blocking and flanking forces dur- port may supplement other land-based fire sup- ing tactical operations ; provide high-speed port. transport for small Army units; insert, support, and extract long-range patrols; and perform various other tasks within their assigned 3-13. Navy Riverine Equipment patrol areas and their operational limitations. Appendix B describes Navy ships and water- b. An inland waterway mine clearance unit craft supporting riverine operations.

18 AGO 20012A Section V. AIR FORCE FORCES

3-14. General 3-15. Airlift and Close Air Support Although Air Force forces normally are not a Airlift and close air support procedures esta- part of the riverine force, within their cap- blished within the theater of operations apply abilities they provide close air support, res- to riverine operations. ponsive to the needs of the riverine force.

AGO 20012A 19 ©FFIMSOVS ©[PEKÄTDOMS

Soeíóoira 0. ©SMEBM

4— H. DiTDíD’ÉxáydíBOifa ing. All available fire support is used in river- a. The concept of riverine operations is the ine operations. employment of all available forces by all pos- e. Airborne forces can be employed year sible modes of transportation to seek and des- round in a riverine environment, in conjunc- troy enemy forces or installations (fig. 4-1). tion with forces moving overland or on water. Host country forces may establish one or more The terrain may restrict the size of the air- blocking positions in the area of operations borne force employed ; however, the procedures (AO) ; one portion of the riverine force may outlined in FM 7-20, FM 57-1, and FM 61-100 enter the area by watercraft; another may apply. Based on a map reconnaissance drop employ air assault tactics to enter the area; zones normally are readily available in a river- and a force may move overland, either mounted ine ares. However, their careful selection is preferably based upon aerial reconnaissance or dismoutned : all combine to encircle the necessary because water depth, dikes, canals, enemy force in the AO. Once contact has been and canal banks are hazardous to parachute established, all forces press the enemy and de- landing. In inundated areas a parachutist may ploy to fix him and destroy him in place. Close become entangled in a water-soaked parachute airstrikes, air artillery, waterborne and land- based artillery, and gunfire from the support- and drown. Poor cross-country mobility in a ing naval flotilla support the operation. In riverine area restricts heavy-drop and follow- addition, the naval flotilla may employ water- up supply support. The airdrop of small boats craft to establish blocks onexisting waterways facilitates movement ,and resupply. in support of the operation. 4-2. IFeaeîotræ Drfltuieiragîirag ©¡perstfDOinis b. The principles and tactics prescribed in field manuals of the 7- and 17-series, FM 31-16, a. Mobility. All means of mobility are par- and FM 61-100 apply to operations in a river- tially restricted during riverine operations. ine environment. Movement on foot is least desirable for ma- c. Offensive operations in a riverine envir- neuvering forces because it exhausts troops onment are conducted under many different and severely reduces their rate of movement. terrain conditions and against enemy forces Movement normally requires a combination of with diverse capabilities. Successful operations available means of mobility—foot, wheeled or normally depend on the ability of friendly tracked vehicles, boats, helicopters, and fixed- forces to control and coordinate their move- wing aircraft. Exploiting the movement, fire ments and firepower quickly. Highly mobile support, and logistic assets of supporting Navy maneuver elements and continuous, flexible elements significantly enhances Army fire- fire support are indispensable in riverine areas. power and maneuver capabilities. d. Army units conducting riverine opera- b. Observation. Land navigation and secur- tions are prepared to counter ambushes, to ity are critical in riverine areas. All maneuver operate in temporary isolation, and to exploit elements carry colored smoke grenades and opportunities with little or no advance warn- signal panels for identification conforms to

AGO 20012A AGO 20012A

River Assault Squadron Blocking Force 0 r n-1 0 ,0: :,U v /M' V |^[ Monitor. Q Armoredtroopcarrier|ATC). PH Figure 4--1.Conceptofriverine operations. \v Assault supportpatrolboat(ASPB). ei \o« Blocking Force LEGEND 3d S'- Country V OBJ "N Cióse V a» ■«Sr !» <4Zr ?» wr Support 21 an SOP that is uniform throughout the sector. isting plan or to develop a new plan to main- Positive identification of all ground markings tain contact until the accomplishment of the from the air and subsequent confirmation mission. Units participating in stability oper- from the ground are necessary prior to com- ations in a riverine environment normally mitment of air support. Aircraft and air ob- conduct operations that support the host coun- serves support maneuver elements by— try national campaign plan. These operations (1) Extending the reconnaissance capa- are consistent with the overall U.S. Army bilities of the supported units to the front, mission of assisting a host country to defeat I'anks, and rear. enemy forces and to gain effective govern- (2) Detecting and reconnoitering possi- mental control through internal defense and ble ambush sites. internal development operation. (See FM (3) Determining the extent of obstacles 31-16 for additional details.) Types of opera- a id locating bypasses on the route of move- tions and definitions follow. r tent. a. Search and destroy—This operation sup- (4) Providing readily available fire supports the national campaign plan to destroy port. an enemy force, an enemy base, or both. The c. Night Operations. Nightmission actions of are these feasi- operations is to fix the enemy ble in a riverine area. Operations that may be force and destroy it. The force conducting the impracticable during daylight may prove operation may include mechanized units, highly successful during darkness or limited waterborne units, units moving overland, air visibility. Although night offensive operations cushion vehicle units, or airmobile units. are less frequent than daylight operations, b. Search and clear—This operation sup- they are conducted as intelligence dictates or ports a campaign in a well-defined zone to as a follow-on to an operation initiated during drive enemy forces from the zone. This mis- daylight. Night operations may be used to sion is usually conducted in coordination with gain momentum, to continue the momentum host country military and civil agencies and gained by a successful daylight operation, to requires a longer time to complete than search gain surprise, to cut off withdrawal routes, and destroy operations. and to conduct assaults and platoon- and company-size raids. Reconnaissance and close c. Secure and occupy—This operation sup- coordination are essential. ports a campaign that requires temporary con- (1) Night combat is a part of all opera- trol of designated areas for forward bases. It tions in riverine environments. All units can involves positioning and protecting combat conduct night operations using illumination, and combat service support units. Troops mov- infrared weapon sights, and other night vi- ing by vehicle, watercraft, helicopter, and/or sion devices. Maximum use of night raids, pa- on foot secure the area. trols, and ambushes keeps enemy forces off d. Waterway patrols—This operation (pri- balance, prevent surprise, and obtain intelli- marily a Navy function) may require Army gence. supporting forces on a periodic or permanent (2) Combat reports state that armored basis to achieve and/or maintain control of troop carriers (ATC) can move at night with- designated water routes. out creating excessive noise. Complete secrecy e. Reaction force—Army and Navy elements of movement is not possible, but this does not support host country, other U.S. Forces, or prevent employment of a force, moved by Free World military forces by providing read- ATC, in night operations. ily available, highly mobile reserves or reaction forces. Mechanized and airmobile units 4—2!. Types ©í OHFfecDsóve ©pepeoifciras are particularly well suited for this mission. The mission of all offensive stability operations Although their movement is slower, water- is to destroy or capture the enemy force or in- borne reaction forces may have greater accessi- stallations rather than to secure terrain objec- bility to a specific objective than mechanized tives. Once in contact with the enemy, the or airborne forces. Reconnaissance and sur- commander must be prepared to alter the ex- veillance are necessary to prevent enemy

AGO 20012A forces from ambushing a reserve or reaction The participation of host country forces in force. operations at battalion or company is desir- /. Route clearance—Land and water routes able. Their help in searching private dwellings may have to be cleared for military units or and collecting information can assist in ac- supply convoys. Combined arms teams, includ- complishing the mission. ing surface and air reconnaissance and engineer support units, and/or paramilitary or ir- 4-6. Phasing Operations regular units of the host country perform this mission. This mission is coordinated with local a. Planning Phase. The impact of tactical U.S. advisors. operations on the host country authorities and people can be a major factor in planning op- 4-4. Control Measures erations, particularly in densely populated riverine areas. Desired military results are Control measures used in conventional opera- achieved with the least possible damage or tions are appropriate for use in riverine oper- destruction of property or death to civilians. ations. Because of the habitual employment of searching, blocking, and screening forces, (1) Because most riverine operations in- comprising Army, Navy, or host country ele- volve at least two Services plus host country ments, the positive control of both maneuver forces, parallel and coordinated planning is re- and fire support is a necessity. The use of quired at all echelons. This planning expedites the development of supporting plans and the boundaries, phase lines, checkpoints, contact points, coordination points, linkup points, and preparation of units for the operation. Initial coordination between participating elements no-fire lines are part of the unit standing operating procedures (SOP). Control measures begins on receipt of warning orders. Coordina- that are not a part of, or are in apparent con- tion and liaison between units insure the es- tradiction to, the SOP are confirmed and ex- tablishment of common goals to accomplish the mission. plained in operation orders. (2) Alternate plans are habitually de- 4-5. Liaison veloped to take advantage of opportunities a. The commander controlling the operation that the force creates in the AO or to counter establishes liaison, as appropriate, with the unusual, unsuspected enemy actions or reac- following agencies: tions. Other alternate plans provide for (1) Higher headquarters. changes in water or airlift capabilities and in (2) Other U.S. Army elements partici- the availability of fire support. pating in the operation. (3) Deception plans are necessary to off- (3) Supporting Navy forces. set the almost certain disclosure of unit move- (4) Host country military units involved. ments away from and back to riverine bases. (5) Host country civilian organizations. The commander considers the known capabil- (6) U.S. advisors to host country mili- ities of enemy forces to detect and transmit tary units. movement information, in preparing the de- (7) Third country military units in- ception plan. volved. b. Staging and Loading. The staging and (8) Other governmental and private or- loading of the forces for movement to an AO ganizations. are characteristic of waterborne, airmobile, b. Assignment of qualified host country and airborne operations. Elements, either dis- liaison officers to the division/brigade/battal- mounted or mechanized, may require staging ion is essential and is arranged among U.S. if they are being transported by water or air commanders, U.S. advisors, and appropriate from one location to another. Security precau- host country commanders for each operation. tions are necessary during the staging and The liaison officers’ knowledge of the riverine loading phase to prevent enemy forces’ being area of operation and the population can assist alerted to either the AO location or routes to in identifying friend and foe and can insure it. Security precautions and deception plans close coordination with host country forces. are implemented concurrently.

AGO 20012A 23 c. Movement Phase. maneuverable, and can traverse shallow water- (1) Methods ofways movement. containing Navy dense water- grasses. craft, Army assault boats, helicopters, ar- (h) ACV. The ACV is fast and can mored personnel carriers (APC), trucks, traverse land, water, and swamp areas with fixed-wing aircraft, air cushion vehicles ease. It also has an excellent ditch-crossing (ACV), and foot marches may move com- capability. mitted forces to the AO. Movement may start (i) Foot marches. Foot marches are either a base area or an AO currently occupied. necessary when other transportation is neither (a) Navy watercraft. The river assault available nor feasible. Normally, foot move- squadron (RAS) is organized and equipped to ment is restricted to short marches and fol- move a reinforced infantry battalion either lows initial deployment by other means. into an AO or into a forward staging area (2) Prepositioning. On occasion, because for movement into the AO. The RAS also pro- of insufficient lift capability, part of the fire vides boats for command and control, fire sup- support elements or the combat service support port, patrol/blocking, and minesweeping. elements may deploy to the AO in advance of (h) Army assault boats. These boats the maneuver elements. Planning and move- perform a variety of military tasks; however, ment requirements for prepositioned elements they are not satisfactory in an assault role. are similar to maneuver elements and primary Their use may be limited to administrative forces. Once in position, prepositioned ele- roles where the lines of communications ments can provide security for movement of (LOG) are relatively secure. other elements, assist reaction forces, block (c) Helicopters. Helicopters offer a enemy LOG, execute contingency plans, or rapid, flexible means of movement into and participate in deception operations. within the AO. Many staging areas and land- (3) Security during movement. ing zones are available throughout a riverine (a) The security of moving elements area. is a primary consideration when planning (d) APC’s. Experience indicates that movement. All routes are subject to interdic- APC’s can traverse most of the riverine area tion; and any means of transport, except air- with considerable freedom when moving over craft, is subject to ambush. Threats to unit carefully selected routes. They can move fast movements include mines, roadblocks, ambush, and still retain unit integrity. Movement may sniper harassment, indirect fire, and involve- begin from a land base or an existing AO or ment in a meeting engagement. Reconnais- may follow preliminary positioning by naval sance and security elements precede move- craft. ments. Prior to movement the element is thor- (e) Truck. Truck movement is practi- oughly briefed on plans for security, to include cable along the major roads in a riverine area. communication security with emphasis on Ferrying operations may be required, however, SOP measures for counterambush. An air es- for trucks or troops. When ferries are not cort accompanies unit movements to provide available or are unreliable additional trucks reconnaissance, fire support, and communica- are required on the far side of the waterway tion relay. to continue the movement. Route reconnais- (b) Moving units into an AO without sance, including possible minefields and am- disclosing the forthcoming operation is a ma- bush sites, bridges, and ferries, is necessary. jor problem ; therefore, forces should either use Sufficient assault boats are carried on the indirect routes into the AO or move at night. trucks to provide another crossing means Once enemy forces know the location of the when ferries are inoperable or ferry sites are AO, they may disperse to avoid close combat. congested with civilian traffic. (4) Coordination and control. Detailed (/) Fixed-wing aircraft. Airborne coordination is necessary when multiple means forces can be employed year round. Fixed-wing transport elements to the AO. Communications aircraft may transport forces between base with all moving elements and specified report- areas and forward staging areas. ing procedures are necessary to enable the (g) Airboats. These boats are fast, are control headquarters to monitor the progress

AGO 20012A of the move and to have adequate information of transportation to provide for rapid commit- on which to base decisions affecting the ment. Means of transportation vary with the movement. location of assembly areas and planned commitment. Fast reaction is essential to success. d. Scheme of Maneuver. An aggressive of- fense attains and maintains the initiative. e. Withdrawal and Return Movement. (1) Offensive actions normally are cross- (1) A withdrawal in a riverine environ- country movements toward suspected enemy ment, in which all or part of a deployed force locations or installations. These movements discontinues operations and moves to another are concurrent with the deployment of block- location by watercraft, requires detailed plan- ing forces and supporting units. ning. Enemy forces usually have precise infor- (2) Standard formations apply for move- mation on the location of friendly units and ment within the riverine area. their composition and relative combat power. (3) The following actions are necessary Plans for the withdrawal insure air and fire once contact is established : support throughout the withdrawal operation. (a) Determine the strength and dispo- Procedures outlined in FM 7-20 apply to with- sition of the enemy forces while maintaining drawal before embarking; they apply gener- contact. ally to subsequent phases of the withdrawal. (b) Gain fire superiority to permit (2) Forces withdrawing from an AO use freedom of maneuver. all available means of transport. (c) Deploy forces to prevent enemy (3) Close supervision is required to pre- escape or withdrawal. Waterways frequently vent laxity in units preparing for withdrawal are used to deploy naval and ground forces to and during return movements. Ambush is very accomplish this mission. The RAS can provide likely to occur during the return movement; blocking forces by using organic watercraft to therefore, where possible, units select different block navigable waterways in the area. The routes for withdrawal from those used in host country may participate in the operation movement to the AO. by providing maneuver elements or blocking (4) Considerations peculiar to water- forces. When elements of the riverine force borne withdrawal follow: are prepositioned in a blocking role, the enemy will be aware of an impending operation. (a) Planning procedures include consideration of tide and current information. (d) Make maximum use of fire and Hydrographic factors controlling employment maneuver to destroy or capture enemy forces. of RAS watercraft may require reverse plan- Plans provide for maximum employment of ning procedures because of favorable tide and fire support to destroy the enemy on contact. current conditions. If maneuver elements immediately close with the enemy and attempt to destroy him in close (b) The characteristics and limitations combat, safety considerations for friendly of watercraft affect the achievement of secur- troops may prevent maximum employment of ity and secrecy during the waterborne with- available firepower. drawal. Increased emphasis on deception and active security is required. When feasible, (e) Pursue enemy forces attempting to RAS craft continually patrol the water with- infiltrate through the blocking forces. Security drawal route to deter ambush and mining of the movement is essential to protect pursuit attempts. forces from ambush. The ACV is particularly well suited to conduct pursuit operations either (c) Ambush parties, deployed simi- as a combat vehicle or troop transporter. larly to detachments left in contact, may use (4) A reaction force, as well as fire sup- a waterborne withdrawal as a lure to destroy port elements, may occupy dispersed assembly enemy forces. The withdrawing force be- areas. Each element collocates with its means comes a reaction force familiar with the AO.

AGO 20012A 25 Seeîîoïs DU. DIVDSD©M/iKl©ÂDI ©IPlßÄTriOMS

Q—7. ©Ín)@i(r@idteir5stfk9 ©{? ©|peraîi©iriis 4—8. Ceiradiyef @£ ©perafmns Operations in a riverine environment usually a. Division operations may consist of the differ from those in conventional operations entire division committed to a single operation and environments as follows: or a series of brigades or battalions independ- a. . Extreme climatic conditionsently conductinghave a detri- operations. The division com- mental effect of equipment. Frequent vehicu- mander maintains a reserve, or reaction force, lar cross-country movement with the suspen- varying in size from a single battalion to a sion systems submerged in water, particularly brigade. salt water, shortens the life of all parts with b. In riverine operations the basic forms of rubber components. Prescribed load lists offensive maneuver, frontal attack, penetra- (PLL) provide increased quantities of all tion and envelopment, evolve into an encircle- track and suspension system components. ment or a series of encirclements. Elements Equipment requires lubrication after each op- subordinate to the headquarters controlling eration. Weapons also require frequent oiling the operation may use variations of the basic to protect them from moisture. All types of forms of maneuver to accomplish their mission seals deteriorate rapidly and require frequent (fig. 4-1). inspection to insure replacement at the first c. Airmobile operations in a riverine area indication of failure. Communications equip- generally follow the established doctrine in ment is dried in the sun at every opportunity. FM 7-20 and FM 57-35. Airmobile operations Electronic equipment requires daily preventive are used to commit maneuver elements, block- maintenance. ing forces, reserves, and reaction forces. b. A division operating in a riverine en- (1) Although riverine areas may be vironment normally is assigned a tactical area widely inundated during the wet season, air- of responsibility (TAOR). Host country forces mobile operations are feasible year round. may retain responsibility for insuring govern- Care must be taken to prevent off-loading mental control of the area. Division units can troops into concealed canals. Airmobile opera- expect to conduct operations in specified AO’s tions in forested areas or swamp areas with for prescribed periods. The size of the AO and heavy vegetation may be limited to employ- the duration of operations therein are deter- ment of troops trained in rappelling or to the mined by the factors of mission, enemy, ter- use of landing zones adjacent to the forested rain and weather, and troops available area. (METT). AO’s may vary in size from a few (2) Weather, temperature, and humidity square kilometers up to 150 square kilometers. in the riverine environment affect the lift Operations within them may last from a few capability of helicopters. For example, during days to several weeks. In operations of longer a late afternoon extraction, high temperature, duration, rotation of maneuver units is essen- humidity, or high grass or vegetation may tial to the maintenance of combat effectiveness. necessitate a reduction of loads by one or two c. Division and brigade commanders have men because the lift capability is reduced. the opportunity to employ considerable com- (3) Although not required, moving the bat power using watermobile and airmobile elements to be lifted to a preselected loading means of transportation as well as overland zone near the AO by boats, vehicles, or fixed- movement. The exploitation of all available wing transport aircraft may be advantageous. means of transportation is a key factor in This method of insertion into the AO reduces planning and conducting riverine operations. the distance that helicopters must move troops Exploiting the firepower and logistic assets of and deploys more troops into the objective area Navy elements significantly improves Army faster, without refueling. firepower and maneuver capabilities . These (4) The Army is developing an air-trans- Navy assets are aids to success in actions portable platform for use in loading and un- against enemy forces and their installations in loading troops from helicopters in rice paddies, a riverine area. swamps, and shallow water. The 20-foot-diam-

AGO 20012A eter hexagonal platform is constructed of tions in a riverine area. The squadron and its aluminum tubing surfaced with aluminum troops may be employed in support of water- chain-link fencing. Six 20-foot-long legs at- borne elements or elements moving overland. tached to a steel wire net serve as a base When the employment of an armored cavalry for the structure. The platform weighs 950 troop with a brigade is necessary, the armored pounds and can support 9,500 pounds on marsh cavalry squadron is normally given a mission or rice paddy areas or 4,000 pounds on jungle to support the brigade with a troop, rather foliage. than to attach a troop to the brigade. The air cavalry troop remains under squadron control 4-9. Employment of Reaction Forces to extend the capabilities of the ground troops. a. Because the enemy normally chooses to b. Missions. The armored cavalry squadron fight only when he thinks he can inflict heavy or troop (waterborne or in a ground role) can casualties, rapid response by reaction forces perform reconnaissance and security missions is essential. Reaction operations require flexi- for a larger force. Additional missions within bility, careful planning, coordination, and re- the squadron’s or troop’s capability include liable communications between all elements. convoy security and, airfield security, land or Reaction forces meet established reaction afloat base security. times through planning, rehearsals, and pre- c. Armored Reconnaissance/Airborne As- positioning. sault Vehicle. b. The commander must insure that a valid (1) The armored reconnaissance/airborne requirement for commitment of the reaction assault vehicle (ARAAV) is an air-transport- force exists before he requests or commits it. A able tank, which can be air-landed or air- division reaction element may have a mission dropped into an AO. This mobility provides to be prepared for commitment within the combat power that can be deployed rapidly TAOR, or in support of brigade operations in for riverine operations. The vehicle’s swim an AO. A brigade reaction element normally capability, speed, and maneuverability provide is prepared for commitment within the AO, a cross-country trafficability similar to an only. Airmobile reaction forces can deploy di- APC. It may be employed with waterborne or rectly against located enemy positions. Ele- overland elements. ments on airborne alert are expensive in terms (2) The ARAAV replaces the light gun of resource expenditure; therefore, their use tank in armored cavalry squadrons and the is infrequent. An operation may require a main battle tank in tank battalions. small reaction force, normally company size, d. Air Cavalry Troop. to be aloft during the critical stages of the (1) The air cavalry troop complements operation. This force normally provides the the capabilities of the armored cavalry troop most responsive reaction force. Waterborne during reconnaissance, surveillance, and secur- reaction forces embarked in ATC’s frequently ity missions in a riverine area. This troop can be available for rapid and effective com- may conduct independent reconnaissance and mitment in a riverine environment. Reaction surveillance, reaction force, raid, air patrol, or forces, in the desired condition of readiness, counterambush missions. are in assembly areas, either at land bases or (2) When maneuver units are not avail- at afloat bases, with a suitable landing area able for use in blocking positions, air cavalry nearby. To facilitate immediate employment scout platoons can observe possible enemy of the reaction force, the commander completes escape routes; air cavalry infantry and weap- all possible preparations in advance. ons platoons can. be used to block these routes.

4-10. Armored Cavalry Operations 4-11. Tank Battalion a. General. The armored cavalry squadron a. General. The tank battalion is equipped performs reconnaissance and surveillance mis- with the ARAAV instead of the main battle sions and provides security for the unit to tank (para 4-10c). The tank battalion may be which assigned or attached. This squadron employed independently ; however, normally rarely conducts independent offensive opera- cross-attachment between the tank battalion

AGO 20012A 27 and mechanized infantry battalions is accom- being transported in Navy craft. Whether the plished to form tank-infantry teams and task tanks swim or are transported by Navy craft forces. The tank battalion may be employed depends on the distance. with a waterborne force or an overland force. b. Missions. The tank battalion can conduct The force may be transported in Navy craft raids and perform missions as a reaction for waterborne operations; or, the combat ele- force, an encircling force, an assault force, ments may be waterborne using vehicular and a counterambush force. swim capabilities with the logistic elements S

<3-1] 2. ©emaiTGoO ments and Navy watercraft prepare to carry a. Introduction.This section provides guid- out counterambush attack plans at any time ance to infantry battalions and subordinate during the movement. units in planning and conducting waterborne (4) The assault landing formation is con- operations. The operations outlined in this sistent with the planned scheme of maneuver. section describe only one of the many ways Initial objectives are designated to provide se- that watercraft can increase battlefield mobil- curity for the landing area and to facilitate ity in a riverine environment. assembly and reorganization of units. Each b. Concept of Waterborne Operations. ATC normally transports one full-strength (1) Units conducting riverine operations rifle platoon ; this maintains unit integrity and use water transport extensively to move troops simplifies assembly and reorganization. When and equipment throughout the area. Water- the landing is not opposed, the units move borne operations normally start from areas rapidly through the initial objectives. Units where ground forces and naval watercraft prepare to accept combat at any stage of the marshal and load and where forces can effect landing. RAS boats provide supporting fires to coordination. This may be at a land base adja- the flanks and rear, as well as to the front of cent to a navigable waterway, at an afloat the maneuver units. The assault landing plan base on a navigable waterway, or in an exist- includes preparatory and on-call supporting ing AO. Once troops are aboard, the water- fires. craft proceed to designated landing areas (5) The commander initiates a movement within an assigned AO for offensive operations. to contact when the assault landing is complete, (2) Unit plans include control measures, the initial objectives have been secured, and such as phase lines and checkpoints, for the the reorganization of the unit is complete. He entire operation. The commander controls the uses encirclement and surprise to fix the enemy unit’s movement either from a command and force and to prevent its withdrawal, and he control boat (CCB) located within the move- employs firepower to destroy it. ment formation or from an airborne com- (6) Navy watercraft and Army assault mand post. Maneuver unit commanders em- boats are used to accomplish a variety of mis- barked in command and control craft dis- sions. CCB provide communication facilities mount from these craft to influence the action for command echelons to control the riverine of their units. force when it is away from the land or afloat (3) Security measures employed during base. Monitors provide both direct and indi- the water movement include watercraft for- rect fire support to the riverine force in base mations, constant water patrolling, ground areas, during movement, and land operations. patrolling when possible along the route, air Primary missions of ASPB include security in observation, and column cover with armed air- base areas and fire support and armed escort craft. Close air support aircraft on air or during movement and operations. Army as- ground alert, artillery, and naval gunfire ships sault boats support the operation by maximum or boats provide fire support. The monitors and use of existing waterways. assault support patrol boats (ASPB) are the (7) The combat base for the waterborne primary source of RAS fires. Maneuver ele- battalion may include both water and land

AGO 20012A areas. This base normally includes those sup- helps provide surprise, which is essential in port elements of the maneuver battalion and the riverine warfare. Navy RAS not used with forward tactical c. Task Organization. Waterborne opera- units and Army and Navy command and con- tions require the integration of appropriate trol elements. The battalion combat base moves Army and Navy forces at each echelon. The as required to control and support the opera- task organization integrates battalion with tional elements. The size of the AO or the lack RAS, company with boat division, and platoon of waterways deep enough for RAS craft may with boat. Commanders at each echelon base prevent the battalion combat base from mov- their actions and orders on the command re- ing as close to forward elements as necessary lationship prescribed in orders from higher for command and control. In this case, the headquarters (para 3—4 through 3-7). The unit commander establishes a tactical com- battalion requires the following information mand post and follows the operation on foot to determine the required naval support: or by Army assault boat or helicopter. (1) The ability of naval watercraft to (8) Dismounted troops carry only essen- move to, within, and around the AO. tial equipment as they wade through knee- (2) The maneuver elements needed in the deep mud and waist-to-chest-high water. The AO and the availability and desirability of battalion may use supporting weapons and other means of transport to deliver them. equipment in the battalion combat base areas. d. Preparation for Waterborne Operations. Assault boats, other watercraft, or helicopters (1) Waterborne operations require de- deliver these weapons and equipment to ma- tailed planning at all levels and close coordi- neuver elements. Assault boats transport these nation with a supporting naval RAS. items when the route is relatively secure. (2) Units conducting waterborne opera- (9) Individual morale and alertness de- tions must be ready to begin the operation as crease markedly after about 48 hours of con- soon as possible after receiving orders. Assault tinuous operations in inundated areas. Rotat- boat operators require training in operation, ing units not only helps to overcome this prob- maintenance, and navigation. The use of RAS lem but also helps to alleviate the effects on craft for movement to the AO reduces the personnel of immersion foot and fungus in- training requirement for assault boat opera- fection of the feet. Units withdraw by water- tions. As a minimum, training consists of craft or other means, according to plan. The briefings in the marshaling or staging area to withdrawal of troops from the AO is a tac- acquaint Army personnel with embarkation/ tical movement back to the watercraft loading loading procedures, required action during the areas. Units are loaded in reverse sequence to that used in the waterborne assault landing; water movement, and debarkation/landing pro- e.g., artillery normally lands last and loads cedures. first in withdrawing. Security of the loading (3) The following measures are necessary to maintain unit readiness: area is necessary throughout the withdrawal (a) Maintain a detailed unit alert and operation. A tactical water movement back to marshaling plan and prepare to execute the base areas or to another AO follows the load- plan without delay. ing. (b) Prepare supplies and equipment (10) Plans allow sufficient time between for immediate loading aboard watercraft in operations for troop rest, medical attention, accordance with established load plans. equipment maintenance, training to correct de- (c) Issue necessary supplies and,spe- ficiencies, and planning for future operations. cial equipment to personnel. (11) Units can maintain secrecy and de- (d) Maintain current SOP loading ceive enemy forces by loading under conceal- plans for types of watercraft used. ^ ment of darkness and moving in a direction (e) Maintain part of the authorized other than toward the designated AO. Later, supplies and heavy equipment and part of the the boats can reverse their course and, moving unit basic load of ammunition aboard water- at full speed, arrive at the landing site before craft when possible. the enemy force can react. This technique

AGO 20012A 29 (/) Conduct frequent inspections, 4-H3. Planning Waîeirlboirn® 0|peirafîô®ns checks, and rehearsals. a. General. Plans for waterborne operations e. Plans and Orders. are detailed enough to give all participants (1) Warning order. The commander is- complete information but simple and flexible sues a warning order early in the planning enough to be modified as the tactical situation phase to enable subordinate unit commanders changes. to begin planning and preparing for the op- b. Planning Sequence. eration concurrently. The warning order for a (1) Plans for a waterborne operation are waterborne operation is a brief oral or written usually developed in the following sequence: message and generally contains the informa- (a) Scheme of maneuver based on the tion necessary to start preparations. It may in- mission, troops available, and intelligence con- clude— cerning the enemy force and terrain, and in- (a) Data on marshaling or staging, includes withdrawal. cluding security measures to be adopted during (b) Assault plan based on the scheme this phase. of maneuver. (b) Information concerning the num- (c) Water movement plan based on the ber and type of watercraft allocated to each assault plan and the scheme of maneuver. subordinate unit. (d) Loading plan based on the water (c) Approximate time and date of movement plan, the assault plan, and the movement and planned length of operation. scheme of maneuver. (d) Waterborne route, if known. (e) Marshaling plan, when required, (e) Information on the AO. based on the loading plan, the water movement (2) Operation order. An operation order plan, the assault plan, and the scheme of ma- that includes the commander’s concept of the neuver. operation and specific tasks to subordinate ele- (/) Deception Plan, when required, ments follows the warning order. At battalion, based on the mission. this order may be oral or written. (2) Although these various plans usually /. Marshaling Security. are discussed separately, at brigade and battal- (1) The time for planning and moving ion they are prepared as paragraphs of the a waterborne force to its AO may vary from operation order. Planning follows the sequence several hours to several days. When friendly indicated above, but the plans are interrelated security measures are lax, the enemy force in and are developed concurrently. Combat sup- the AO may have sufficient time to take evasive port and combat service support planning be- action and to prepare defensive positions or gins with the scheme of maneuver and con- ambushes along the planned route. tinues throughout the planning sequence. (2) The necessity for secrecy in planning c. Scheme of Maneuver. and conducting a waterborne operation calls (1) The scheme of maneuver is the phase for strict security measures early in the plan- of the operation that starts after the initial ning stage to prevent the enemy’s gaining objectives in the landing area have been se- knowledge of the operation. Only those person- cured and includes those operations necessary nel who have a need to know are informed of to complete the mission. It may include dis- a scheduled waterborne operation until all per- placement and linkup with other forces. With- sonnel are in the marshaling area and re- drawal is planned together with the scheme of stricted to it. Preparation, training, and re- maneuver. It may be either a part of the op- hearsals during marshaling appear routine. eration order or a separate order. Periodic practice seal-in alerts accustom the (2) The scheme of maneuver prescribes local populace to conditions that exist during a task organization; assigns missions, objec- marshaling for actual operations. tives as appropriate, boundaries, and other (3) When operating from an afloat base, control measures; and provides for a reserve. there is no requirement for marshaling because It takes into consideration those special fac- the entire force lives aboard watercraft. tors or features as inundated land, use of sup-

AGO 20012A porting watercraft, use of fire support, and lb. Perform damage control and sal- close air support. vage. (3) The scheme of maneuver of a water- 15. Provide maintenance and repair of borne force is planned to seize the initiative watercraft. and to force the enemy to react to the opera- (b) As described in appendix B, the tion. Maneuver elements use waterborne capa- waterborne force may employ Army assault bilities of the RAS to the maximum in mov- boats to— ing to the AO, attempting to encircle the en- 1. Position blocking forces. emy prior to landing, deploying blocking 2. Displace crew-served weapons. forces, emplacing artillery units, providing 3. Provide a means of moving either supplies in the AO, and other combat service between naval craft or between naval craft support missions. The primary objective is still and shore when waterway conditions prevent the enemy force, not the terrain. the landing of troops directly from the naval (4) The scheme of maneuver is designed watercraft. to encircle a suspected enemy force in the AO. b. Conduct medical evacuation. Terrain objectives are selected which block (c) Employment of ACV. escape and permit fixing of the enemy force 1. The ACV’s high speed, together so that it can be destroyed. with its capability to travel over water and (5) Plans insure that units maintain land, makes it especially suitable for employ- pressure on the enemy, once contact is made. ment in support of operations on waterways Forces are deployed rapidly to fix the enemy and inundated or partially inundated areas. force in a position where maximum fire sup- Its ability to traverse dry land allows this ve- port can assist units to close with and destroy hicle to retain high mobility during dry sea- or capture the enemy force. sons while watercraft are restricted to peren- nial waterways. (6) Units use waterways to the maximum possible within the AO to capitalize on 2. Missions or tasks for which these supporting watercraft capabilities. vehicles may be used in support of operations include— (o) Navy RAS watercraft(a) Flank operatingguard or screening.in close support of the maneuver elements can— (b) Area reconnaissance. 1. Transport and support ground (c) Route reconnaissance. troops in the assault. (d) Blocking forces. 2. Act as, or in support of, a block- (e) Reserve or exploitation force ing force. transportation. 3. Conduct reconnaissance, security, (f) Enemy watercraft intercep- and combat patrols. tion. ■4. Transport and land a raiding (g) Mobile command post for com- force. mand and control. 5. Displace crew-served weapons. (h) Resupply of critical items and 6. Transport reserves. emergency medical evacuation. 7. Perform resupply and evacuation d. Waterborne Withdrawal. tasks. (1) During preparation for the water- 8. Serve as a command or utility ve- borne operation, planners determine the avail- hicle. ability of waterways in the AO, tide and cur- 9. Serve as a mobile aid station. rent information for the scheduled period of 10. Provide direct and indirect fire operations, and suitable loading sites. This in- support. formation, kept current during the operation, 11. Withdraw or redeploy troops. provides the basis for planning the waterborne 12. Act as a firing platform for 105- withdrawal. mm howitzer or 81-mm mortars. (2) Active employment of watercraft 13. Evacuate prisoners of war (PW), during offensive maneuver simplifies deception defectors, and detainees. in the initial stages of a waterborne with-

AGO 20012A 31 drawal. The quantity of hydrographic informa- (e) Availability of dispersed loading tion available increases as a result of this sites and standby maneuver area for ATC’s. employment. (/) Protection from enemy observation (3) When possible, waterborne with- and fíres. drawal is timed to allow watercraft to ap- e. Assault Plan. proach loading areas with the current, on the (1) The scheme of maneuver is the basis rising tide; to load during slack high water; for the assault plan. The assault plan desig- and to depart with the current, on the falling nates the sequence and the time and place of tide. landing of maneuver, combat support, and (4) Because of the security problems that combat service support units in the landing accompany large waterborne movements and areas; securing initial objectives; and reorga- the use of predictable routes, loading during nization of the unit. the last hours of daylight and moving under (2) Landing areas are selected to avoid the concealment of darkness should be con- prepared enemy defensive positions. The RAS sidered. Moving reconnaissance elements along commander provides recommendations for ten- possible withdrawal routes several hours ahead tative landing areas and alternates, when of the movement group is a useful deceptive practicable. Planners must assume that the as- measure. sault landing will be opposed. Figure 4—2 (5) Loading, normally the most critical shows an assault plan diagram. The follow- phase of the withdrawal, requires detailed ing influence the selection and the location of planning in the selection of troop assembly landing areas: areas, loading areas, loading control measures, (a) Scheme of maneuver. and watercraft rendezvous areas. (b) Mission and size of the waterborne (6) Size of the force to be loaded, per- force. sonnel training, and time available determine (c) Enemy situation and capabilities. the detail necessary in the withdrawal plan. (d) Available landing areas and indi- Routine loading instructions are included in vidual watercraft landing sites within these unit SOP. Withdrawal plans also include— areas. (o) Schedule(e) for Requirement movement of to units land tothe reconnais- loading areas. sance platoon or similar size unit on the op- (6) Schedule and priorities for loading. posite bank of the waterway to provide rear (c) Designation of loading areas and security from the “far bank.” loading sites. (/) Capabilities and limitations of wa- (d) Designation of and instructions tercraft. for loading control personnel. (g) Characteristics of the waterways (7) The highest headquarters involved in and adjacent land areas. the withdrawal designates loading areas. These (3) When landing sites within the land- areas are as close to unit positions as the ing area are insufficient or inadequate, several waterways, terrain, and enemy situation per- elements may use the same site, landing in mit. Multiple loading areas are desirable to turn. When using a single landing site, ma- achieve maximum speed in loading and depar- neuver units are landed first, combat support ture and to provide passive protection against elements next, and combat service support enemy actions. Factors for consideration in elements last. selecting the location and number of loading (4) The commander may recommend a areas include— time for landing- if more than one battalion (a) Loading area requirements for the is participating in the operation, or he may types of watercraft to be used. select the time for landing when the battalion (b) Number of watercraft and time or its elements are conducting an independent needed for loading. operation. In recommending or selecting the (c) Availability of facilities for im- time for landing, the commander considers proving loading areas. enemy dispositions and capabilities; the in- (d) Availability of watercraft control fluence of predicted weather, tides, and visi- facilities.

AGO 20012A Ri« OBJ vH/rt ALFA LA BR AVO HJÏJ ft if or oo o o u L“>- VLA DELTAS • • •

LEGEND if--CCB. —Supply ATC.

|f"Ho«itoi. ^—iASPB.

I [--Landing site. LA—Landing area.

Figure U-2. Assault plan diagram. bility, both day and night; the number and (b) Units may land at night or under type of watercraft being used; the availability conditions of reduced visibility to gain sur- of fire support; and the plan for supporting prise and to reduce the effectiveness of enemy fires. fires. Landings under these conditions have the (a) Units may land at first light to following limitations: take advantage of darkness during the water 1. Accurate delivery of units to their movement and to begin the subsequent opera- landing area is more complicated. tion in daylight. They may land and reorga- 2. Air, RAS, and artillery fire sup- nize immediately before darkness and then be- port may be less effective. gin the subsequent operation during darkness. 3. Reorganization and securing of Waterborne landings during daylight present initial objectives in the landing area may be fewer command and control problems, can be more difficult and time consuming. more complex, and can be better supported by A. Danger from navigational hazards the RAS and close air support. increases.

AGO 20012A 33 (5) The landing phase is critical. Maneu- lights, radio homing devices, audible signals, ver and combat support elements debark as and distinctive markings on clothing and rapidly as possible and secure the initial ob- equipment. jectives. Although the securing of initial objectives provides only a momentary pause for /. Water Movement Plan. assembly and reorganization before subsequent (1) The water movement plan, prepared operations begin, all units attain and maintain by the supporting Navy commander when a combat posture. Each element is prepared to RAS watercraft are used, is based on the land- contribute its combat power in a coordinated ing plan, which, in turn, is based on the effort to secure the landing area. Figure 4-3 scheme of maneuver. This plan includes the depicts a typical landing formation. Initial ob- composition of the waterborne force, the orga- jectives provide— nization of movement serials, the formation to (a) Cover and concealment from enemy be used, movement routes, command and con- observation and fire. trol measures, security measures, mine coun- (b) Sufficient size for dispersion. termeasures, plans for fire support and imme- (c) Proximity to landing areas. diate reaction to ambush. (d) Desired dispersion of subordinate (2) A water movement is planned as the elements to conduct the subsequent operation. approach march phase of a movement to con- (e) Ease of identification. tact and normally uses Navy watercraft as the (6) Although assembly and reorganiza- means of transportation. During planning, the tion are less complicated than in airmobile or commander considers that— airborne operations, some assembly aids may (a) An RAS can provide sufficient wa- be used. These assembly aids include panels, tercraft to move a reinforced infantry battal- colored smoke or other pyrotechnics, colored ion. Other naval ships and craft, not nor-

OBJECTIVE RED

LANDING AREA ALFA Lfi.J LI*

I / ss's ^ c::>' ¡:::y o-x < j

[LA CHARLIEJ ■1ZI-

LEGEND

|^j— Monitor. Q-™. ^-- ASPB. --Supply ATC-

Figure 4-8. Typical landing formation.

34 AGO 20012A available means of transport. Troops are mally a part of the RAS, may be available for as specific operation. Appendix B contains de- briefed thoroughly on security plans, with tails on naval watercraft characteristics and emphasis on counterambush and SOP security capabilities. measures. (b) Army assault boats can provide (6) Organic and attached reconnaissance elements use both Navy watercraft and Army mobility for a reinforced infantry battalion assault boats for water route reconnaissance. employed as a waterborne force. Although as- The size of the movement unit, the length of sault boats can traverse waterways not navi- the formation, the speed of advance, the ter- gable to RAS craft, they are susceptible to rain, and the suspected disposition of enemy enemy action and should not be used in the as- forces along the routes determine the area on sault except in emergencies. each side of the waterway that is reconnoi- (3) The water movement order is issued tered. Commanders consider attaching engi- to subordinate units in the operation order neer elements to the reconnaissance units to format. A water movement table, route over- assist in the destruction of obstacles and for- lay or strip map, and watercraft loading tables tified positions. Army assault boats are used are included in the water movement order. only when the threat is insignificant. Appendix E contains examples of the tables; (7) Planners consider formations that figure 4-4 is an example of a route overlay. contribute to movement control and mutual The water movement order may be an annex to support while retaining unit integrity as much the operation order with detailed instructions as possible. Figure 4-5 shows a typical water in appendixes to the water movement annex. movement formation. Units conducting water (4) The water movement table lists as- movements normally have four primary com- signments of units to serials or movement units within the water movement columns. ponents: an advance guard, a flank guard, a The location of units in successive serials or rear guard, and a main body. Formations are movement units complies with landing prior- similar to those used in ground movements to ities. Ideally, all elements of a given serial or contact. The functions of the security elements movement unit land in the same landing area, and the distances within the formation are using several landing sites. However, opera- outlined in FM 7-11 and FM 7—20. These for- tional requirements may necessitate a release mations facilitate Navy control of watercraft point (RP) en route to the landing area. Con- movements while maintaining unit integrity. trol passes to elements of the serial or move- (a) Advance guard. This component, ment unit at this point. The elements then pro- operating ahead of the main body, uses naval ceed to the designated landing area or land- watercraft and/or assault boats to prevent un- ing site and land in the order specified in the necessary delay in the movement of the main landing plan; or they go to the planned area body and to protect it from surprise frontal of employment to conduct fire support, block- attack. It covers the deployment of the main ing, or other missions to support the opera- body if necessary. The advance guard is far tion. Tactical integrity for Army and Navy enough in front of the main body to allow the units is maintained as far as practicable. succeeding element to deploy without serious (5) Security ofinterference the units involvedfrom the in enemy,the but not so far movement is a primary consideration during as to prevent the succeeding element from planning. Threats to waterborne units include rapidly assisting the advance guard, when re- water mines, water obstacles, ambush, harass- quired. This distance is approximately 400 ment by snipers and indirect fire, and direct meters. The battalion reconnaissance platoon involvement in a meeting engagement. Armed may be used as the advance guard. helicopters escort all water movements and (b) Flank guard. In the approach provide reconnaissance, fire support, and com- march, flank guards operate in the area from munication relays. Close air support is avail- a point opposite the rear of the advance guard able, as required. When possible, waterborne to a point opposite the front of the rear guard movements are preceded by minesweepers and to protect the main body. Naval watercraft reconnaissance and security elements using all serve as a close-in flank guard. Elements from

35 AGO 20012A «

AREA OF OPERATIONS ABOI 36 ; ABOI 3 7

ABOI 3 5 AG2021 RP PL PURPLE / 10 f

AG2018 €

AG2 015 BASE AREA

SP PL GREEN SP © NOTE: Targets are designated along route as necessary

LEGEND O Checkpoint.

Built-up area.

AG2015 Planned fire support.

Figure U-h- Water movement diagram.

36 AGO 20012A i ••• 0

••• er Û n M

•••

LEGEND er ■-CCB. Û --ASPB.

Monitor. -Minesweeping I I -ATC. 0 gear. Q

Figure U-5. Typical battalion waterborne movement formation.

AGO 20012A 37 the main body may be required to provide a tions. Some battalion loading plans may be flank guard operating on land adjacent to the complex enough to require written instructions water movement route. Naval watercraft and for delivering troops and equipment to the Army assault boats can transport the flank loading area; designating loading sites, load- guard operating ashore from one blocking po- ing times, and priorities; and specifying per- sition to the next to maintain the flank guard’s sonnel, supplies, and equipment to be loaded position alongside the main body. aboard each watercraft. Unit SOP simplify (c) Rear guard. The rear guard follows loading plans and reduce loading time and and protects the main body from enemy at- written orders to a minimum. tack from the rear. The rear guard normally (2) Details of the loading plan are co- consists of naval patrol-type boats and may or ordinated with the supporting Navy RAS may not have ground troops embarked. The through liaison personnel and/or joint staff rear guard is organized similar to the advance planning. The watercraft loading table (app guard except that it is oriented to the rear E) specifies personnel, equipment, and supplies and may include a trail party. The rear guard to be loaded in each watercraft. This table is also controls any friendly water traffic that normally published as an appendix to the wa- overtakes the movement column. ter movement plan. (d) Main body. The bulk of the battal- (3) A loading area diagram may be is- ion and supporting forces comprise the main sued as part of the water movement plan to body. This element is organized for combat insure a coordinated effort and to avoid con- before the water movement begins. Units are fusion in loading during large operations. Fig- positioned for rapid deployment if the enemy ure 4-6, an example of a typical loading area attacks during the movement. Watercraft in diagram, shows a combination of loading from the formation must assist rapid employment a land base and an afloat base. of assault troops in any direction without excessive risk of collision. (8) Both Army and Navy forces develop . iiti id!g.^r RDVU 4 AREA plans for coordinated, immediate reactions to ZULU enemy ambush encountered during water movement. Plans include designation of coun- /ROVUN terambush maneuver elements, command and t AREA \ VlRAYJ i control measures, fire support, all-round security, identification and recognition of committed elements, and recovery and reorganiza- L 5 APB tion of the committed force. Provisions are in- C? i cluded for watercraft security and reserves ROVO AREA when major elements of the ground force have YANKEE been committed to counterambush missions.

The waterborne force’s mission determines the : reaction to an enemy ambush. Actions may AREA C ■cs «o range from commitment of the entire water- I ROVU AREA D-J borne force to attack and destroy enemy forces AREA encountered to taking evasive action and sup- OHISKEY pressing the ambush by fire and continuing the movement. /^N- loadioi area,,, g. Loading Plan. D '-Loading alta.' (1) The water movement plan is the1 I -- Loading station. basis for the loading plan. At battalion and Figure i-6. Typical loading area. lower levels, they are integrated into one plan. The loading plan for a waterborne operation (4) In preparing loading plans, the fol- is normally less complex and detailed than lowing items are considered: for airborne, airmobile, or amphibious opera- (a) Mission. The loading plan supports

AGO 20012A the mission, which determines the troops, 3. Litter patient—190 pounds. equipment, and supplies to be moved. (5) The senior Army member aboard (b) Watercraft. Personnel preparing each watercraft prepares a manifest, which is loading plans are familiar with the types and an informal listing of the Army personnel and characteristics (app B) of the watercraft equipment loaded on that craft. Copies of the available. Cargo-carrying characteristics listed completed manifest for each craft are delivered below are considered: to the Army unit commander who uses them 1. Allowable cargo load. as an aid in prompt determination of any losses 2. Size and shape of the cargo com- that may occur. partment and its limiting features. (6) Spare watercraft are available in the 3. Strength of deck (flooring). loading area, if possible, in case one or more 4. Location and strength of cargo tie- watercraft abort. down fittings. 5. Location, number, and type of 4-14. Conduct of Waterborne Operations troop seats or troop space available. a. Preparation. 6. Capacity to carry assault boats (1) Units are trained and prepared to externally. conduct waterborne operations on short no- 7. Capability to tow assault boats tice. SOP are kept current by applying lessons and other watercraft. learned in previous waterborne operations. 8. Organic loading aids available Training and adequate unit SOP allow mar- (ramps, winches, and hoists). shaling activities to focus on the pending tac- (c) Unit integrity. Unit integrity is tical operation. maintained if possible. (2) Units complete preparations for the (d) Distribution. Key personnel are tactical operation, move to their loading area, distributed throughout the main body so that and load on assigned watercraft in accordance the loss of one boat does not destroy the unit’s with the water movement table and informa- command structure. Key items of equipment, tion in the watercraft loading table. Bulk sup- such as crew-served weapons and communica- plies and ammunition are transported to the tions equipment, are also distributed through- loading site and loaded and lashed in desig- out the movement formation. Medical person- nated watercraft. nel are also distributed throughout the main (3) Since several units may use the same body. The boat that transports the battalion loading site, loading must be completed and surgeon is the battalion aid station for the watercraft moved to their assigned rendezvous movement. When possible, this craft serves as area according to the time .schedule in the the battalion aid station in the AO. It is nor- water movement table. mally attached to the movement unit contain- b. Water Movement. ing the forces to secure the combat base on (1) General. All water movements out- reaching the AO. side base areas are tactical moves. They are (e) Self-sufficiency. Personnel and am- similar to the approach march of a movement munition are loaded in the same watercraft to contact in ground operations where speed with their crew-served weapons, and compo- of movement and security of the formation nent parts are loaded with major items of are essential. The intent of the operation is to equipment. Personnel to unload the cargo at move directly to the objective; however, the the destination accompany each watercraft. unit is prepared for combat at any point along (/) Weights. Standard weights for in- the movement route. The terrain and the en- dividuals plus their combat equipment and emy situation normally require an advance their share of hand-carried table of organiza- guard, flank guards, and a rear guard to portion and equipment (TOE) equipment are tect the main body during movement. Enemy used in computing watercraft loads: forces have an infiltration and ambush capa- 1. Watercraft crewman—200 pounds. bility and have developed techniques to ex- 2. Combat equipped soldier—240 ploit watermobility. They have a movement pounds. and a limited combat capability when water-

AGO 20012A 39 borne. During movement, the primary threat is normally an ambiish on the flanks rather than to the front, and the enemy may strike at any point in the column. Units are organized for a rapid assault landing to either flank, followed by subsequent landings to close with and destroy the ambush force. (2) Organization. The organization for the approach march (described in FM 7-20) applies generally to waterborne movements. & There are organizational differences because watercraft are used as a means of transportation. Counterambush plans may be to suppress the ambush by fire and continue movement or assault and destroy the ambush force. The ac- Q tion taken to counter the ambush depends on 0 the mission, the size of the ambush, thé ability of security forces to suppress the ambush force LEGEND and protect the main body, and the character- 0 □- ATC. istics of the waterway. The formation adopted .NOTE: All boats are normally consists of an advance guard, a flank assigned a sector ASPB. of sorveillaoce. û- guard, a rear guard with a trail party, and a oesweepmg gear main body. i--"'

Monitor (a) Advance guard. The advance guard a- of a waterborne movement normally includes a mine countermeasure element, a reconnaissance element, and a fire support element. Fig- Figure 4-7. Typical advance guard formation. ure 4-7 is an example of advance guard formation. The tactics employed and formation used uses assault boats, the boat procedures de- by a waterborne reconnaissance element are scribed in appendix C are followed. described in appendix C. 3. The support element is composed of naval watercraft, which move with the re- 1. The mine countermeasures ele- connaissance elements and provide support as ment consists of naval watercraft with mine- required. The commander of the reconnais- sweeping equipment. This element adopts a sance element may ride in one of the support formation based on the type of equipment boats to use the boat’s communications facil- used. This group moves in advance of the ad- ities for control and to direct the fire support vance-guard to clear the waterway of mines. provided to reconnaissance elements engaging Engineer personnel may be attached to the enemy forces. element to assist naval personnel in clearing (b) Flank guard. RAS craft provide a mines. close-in flank guard and are normally as- 2. The reconnaissance element con- signed to a zone during movement. The zone sists of troops operating in ATC to locate en- may be on a flank, between serials of move- emy elements in the vicinity of the waterway ment units, within serials or movements units, banks. The area reconnoitered depends on the or a combination of these positions. The for- speed of the main body, the terrain, and enemy mation of the main body and other factors, activity. Reconnaissance elements may be aug- such as hydrographic conditions, are used to mented with engineer personnel to destroy determine locations for flank guards. When the enemy fortifications encountered. Reconnais- column is attacked, aggressive action by the sance elements maintain constant vigilance close-in flank guard provides the commander for wires that may lead to command-detonated time and space for maneuver of the main watermines. When the reconnaissance element body. Air cavalry or airmobile units are used

40 AGO 20012A to extend reconnaissance and surveillance be- craft, availability of fire support craft, and yond the shores of the waterway. control measures required influence the selec- (c) Rear guard. RAS craft normally tion of a formation for the waterborne move- provide a rear guard during movement. While ment. The main body is divided into serials or a rear guard may not be necessary during movement units that can be effectively con- movement, when forward movement halts, the trolled. Formations are developed on the basis waterborne force is vulnerable from the rear of planned reaction to enemy attach with em- and requires the deployment of a rear guard phasis on maintaining unit or element tactical for security. Surveillance of the waterway tra- integrity. versed is important to preclude the enemy (a) Formation used when there is a from placing watermines behind the water- significant enemy threat. This formation (fig. borne force. The enemy attempts to detonate 4-8) is used when contact is probable and these mines when the waterborne force re- when enemy control of terrain adjacent to the turns from the operation. waterway makes it preferable. Lateral disper- (d) Main body. The main body com- sion and maneuver are limited in narrow chan- prises the bulk of the waterborne force and nels. This formation permits rapid employ- consists of maneuver elements and the naval ment of ground forces toward the flanks when command and control elements. It is organized required and permits massing of fire when an for combat prior to movement. The serials or ambush is suppressed and movement contin- movement units within the main body are or- ues. Naval fire support craft of the flank and ganized for employment singly or in a coor- rear guard position themselves to support the dinated action. The entire waterborne force is assault landing of maneuver elements instead oriented toward counterattack to the flanks, of interposing themselves between the enemy rather than to the front. Each movement unit force and the ATC’s. provides a reserve and far-bank security dur- (b) Column formation. This formation ing counterattack actions. is used when friendly forces control the ter- (e) Trail party. rain adjacent to the waterway, when the en- 1. Although a trail party is not nor- emy situation is not clear, or when control of mally designated in a battalion-size water watercraft during the movement is a major movement, trail party functions to include consideration. It provides maximum control towing, damage control/salvage, medical aid, and prevents a major portion of the unit from and providing available spare transport craft, becoming involved in a single ambush. It also are required. Spare transport craft are at- provides maximum use of naval firepower and tached to the rear movement unit and are pre- allows sufficient time and space for the main pared to tow disabled craft and to perform body to maneuver. Figure 4-9 shows a typical minor damage control and salvage. column formation. 2. Designated craft within the (4) Control. Control procedures for the movement units tow disabled craft clear of water movement are similar to those for other the formation, and elements of the last move- movements. ment unit or the trail party take these vehicles in tow. Other assistance, such as fire- (a) Rendezvous area. Control of the fighting, may also be required, and embarked movement begins in the rendezvous area troops may have to assist boat crews in im- where the serials or movement units form for mediate action. Appendix C describes these the water movement. required actions. If an RAS can repair break- (b) Start point. Movement units pro- downs or combat damage, disabled craft will ceed from their rendezvous area in formation be repaired while being towed. When possible, to cross the start point (SP) at the scheduled relatively secure areas along the water move- time. The security units (advance, flank, and ment route are used to berth more seriously rear guards) are assigned SP times and ren- disabled craft, pending retrieval or repair by dezvous areas, as necessary, to form them river support squadron units. properly in relation to the main body. (3) Formations. Enemy information, (c) Checkpoints. Checkpoints are used width of the channel, availability of transport as in other movements.

AGO 20012A 41 ñ <¡; !!û Û

ADVANCE GUARD Û Û

Û û •M

MAIN BODY h sff a ö

LEGEND Û Q -InfATC. Û Q -ArtyATC.

Q -SupATC. Û^LTN B---Monitor. û • •• Û REAR GUARD1 (F û- Û Û I I -Trail party. □

Figure U-8. Typical movement formation when the enemy threat is significant.

42 AGO 2001ZA 1. Zones of responsibility for weapons or craft. 2. Assignments of target priority to gun stations. 3. Suppressive fire plan. ? î î! 4. Assault landing support plan. û û 5. Employment of troop weapons from well deck. 6. Communication procedures. (g) Others. Naval SOP provide additional control measures for watercraft that consist of, but are not limited to— éî 1. Standard formations. 2. Maneuvering instructions. 3. Standard speeds and turns. 4. Standard distance and interval between boats. éî 5. Signal procedures—visual and electronic. LEGEND (5) Immediate action. Immediate action j — lof ÄTC. procedures are used to overcome conditions or situations that adversely influence individual Monitor. watercraft, movement units, or the entire waterborne force. Typical immediate-action ] ASPB. procedures are— i Minetnoopini (a) Employing counterambush sup- L inor- pressive fires. (b) Initiating counterambush assault Figure b-9. Typical column formation. landings. (d) Release point. The release point (c) Establishing local security for a (RP) is that point on the water movement damaged boat that must be beached. route where movement units are released to (d) Employing troop weapons. subordinate commanders to proceed to desig- (e) Embarked troops manning boat- nated assault landing areas. Each movement mounted weapons when boat crews are en- unit normally is in its assault landing forma- gaged in damage control or when assigned tion before the lead craft passes the RP. gunners become casualties. (e) Traffic control. Civilian boats are (/) Firefighting. inspected and cleared from the waterway, if (g) Passing tow lines, using boat crew possible, and beached; gathered at control and embarked troops. points; or routed clear of the formation. The (h) Abandoning ship. advance, flank, and rear guards of the water- (6) Combat support. Available combat borne force normally perform traffic control support elements support all water move- functions. In congested areas, additional traf- ments. The following means of combat sup- fic control elements are necessary. port are required to support all operations in (/) Fire control. The flat terrain and an AO: sinuous waterways often found in a riverine (a) Artillery. Planned artillery fires environment require planning and coordina- along the movement route and harassing and ting fire control measures to prevent firing into interdiction (H&I) fires into suspect areas as- friendly elements. The waterborne force uses sist in protecting the waterborne force during a jointly prepared fire control plan that pro- movement. These fires are used against sus- vides for both full use of RAS firepower and pected ambush sites and mined locations. Na- protection for friendly elements. The plan is val gunfire, when available, is used the same simple and normally includes— way. Preplanned Concentration and H&I fires 43 AGO 20012A are coordinated with host country officials signed positions to secure the landing areas. through the sector operations and intelligence (4) The battalion reorganizes according coordination center (SOICC) or combat sup- to plan, using designated initial objectives as port coordination center (CSCC) to preclude assembly areas. injury or damage to civilian personnel and (a) Mortar, artillery, and other fire property. support units occupy their initial firing posi- (b) Air reconnaissance. Air reconnais- tions and support the reorganization and pre- sance improves the all-round security of the pare to support the scheme of maneuver. waterborne movement. It often detects mines, (b) Subordinate unit commanders re- mine control personnel, ambush sites, mortar port status of personnel and equipment after emplacements, assembled troops, etc., that securing their initial objective. Reorganiza- ground reconnaissance elements may not find. tion is complete when all or the majority of Air reconnaissance of specific areas may pre- subordinate units have secured their initial ob- clude employing ground elements in these jectives (assembly areas) and battalion con- areas. The habitual employment of air recon- trol has been established. naissance elements to the front and flanks of (5) On completion of the landing and the the main body and over the route immediately reorganization, the battalion normally estab- ahead provides added protection to the water- lishes a combat base near the landing area. borne force. The combat base includes RAS elements and (c) Close air support. Close air sup- both land and navigable water areas. The com- port provides rapid and accurate delivery of bat base remains mobile during fast-moving ordnance on an enemy force that may be in tactical operations to control and support en- defilade from the waterborne force because of gaged maneuver elements. high banks, dense tree lines, or fortifications. (6) Security is required for watercraft c. Assault Landing. after troops debark. The preferred method of (1) Landing areas normally are selected providing security for the boats is to rendez- to avoid known defended positions. Assault vous them in relatively safe areas (holding landing formations are selected and supporting areas) rather than to divert combat troops as fires are planned, either as preparatory fires or security elements for them. Monitors and on-call fires, if the enemy defends the landing ASPB’s may assist ATC crews in establishing sites. Assault landing formations provide for adequate security. Monitors, ASPB’s, and rapid, orderly movement of units ashore and an ATC’s are capable of providing fire support immediate advance to secure initial objectives for advancing ground troops or serving as close to the landing sites. RAS craft are sta- blocking elements on waterways. tioned to provide fires to the flanks and rear, as d. Movement to Contact {Scheme of Ma- well as to the front of the maneuver elements. neuver). The movement to contact is initiated The success of the landing depends, to a degree, when the commander is satisfied that the as- on positive control that coordinates and di- sault landing, reorganization, and securing of rects the movement of boats and ground units. initial objectives have progressed to the de- (2) The landing and the reorganization sired degree. Movement to contact follows in preparation for the scheme of maneuver procedures described in the FM 7- and 17-series are critical periods for the maneuver ele- as modified by this manual and FM 31-16. ments. These operations require speed and Naval watercraft and Army assault boats sup- precision in execution. port these operations by making maximum use (3) Water movement serials or move- of available waterways. ment units are organized to facilitate the im- (1) Units designated as a waterborne re- mediate securing of initial objectives, reorga- action force maintain a maximum readiness nization, and implementation of the scheme of posture. Personnel of these units are restricted maneuver. Units land as close as possible to to designated areas and issued individual sup- their initial objectives. Normally, securing ini- plies and equipment. Unit supplies, equipment, tial objectives and reorganizing take a short and ammunition are loaded or prepared for time. Security elements move directly to as- immediate loading aboard assigned water-

AGO 20012A craft. Loading tables and manifests are pre- persion. However, in many areas, security ele- pared and kept current to insure a prompt, ments close up to within 2 to 5 meters of one coordinated departure on receipt of orders. another to detect the enemy’s hiding places. (2) Conducting a movement to contact Security elements move well forward of the on foot reduces the attacking force’s maneuver main body and to the flanks and rear. When capability to that of the enemy. The enemy approaching a tree line, the security elements normally withdraws as rapidly as the attack- move into the tree line and clear it before ing force advances. Encirclement, surprise, the main body approaches. When security ele- and firepower, as described earlier, are used ments receive fire, a vigorous assault coordi- to fix the enemy and prevent his withdrawal. nated with indirect fire and airstrikes is used (3) Attacking units move along water- to neutralize or destroy enemy positions. ways when possible. Trails and footpaths nor- (7) During movement, troops remain mally parallel waterways, making foot move- alert to detect mines, obstacles, and booby- ment faster and less exhausting than it is traps. Punji stakes, demolitions, and other de- farther inland. The enemy normally organizes vices may be hidden below the waterline in defensive positions along the long axis of streams and canals. Tripwires for mines and waterways and plans observation and grazing boobytraps may be strung across a trail, canal fire to cover the open fields. Attacking along bank, or footbridge. When security conditions the waterway, maneuver elements take ad- permit, personnel remain 10 to 15 meters vantage of concealment provided by vegeta- apart to limit casualties if a mine or booby- tion and can attack the enemy's flank, re- trap is detonated. All footbridges are thor- stricting his observation and fire. Movement oughly examined before anyone crosses them. along waterways is not always possible and They may collapse under the weight of a com- cross-country foot movement may be required. bat loaded soldier, and the water beneath When waterways cross the route of movement, them may hide boobytraps or punji stakes. they present significant obstacles to foot After clearing a footbridge for use, personnel movement. Crossing canals and ditches with cross one at a time. soft mud bottoms consumes time and strength. (8) Methods of crossing inland water- Many canals can be crossed without assist- ways. ance, and units continue to advance unless the (a) Each squad carries a minimum of width or depth of the waterway stops them. one 50-foot length of 14-inch rope and one (4) In riverine areas, cross-country air mattress as aids in crossing unfordable movement is often along the top of narrow to protect personnel at the crossing site before earthen dikes. Units disperse and move on troops begin the crossing. When the security parallel dikes to advance on a wide front. element is in position, one soldier swims Troops should not bunch up where dikes con- waterways. Security elements are positioned verge or intersect. Movement of troops along across the waterway taking one end of the dikes is evaluated in relation to the enemy rope with him. He ties it to a stationary ob- threat. The enemy often positions automatic ject, providing an anchor line across the weapons to place grazing fire along the dikes. waterway to help others cross. Weapons and (5) When the enemy has been located other equipment may be towed across the and fixed, indirect fire and close air support water on the air mattress. A security element are used to assist in the destruction of the is established on the far bank as soon as suf- defense position, suppression of enemy fire, ficient personnel are available. Multiple cross- and annihilation of the enemy. Once the en- ing sites are used to reduce crossing time for emy position has been overrun, it must be a unit larger than a squad. thoroughly searched for weapons and equip- (b) The canal bridge for troops is a ment that the enemy may attempt to recover flat, buoyant sheet of fabric over plastic foam, later. which offers troops a rapid means of transit (6) In all instances in which troops across narrow bodies of water. It allows troops move cross-country, security is a critical fac- to avoid established footpaths and bridges and tor. Personnel are required to maintain dis- to cross streams and canals at multiple points.

AGO 20012A 45 The bridge is provided in 4- by 15-foot sections map indicating those waterways where diffi- and weighs approximately 2 pounds per run- culty is anticipated or expected becomes para- ning foot. As personnel walk across the mount. The APC provides a means of rapid bridge’s surface, the surface is deformed and movement while retaining unit integrity. sinks slightly. Fabric side flanges keep the Movement may commence from a land base or water off the center section of the bridge. an existing AO, or it may follow initial trans- When there is no load on it, the buoyant port into an AO by Navy watercraft. Field bridge lies flat on the surface of the water. manuals of the 7- and 17-series and FM 31-16 (c) The grapnel with line (propelled) provide information on mechanized combat is a 4.5-pound folding grapnel assembly, pro- operations. pelled from an M79 or an XM148 grenade (a) Waterborne operations. launcher, pulling a 400-foot-long, 0.312-inch 1. Areas accessible by road or cross- line. It is used to aid troops in crossing fast- country movement during the dry season are moving streams, ravines, canyons, cliffs, and sometimes inaccessible during the rainy sea- similar obstacles. When the grapnel is firmly son. Army or Navy craft such as the LCM engaged, the line will support the weight of a (6), LCM (8), LCU, or LST can transport 300-pound man and enable him to cross or APC’s on waterways. Reconnaissance to locate ascend 150-foot obstacles. potential landing sites is the key to the suc- (d) The flotation gear for the indi- cessful water movement and debarking of vidual soldier is lightweight, reusable flotation APC’s in the AO. The amphibious character- gear that will support a combat-loaded soldier istic of the APC permits it to be off-loaded in during water crossings. It consists of three locations where the shallow bottom prevents bladders inclosed in a one-piece cover. When the watercraft from reaching shore. Planners the bladders are inflated, the cover forms a U study tide tables and other hydrographic in- that fits around the soldier’s body. When de- formation to prevent debarking APC’s on flated, the packaged unit is 6 inches long, 4 mudflats or near banks too steep for APC’s to inches wide, and 2 inches thick and weighs climb. only 8 ounces. It can be used with or without a 2. Mechanized units may reach an full pack. AO by watercraft and withdraw overland, (e) The four-man lightweight fabric mounted in APC’s. Withdrawal or extraction boat is a low-silhouette boat that can be used is often a critical phase of an offensive opera- for crossing rivers or canals and for scouting tion. During this phase, enemy opportunities and clandestine operations on inland water- for ambush are greater because troops are ways. The boat weighs less than 6 pounds and fatigued and consequently less alert. As in will carry four men with combat equipment. any movement, air observation is essential to The boat is made of multiple breath-inflated assist in detecting an ambush force. bladders inclosed in a nylon cover. The multiple bladders keep the craft afloat even when (b) Mechanized units in a riverine some sections are punctured. The boat meas- environment are not normally employed inde- ures 15 by 10 by 6 inches deflated and 108 by pendently, but operate in coordination with 38 by 10 inches inflated. waterborne and/or heliborne units. In addition (9) Mechanized infantry units, using or- to the normal missions described in current ganic APC’s, can traverse a riverine area field manuals, mechanized units can perform with considerable freedom of actions. Seasonal the following specialized missions: aspects decidedly influence operations, partic- 1. Counterambusk. Immediate, posi- ularly those concerning off-road traflicability tive, and aggressive action is required. Chapter and cross-country movement in a riverine 5 provides information on counterambush area. As in conventional operations, routes are procedures. carefully selected. The significant problem af- 2. Blocking. Mechanized elements fecting mechanized movement is not the water normally conduct blocking actions while the obstacles, but the techniques for crossing and assault elements maneuver using other means exiting canals. Development of a traflicability of transportation. Because a mechanized unit

AGO 20012A can move rapidly, it can block, or cut off, the movement for APC’s may be better during enemy’s escape route. the rainy season than during the dry season. 3. LOC security. The unit performs Rice paddies with from 0.5 to 1.5 meters of an LOC security mission . similar to a route water are completely trafficable for the APC. security mission. The LOC may be either a For example, most of the Plain of Reeds area waterway or a land route. in South Vietnam is trafficable to mechanized 4. Security for resupply missions. vehicles. Uncultivated ground usually poses The unit operates in coordination with other problems in off-road mobility. Swamps, units to provide security for watercraft re- marshes, and daily tidal variations, as well as supply missions after troops have debarked in speed of the current, have a detrimental ef- the AO. Chapter 5 provides information on fect on cross-country mobility. techniques employed to avoid ambushes and 4- The M696 Recovery Vehicle is an conduct counterambush operations. M548 Cargo Carrier modified by the addition 5. Interdiction of enemy supply of a 5-ton crane. The cross-country traffic- routes. Patrols, raids, or other offensive op- ability, fording capability, and flotation of erations, separately or in conjunction with this vehicle are comparable to that of the other units, are used to interdict routes that M113. Other tracked recovery vehicles are the enemy uses for resupply. The supply routes generally not suitable for cross-country move- may be on land or water or both. ment in a riverine area. FM 20-22 provides (c) Mechanized units crossing canals expedient recovery techniques. and paddies. e. Waterborne Withdrawal. 1. Numerous irrigation canals vary- (1) A waterborne withdrawal is similar ing in width from 3 to 5 meters present the to a waterborne movement to contact. The primary obstacles to APC trafficability. Canals treat of attack is much greater because the with steep mudbanks prpsent a difficult bar- enemy usually has information on location, rier to APC movement. The initial reconnais- composition, and relative combat power of the sance and selection of crossing sites frequently waterborne force. During the withdrawal, re- determine the method to use in crossing. A connaissance by fire, use of planned fire sup- major consideration at the exit point is the port on suspect areas, and alertness of all per- trafficability of the bank because sufficient sonnel are used to counter enemy threats. The traction is necessary for the vehicle to pull loading and rendezvous phases of the water- itself from the canal. Frequently, the only borne withdrawal are critical. adequate exit point is upstream or down- (2) On arrival in the loading assembly stream from the entrance point. Consideration area, units complete preparations for loading of the influence of the tide is required in the and form into boat-load groups. These groups initial planning stage. A heavy accumulation move to the loading site when summoned by of mud in canal bottoms may make an other- loading control personnel. Unit integrity is wise easy crossing extremely difficult at low not sacrificed for speed of loading or for maxi- tides. Appendix D provides information on mum use of the watercraft capacity unless canal crossing techniques and illustrates them. absolutely necessary. 2. The marginal terrain assault (3) The arrival of units at loading areas bridge mounted on and launched from an is coordinated with the arrival of watercraft. APC is particularly useful for crossing canals Watercraft remaining in the loading area and steep-sided irrigation and drainage longer than necessary invite destruction by ditches. The bridge can support 15-ton loads enemy fires. over spans up to 10 meters. The bridge (4) When loaded, individual watercraft launcher operates hydraulically, and the proceed to designated rendezvous areas in a hinged aluminum bridge can be emplaced in secure stretch of the waterway. Unit rendez- less than 2 minutes from its mounting on the vous areas are dispersed within the water- APC. The bridge can be retrieved in 10 min- borne force assembly area. When all water utes by reversing the launching procedure. movement units are in the rendezvous area 3. Trafficability and cross-country and the detachments left in contact are

AGO 20012A 47 loaded, the units proceed toward the SP and b. Heavy Mortar Platoon. take up assigned positions within the forma- (1) FM 7-20 contains information on tion. The water movement during the with- planning and coordination procedures. drawal is conducted as described in b above. (2) Watercraft, barges, armored self- (5) Loading areas for the detachments propelled mortar carriers, or helicopters pro- left in contact are as close as practicable to vide transportation for heavy mortars in riv- their battle positions. Helicopters are prefer- erine operations. Even though the heavy mor- able for this phase of the withdrawal because tar platoon mounted on barges is readily they can land, load, and take off faster. transportable throughout a riverine area, the (6) Maximum use is made of RAS fire probable requirement to provide security for in support of withdrawing units, particularly a base area may dictate splitting the heavy if the situation requires executing simultane- mortar platoon. This fragmenting enables the ous withdrawal of all elements without em- platoon to provide fire support for both ma- ploying detachments left in contact. neuver elements and base areas. (3) The platoon provides fire support to 4-15. Employment of Organic Combat maneuver elements during the assault landing and the securing of initial objectives. When Support Elements waterways permit, watercraft will displace a. Reconnaissance Platoon.the platoon and resupply ammunition. Am- (1) This platoon can perform water- munition is kept on the barge and on sup- borne reconnaissance and provide limited se- porting watercraft. curity for the waterborne battalion. It nor- (4) Chapter 6 contains additional details mally is employed as a unit under battalion on employment of the platoon. control because of the complementary nature of the platoon elements. Under certain condi- c. Antitank Platoon. tions, however, the platoon, or elements of it, (1) The antitank platoon is normally em- may be attached to another unit or task force ployed in the defense of the base areas. organized for a specific operation. The platoon (2) The composition of enemy units and also may operate as an independent element the riverine environment preclude the pla- to perform special missions. toon’s engaging tanks. The platoon’s normal (2) The platoon can conduct water route secondary mission of engaging other point reconnaissance using assault watercraft as targets becomes its primary mission in river- its primary transportation. Platoon elements ine operations. When in the AO, the platoon may debark long enough to conduct spot re- engages enemy bunkers, watercraft or vehi- connaissance of land areas along the water- cles, crew-served weapons, and similar targets. way banks. Platoon elements may be leap- The use of antipersonnel ammunition is par- frogged along the route by watercraft to ticularly effective against human-wave at- maintain a speed of movement equal to that tacks. of the main body. (3) In performing a water route recon- d. Ground Surveillance Section. naissance mission, the platoon may require (1) FM 7-20 contains a description of support from other units, such as engineers, the use of the ground surveillance section. Army aviation, artillery, and RAS. Elements (2) During the water movement phase, of the battalion ground surveillance section radar sets may be attached to the reconnais- also may be attached to the platoon. sance platoon embarked in assault boats. Once (4) During water route reconnaissance the battalion combat base is established, the missions, boats of the RAS (monitor or section normally provides general support to ASPB) may be attached to, or support, the the base. When the situation permits, radar platoon to provide a command and control fa- sets may be attached to rifle companies for cility for the platoon leader, communication night defense. Watercraft or helicopters are relay, and fire support. used to transport radar sets within the AO.

48 AGO 20012A Section IV. ENEMY POSITIONS

4-16. Types of Enemy Positions food and weapons. Often the tunnel complexes, Enemy forces use tunnel complexes and caves always expertly camouflaged, are the result of extensively as hiding places and caches for many years of labor. Not all tunnels are com-

JIJAIU..A ,,y Riverbank: Lfi « m mm m &tm M m ñ ti mñ 7J g ïf m « Wmm mm $ m % J s Zi A %» i wm & m (h M-. g mmaM WA WMM-'MfWM M 2m to 4m mm«a MïlfiKÀ mmwm w r* r • M Xfi I «V m m% K W, y* Waterline Entrance usually about .5 meter high; camouflaged with water plants. S-2Z/7 This type of cave usually has entrance from below waterline to about .5 meter above. It can only be entered from the water. There is about a .5-meter approach leading to the main room to 4 meters across.

Figure U-IO. Typical cave in a riverine area.

m m

Secondary escape under fireplace in village house Air vents hidden in bushes «

Canal .

Entrance/exit Ammo storage Supply storage

Figure 4-11. Typical guerrilla base.

AGO 20012A 49 Top view b. When a tunnel or cave complex is dis- Wall of house s covered, the area around all known entrances 'TC~;'ií\>~rcsí> and exits is secured to prevent the escape of S2®SV.O: any occupants. A search party is designated and examines the entrance carefully for mines «S-íSs and boobytraps. Personnel entering the com- Staggered entrance ■Æ'ï plex are connected with one another by ropes -SSiï>S5S attached to their waists, and they are pro- Ä-s;NTS?>5.v: \§-fÄa vided wire communications with elements on 'S VT' rvTV ¿XO.“ the surface. (1) The search party moves through the 3 meters complex probing for mines, false walls, hidden entrances, and caches of arms and supplies. They note and plot airvents. They report compass readings and distances to the surface for Side view recording. A second party maps the tunnel from the surface and maintains a position above the search party by following the compass readings and distances as reported by the search party. Wall of house Bamboo or mud (2) As other entrances are discovered, they are marked to show use after discovery. Ground level If the complex is too extensive to be searched in 1 day, the enemy may enter it during the 1.5 meter m 4* ?*VYA&.m m night and bobbytrap approaches, entrances, 'mm wmm and exits. 4-18. Destruction of Tunnel and Cave 3 meters Complexes a. Units usually carry conventional explo- Figure J+-12. Typical hiding place under a house. sives, such as TNT, composition C-4, cratering pletely underground. In a riverine area where charges, shaped charges, and bangalore tor- the water table is comparatively high, long, pedoes, to destroy tunnel and cave complexes. narrow trenches may be dug and then shored Acetylene gas-generating and dispensing units and covered with matting. Figures 4-10 are less satisfactory in tunnel destruction, but through 4-17 illustrate typical enemy posi- are effective in loose soils with limited over- tions that may be encountered. burden (less than 2 meters). Regardless of the explosives used, all tunnel openings are sealed 4—17. Clearance of Tunnel and Cave prior to detonation of charges. The electric Complexes firing system has the advantages of being safer and of giving instantaneous control over the a. As soon as a tunnel or cave complex is time of detonation, but nonelectric firing sys- discovered, interpreters urge occupants to sur- tems are frequently used because of the ease render. Smoke, CS grenades, or flame is used in carrying the materials. Complete destruc- to force occupants to leave small complexes. tion of tunnel complexes is preferable, but is The “Mity Mite” has the capability of moving rarely feasible from the standpoint of effort 450 cubic feet of air per minute and can drive and materials/explosives required in systems smoke and/or CS throughout a complex. of great depth, length, or in extremely hard Colored smoke is useful in identifying con- soil. cealed entrances and air vents. The Mitey b. The enemy usually attempts to recon- Mite is also used to evacuate smoke and CS struct a complex that has been destroyed by from a complex before search parties enter. explosives because reconstruction requires less

50 AGO 20012A Top view Exit » «¿iS:v^v\ v< Ground 'Â.-t! evel SS® v.w ÎSS SS r «we 0, ^wvo ir SS MS 15m SS SSi (APPROX) ^S^îî 37.*.tr lviSî î$S River -

S%S>s SS Sí? m

End view Front view

SJV. ry^-rfel Exit CS& m iC^Q: mmmm'-rs SSö m » >o l^kV>^ K CK. « 1^ 'A ÍSg?? 5S5 ÍK'.C w, % il \wm- & VA; vW Y/.‘v(ïï/}tâ7/L m 5ÄW v/ï/Ædzà 52SS: /VÂ s-s Cave entrance mSMS- ■v»** m CAVE

'K^-V-'V I Íí§?> SÎSTÂÎ rjji SSS®» ÏS* River

-Xi/7

Figure 4-18. Typical cave in a riverine area.

work than digging a new one. Units conduct dissemination of aerosol CS within the com- searches periodically to continue to deny the plex. Micropulverized CS may be dispersed enemy access to complexes that have been de- within underground installations by placing stroyed. CS powder on detonating cord strung through- c. When time and supplies are limited, de- out the complex and detonating the cord. Ad- nial of the tunnel and cave complex may be ditional information on complex denial can be more effective than destruction. Complex de- found in TC 3-16. nials are normally accomplished through the

AGO 20012A 51 WASHINGTON, 0, G. Vh 'hin'i Concealed entrance: under a cooking pot,water container, etc.

Upper room Vent

’S’ WM. Mr'M m m 'A Vt U WMMÈMVr.Jt & w. 4 i/’A m m. 5» » MP is »fi# tv & * F t W Ai

m % i m 11» vm wmÊÊÊSËmm « m Lower room jf/4 m lâMm &n ’ S’\ 7Z ÏV.Ç Hr mgmtmmw/c » arc? i-VÄ/j Äiw ÄÄ? HS ÎM M'

Figure U—1U- Typical rooms under houses.

52 AGO 20012A Bamboo grove »

.bm —/ h.

% T XIr: 5m //^ // Vv> « Saê ÂT!KVJ* ? » HK;

«î 1.5m Roots 5?« v.V/-

Í?’ .vi: W! »i'.i» il* Í® r.;< .Æ-.-'ÿ'iiÿ' i? r M. m V v mmW »fcd !

mp ííSíf«

a-tur

NOTE: Tunnel is cut under bamboo grove. Root system is excellent reinforcement for roof of cave. Horizontal tunnel may go to another fighting trench.

Figure 4-15. Typical tunnel entrance.

AGO 20012A 53 Top view

Shelter End view Mud with bamboo reinforcement hm rs Ws "" ' A', l i* A'v ■ ; k k 1m 7 ■-- VS.'s

-.• • >

S^k/.. X - .;... i^lV 'K*$\ • V‘- ! ’i Ä«?;-:; .;...T;: .7 m :V-v; J

■■ -Í imvXir, '4^ Grenade Grenade sumps sump

Front view

Entrance to Bamboo reinforcing .underground shelter Ground leveli

o o O O o ~p0 to 45 cm i iij^ W;i i'i i rr l X < Firing position-f^/ÁX ' . ‘ ' 1'' 1.5 m- ....'.X A- !, -X^enade sumps^ÄÄ

Figure U-16. Typical tunnel with firing position.

m 54 AGO 20012A » □ n c www*?; Vîv má 777777; ?.*i7As iÿîW. VCO ï,KâSS r'fO, rs ■KV ^$5 Î-V.S ■v?v>v«^ : T gi 5g^ S' •■ . :Bunker: ;; ■.,; 7î oc 3?>Ä víSíf (')-; ■orí** ATSi ^-vV 7S ( -v. .¿^Oi , . ■f^C ^ .1 i-- w rv^- V-

Bunker Bunker s*v (7)^ >WN. F^5ô oCC-aS ¿i5s>ÍN 50-lÖÖm^^S^ îÿ.ïîS50-100m; >vp-’i= s>; ÜÈ «sV 3 S§^(Not to scale)gg§^§( .) i»: r-A» &WV«*75 *-*1/7

Iftir vents. 5Qamou{|ageci vent hole. ^Notched dirt steps. °Well. 3y|/atgr- 'Camouflaged entrance/exit. ^Camouflaged well covers. A series of multi-bunker tunnels with angled connecting tunnels. Each bunker has space for 15 to 20 men. The entrances and exits from the bunkers are built into the walls of actual or simulated wells 20 to 30 meters deep. Access to the camouflaged entrances/exits is gained using notched dirt steps on the inside of the well or long notched bamboo pole ladders. The camouflaged wells also serve as deep pit man traps.

Figure b-17. Well-tunnel complex.

55 AGO 20012A CHAPTER 5 OTHER TACTICAL OPERATIONS

This chapter provides guidance for conducting operations unique to a riverine environment or modifications to normal procedures required because of the environment. Units conducting operations in a riverine area may participate in one or more of the operations described and are expected to maintain proficiency in all. These operations may be separate or combined with the operations discussed in chapters 4 and 8. Section I. PATROLLING 5-1. General contain detailed information on planning and The terrain, the presence of large numbers of conducting combat patrols. noncombatants in the area, and the activities (1) Saturation patrols or patrolling con- of the enemy require modification of normal sists of a large number of lightly armed, small patrol techniques. In a riverine environment, patrols in a relatively limited area. The name enemy forces use the waterways to move is derived from the fact that the area is satu- rated with patrols. To prevent one patrol from troops and supplies in support of their opera- attacking or ambushing another requires care- tions. The waterways are the focal point for ful selection of routes, scheduling, and close all enemy and noncombatant activities and are coordination between patrols. A combination the lifestream of the area. Because the area is of water, ground, and airmobile means of densely populated, the enemy can mix freely transportation may be used in patrolling. with the local civilians, with slight chance of (2) Airmobile hunter-killer teams are identification. combat patrols transported by helicopter that are escorted by armed helicopters. They are 5-2. Types of Patrols capable of covering large areas and may be Patrols may be either long or short range and used as a reaction force. are generally classified as security, combat, or (3) Ambush patrols establish ambushes reconnaissance. at selected positions to destroy enemy ele- a. Security Patrols. When frontlines are ments. nonexistent and base areas are under constant c. Reconnaissance Patrols. Reconnaissance threat, the requirement for patrols to provide patrols collect information of the enemy, ter- security for the base increases. The patrol area rain, and weather in a prospective area of may contain friendly units and heavy popula- operations (AO). They avoid contact when tion concentrations. Enemy agents, mixing possible and fight only in self-defense or when freely with local residents, easily gain infor- necessary to accomplish the mission. A five- mation on the location of outposts and routine to eight-man patrol normally is required for patrol routes. Outposts and patrol areas are reconnaissance missions. Typical missions or changed at random intervals to hamper the specialized reconnaissance patrols follow: enemy intelligence-gathering agencies. Water- (1) Engineer patrols collect information ways near the base require particular atten- of river obstacles; fortifications; roads, mine- tion because they permit the enemy to position fields ; and bridges, to include underbridge heavy weapons and assault elements for an clearance at high and low tide, water depths attack on the base. at high and low tide, clearance height and b. Combat Patrols. FM 21-50 and FM 21-75 width between bridge piers.

56 AGO 20012A (2) Naval patrols collect information of ment by assault boat does not normally provide major waterways, to include hydrographic as much secrecy as movement dismounted ; conditions, location of water obstacles, however, moving at night, drifting with the planned ambush sites, mines, etc. current, paddling or poling, and being able to (3) Artillery patrols collect terrain in- accelerate quickly to speeds in excess of 25 formation required for the selection of artil- knots provide some security. Appendix C con- lery positions to include accessibility, availa- tains techniques for using assault boats. bility, defensibility, and ground condition. e. Indigenous watercraft assist in deception and can either substitute for assault boats or 5-3. Means of Transportation supplement them. These craft arouse less sus- picion than assault boats. All available means of transportation are used /. Airboats and air cushion vehicles (ACV) in a riverine environment. Movement of pa- are used for insertion into, movement within, trols consists of three phases: insertion into, and extraction from the AO. The noise of these operations within, and extraction from the craft is a major consideration because secrecy operational area. The means of transportation of movement is virtually impossible; however, used during each phase depends on the vari- their speed is such that enemy reaction to the ables of speed, terrain, degree of covertness movement may be impossible. These vehicles necessary, and equipment. The following para- can also be effective as part of a cover or graphs describe considerations for selecting deception to divert attention from patrols in the means of transportation' the area. a. Fixed-wing aircraft are fast and rela- g. Dismounted patrols in a riverine environ- tively unrestricted in the amount of equipment are limited in speed of movement, abil- ment they can deliver. Personnel and equip- ity to remain in the AO, and ability to trans- ment are delivered by airlanding or parachute. port required supplies and equipment. The ter- A night parachute drop offers a better possi- rain and the physical strain on dismounted bility of maintaining secrecy than a day drop ; cléments operating in inundated areas are limi- however, it may result in unacceptable disper- tations on patrol operations. Operational range sion of the patrol and equipment. Equipment and duration are limited. When consistent is normally restricted to items that the patrol with the mission, dismounted patrols are pro- can carry unless time is available to rendez- vided transportation. vous with other means of transportation. b. Helicopters can insert a patrol into the 5-4. Long-Range Patrols operational area as a unit, with its equipment and boats for transportation in the area, if a. All available transportation is used in required. Helicopters can be easily seen and long-range patrols. These patrols frequently heard from a great distance, but their use perform a series of missions within the AO. precludes the necessity of a rendezvous once b. Detailed planning for insertion into the the patrol lands. Helicopters provide a rapid operational area and extraction therefrom is and reliable means of transportation into the required when a unit conducts long-range pa- operational area and extraction therefrom. trols. Physical limitations of patrol members c. River assault squadron (RAS) craft are are a major consideration in planning these used to insert patrols and their equipment, in- patrols. Patrol planning includes coordination cluding assault boats or armored personnel with friendly waterway patrols operating in carriers (APC), into the AO. RAS craft pro- or adjacent to the operational area. These vide fire support and resupply and may extract waterway patrols may provide resupply, fire the patrols. support, and extraction or ferrying to the long-range patrol. d. Assault boats are used for insertion into, movement within, and extraction from an AO. When using assault boats, a patrol can move 5-5. Night Patrols faster and carry more equipment, weapons, Night saturation patrols deploy to locate en- and ammunition than when dismounted. Move- emy forces, interdict lines of communications

AGO 20012A 57 (LOG), and prevent raids or harassing at- mally, wheeled vehicles are more suitable than tacks. Darkness or reduced visibility allows pa- tracked vehicles because of the reduced noise trols to move with less chance of being de- levels, but they may be road bound. The tech- tected, but increases problems of control. niques of motorized patrols described in FM Maximum use of light intensification, surveil- 21-75 apply, with particular emphasis on se- lance, and listening devices increases the effec- curity during the march and during halts. tiveness of night patrols. Aircraft, using similar devices, assist night patrols in land 5-7. impDaymeinif Seoytf Dogs navigation. Scout dogs are effective, particularly during searches and night operations. A dog in good 5—6. Moiorizedl IPairoDs physical condition can work effectively in rice Motorized patrols are conducted in riverine paddies for about 6 hours. Scout dogs are also areas containing a suitable road network. Nor- useful with patrols and ambushes.

Sedribiro HD. RMù% 5—8. ©envara B of raids to prevent delay when the opportunity a. A raid is an attack by a force to accom- for a raid occurs. Training stresses land navi- plish a specific purpose in enemy territory gation and use of the compass. Friendly, re- with no intention of gaining or holding ter- liable, and trustworthy indigenous guides or rain. Surprise, firepower, and violence of ac- host country troops assist the raiding party tion are the keys to a successful raid. The in cross-country movement. principles involved and techniques used in c. Rehearsals, essential to precision and raids in a riverine environment are basically speed in carrying out a raid, follow a plan the same as those listed in FM 6-20-2, FM similar to that for the forthcoming operation. 17-1, FM 21-75, FM 31-12, and FM 61-100. d. Maximum security measures are enforced b. In a riverine environment, vegetation lim- to insure the success of the raid and to prevent its visibility and affords excellent concealment. an ambush of the raiding party. Cover plans In this type of terrain, raids may produce re- and ruses are employed to deceive the enemy sults unobtainable by other operations. Squads, about the planned raid. platoons, or companies conduct raids. e. The withdrawal is planned in detail. Plans include alternate routes and means of 5-9. IPDsiirmmgi Comisädleraflitams transportation and ambushes along the route of withdrawal to assist in the extraction of a. Movement and control are hampered by the raiding party. Air, artillery, and naval terrain, vegetation, weather, and limited visi- gunfire support are planned for the with- bility. Elements conducting raids are armed drawal phase. with light infantry weapons and carry the /. Marshy areas, covered with tall reeds and minimum equipment. Weapons include shot- scrub growth, hinder movement of assault guns and M-79 grenade launchers and the boats. Since indigenous watercraft traverse maximum of automatic weapons. These weap- these areas with less difficulty than assault ons are particularly suitable since raids are boats, commanders consider their use. normally conducted during reduced visibility and fires are delivered at short ranges. Gre- nades cause casualties among the enemy and 5-1®. Ksiodl by [Foire provide smoke to cover the withdrawal. Per- Although not outlined in FM 6-20-2 as a nor- sonnel selected to participate in a raid require mal artillery operation, artillery units, using endurance and stamina. massed, surprise fire, can conduct successful b. Use of all available intelligence and de- raids by fire within the definition in para- tailed coordination of all supporting fires are graph 5-8. Coordination with the sector oper- necessary in planning a raid. Personnel are ations and intelligence coordination center selected in advance and trained in the conduct (SOICC) or combat support coordination cen-

AGO 20012A ter (CSCC) reveals lucrative targets for ar- can reach objectives in enemy territory. As tillery raids by fire. This raid by fire may be with other raids, mechanized units require accomplished from the normal supporting po- aviation support for reconnaissance and sur- sitions. When not required to support opera- veillance, fire support, medical evacuation, and tions or provide fire support for base defense, resupply. artillery units move to a suitable location and conduct raid by fire. A sudden, large volume of fire is directed at previously selected tar- 5-12. Water Movement gets. On completion of firing, the artillery unit a. Watercraft provide a rapid means of returns to the base area and another unit or transportation to the objective and with- agency conducts and reports target damage drawal therefrom. Waterborne elements de- assessment. bark at a distance from the objective and approach the objective on foot. If the objective is 5-11. Mechanized Units near a waterway, the assault element uses powerboats to move directly into the assault Mechanized units are well suited for raids in area. This tactic is used only when surprise open marsh areas. Their speed of movement can be achieved and the waterway is large and their cross-country mobility reduce the enough to permit the boats to take evasive enemy’s capability to counter or prevent the action. Supporting fires and smoke are raid. Mechanized units, using naval craft, are planned to cover the withdrawal. transported from the base to a landing site near the objective, debark, and move rapidly b. When the objective is close to a waterway onto the objective. The APC’s amphibious and the enemy has concentrated his defense characteristics allow it to be off-loaded in places for protection of the installation against where a shallow bottom prohibits the landing waterborne attack, a diversionary attack may ship from reaching the shore. Mechanized units, permit trained personnel to enter the target logistically self-supporting for short periods, area for destruction of selected facilities.

Section III. OPERATIONS IN SWAMPS AND FORESTS

5-13. General streams, rivers, coastal areas, small villages, and built-up areas. Air observation is limited, Operations in swamps and forests are and ground observation may be limited to as conducted in a manner similar to the jungle little as 11/2 meters. Concealed movement is operations outlined in FM 31-30. These oper- possible throughout the area. Dismounted ele- ations normally are conducted by dismounted ments can operate in inundated areas for elements. The complex of mangroves, ferns, limited periods; however, the mission can be and palms normally found in these areas offers accomplished by rotating units and using all excellent concealment for the enemy and is available firepower. frequently used by the enemy for base areas and safe havens. When used for these pur- 5-15. Command and Control poses, enemy installations are usually located in areas close to streams to utilize the water- Operations in these areas are conducted pri- ways for transportation of supplies and equip- marily by small units as separate engagements. ment. Extensive operations are conducted in Control of supporting fires and maneuver ele- these areas to defeat the enemy or deny him ments is difficult because of the dispersed ac- use of the waterways. tions. Dense foliage reduces the distance that organic electronic, audio, and visual means of communication can transmit messages. 5-14. Military Characteristics Trustworthy indigenous personnel familiar The dense vegetation and inundated areas in with the terrain or troops from the host coun- this environment hinder movement. Critical try who have operated in these areas assist terrain in a swamp or forest includes trails, units during the operation.

AGO 20012A 59 5-16. Movement or helicopter-emplaced artillery is employed when possible (ch 6). Since observation is nor- a. Foot movement is normally restricted to mally restricted to a few meters, forward ob- narrow trails; boat movement within swamps servers are trained in sound sensings. Coordi- is usually restricted to streams within the nation between air and ground observers is swamp; and helicopter landing sites are few. necessary to verify location of friendly troops Pathfinder teams are used to insure that avail- and to obtain positive sensing of rounds fired. able helicopter landing sites are not booby- Frequently, Air Force and Army aircraft and trapped. During operations, aerial ladders as- Navy elements provide the preponderance of sist in inserting or extracting elements. A fire support. waterborne approach from the sea into coastal swamp area may be difficult because of shoals, shifting channels, and tidal effects. The use of 5-18. Tides ACV’s may partially overcome these difficul- In swamp areas affected by tides, the tidal ties and allow more freedom of movement influence on currents, depths of water, and within the swamps. bank and bottom conditions of canals and tidal b. Units converge on suspected enemy base streams is an important consideration for areas. Units, with minimum equipment, using waterborne elements. Tidal effects and phys- watercraft to negotiate streams and water- ical characteristics of the area are considered ways, are trained to move as fast as or faster during planning for operations. than the enemy. 5-19. Denial of Drinking Water 5-17. Fire Support In many riverine areas near the sea, drinking Supporting fires are planned in detail to sup- water is scarce. Streams may be of a tidal port engaged forces, to destroy the enemy and nature; the normally low elevations preclude his equipment, and to interdict his movement. deep wells; and water in natural reservoirs is Napalm is an effective weapon, but planners normally not suitable for drinking. All per- consider all available weapons during planning sonnel living in this type of area entrap water and weapon selection for fire support. Scarcity during wet seasons and store it in manmade of information concerning the strength and ponds or metal or pottery containers. Units disposition of the enemy requires planned fires conducting operations in swamps or marsh for a greater number of contingencies. The forest areas destroy stored water supplies. Pa- positioning of conventional artillery is often trols along waterways assist in preventing the difficult in swamps; therefore, barge-mounted enemy from importing water.

Section IV. AMBUSHES/COUNTERAMBUSHES

5-20. General bush patrols may enter enemy territory by Ambushes are employed by both sides in a boat or helicopter or on foot to interdict canals riverine environment. Because both waterways or other suspected enemy routes of movement. and roads are LOG, many ambush sites are Cover and concealment for the unit conducting available to both friendly and enemy forces the ambush are essential. and the requirement for counterambush tac- (2) Surprise is the key to success in am- tics increases. FM 21-75 provides additional bush operations. Surprise allows the ambush details on ambushes and counterambushes. force to seize and retain control of the situation. Units achieve surprise by careful planning, preparation, and execution. 5-2 T. Ambush Operations (3) Units maintain close control during a. Concept. movement to, occupation of, and withdrawal (1) Units frominvolved the ambushin base site.security use ambushes as a security measure (ch 8). Am- (4) All available weapons, including

AGO 20012A 60 mines, demolitions, artillery and mortars, and withdrawal routes are known to all personnel. close air support are coordinated to achieve All personnel must participate in the rehearsal maximum effectiveness of the ambush. until every single individual knows each as- b. Planning. pect of his job on the move, at the rally (1) Ruthlessness and violence are charac- points, at the objective, during the ambush teristics of ambushes. Use of all available in- and throughout the withdrawal. telligence and detailed coordination of all (6) Personnel and weapon positions pro- supporting fires are necessary during the plan- vide cover and concealment. The fire plan ning phase. The maximum number of auto- integrates the fires of all weapons, automatic matic weapons is used at the ambush site. weapons, grenade launchers, and claymore Movement is a critical factor when an ambush mines. The ambush plan includes the signal to force exfiltrates from the area after complet- open and cease firé, the assignment of sectors ing the ambush. of fire, and the location of all elements. (2) Excellent ambush sites are available Planned fires isolate the ambush area and pre- along rivers, canals, roads, or converging rice vent the escape or reinforcement of the enemy. paddy dikes in a riverine environment. Before Commanders insure that the large volume of selecting an ambush site, commanders make a surprise fire in the killing zone comes from at careful study, using maps, aerial photographs, least two directions and converges on the and when possible, a personal reconnaissance target. of the area to determine the availability of c. Execution. natural obstacles. Minefields create artificial (1) The moment when the enemy arrives obstacles to supplement natural obstacles. The in the killing zone is the most crucial in an claymore antipersonnel mine is effectively em- ambush. When the enemy force enters the kill- ployed in the killing zone and in preventing ing zone and reaches a designated location, the the enemy’s escape. In a successful ambush, order is given to open fire. All weapons deliver the enemy is destroyed at the ambush site. a large volume of fire into the killing zone to (3) Commanders select routes to and inflict maximum casualties before the enemy from the ambush site carefully to insure se- can take cover. Fire continues until the enemy crecy when occupying the positions and speed is annihilated or until a friendly assault ele- and security when withdrawing from them. ment is committed. They select alternate routes or withdrawal and (2) The use of assault elements in an am- designate rally points and assembly areas. bush is often necessary. These elements move (4) Communication and control proce- through the ambush site, destroying equip- dures are necessary during the movement to, ment, searching the dead, and performing any occupation of, and withdrawal from an am- other duty that the ambush commander di- bush site. Strict control and discipline are rects. The assault begins with the lifting or necessary to keep the ambush unit alert and shifting of supporting fires. silent. Movement and communications are kept (3) During ambushes along waterways, to a minimum once the ambush unit is in posi- offensive grenades are thrown into the water. tion. Communications are necessary to issue The concussion of the exploding grenades pro- orders to open fire and withdraw, as well as to duces casualties among swimmers. Boats are maintain contact with local security elements used by assault elements to capture prisoners. and higher headquarters. An alternate plan d. Use of Assault Boats. provides for opening fire when the lead ele- (1) When assault boats transport an am- ments of the enemy reach a designated loca- bush force, they move stealthily by using pad- tion. dles or poles instead of motors, or by drifting (5) Rehearsals for the ambush force are into position with the current or tide. When conducted on terrain similar to that for the they move this way, the motor is fastened to actual mission. All personnel are thoroughly the boat in the up position, ready for immedi- briefed on the exact sequence of events until ate use. they thoroughly understand their duty. The (2) Whether an ambush site is selected to location of rally points, assembly areas, and cover a road, trail, or waterway, the ambush

AGO 20012A 61 force debarks and occupies concealed positions. ginning to the end of any movement; and dis- The boats are concealed, and designated crew- persion, combat formations, and observation men remain in or near their craft prepared to are emphasized. Troops have a tendency to assist in the ambush or in the withdrawal. relax and become careless when returning to a (3) If the ambushbase sitearea is fromon a tidalan operation.water- This tendency way, changes in the water level and the direc- increases as the units near the base area. Rec- tion of flow are considered in the plan. A con- ognizing this fact, enemy forces have considerable change in water level may prevent ducted many ambushes within 500 to 1,000 withdrawal by boat. meters of the base area. (6) Details on employment of Army avi- 5—22. Coymiferambiuish Îsaeîies ation in counterambush operations are in a. General. paragraphs 6-40 through 6-43. (1) The riverine environment offers the b. Planning Counterambush Actions. enemy many opportunities for ambushes. The (1) All movements and operations are population provides a cover for enemy ambush susceptible to ambush. In any movement, rep- forces’ movement into and occupation of am- resentatives from supporting artillery, tactical bush sites. Accordingly, the riverine area is air, Army aviation, and Navy units participate rarely considered secure, and counterambush in the planning. During initial planning, the measures are planned in conjunction with all commander decides whether air relay and ob- operations and movements. servation are required for positive communica- (2) When moving through open or tions and control and whether an airborne broken terrain, security elements are em- command post is necessary. The airborne com- ployed to the front, rear, and flanks of the mand post affords the commander the best moving column, out to the maximum effective means of control and communications and en- range of small-arms fire. In wooded areas, se- ables him to react rapidly to all contingencies. curity elements are a minimum of 200 meters (2) Plans for column cover and reaction forward and must cover a front broad enough elements provide support for all operations. to prevent a line ambush, in which the long Reaction elements must constantly be pre- axis of the enemy parallels the direction of pared for immediate dismounted employment. movement. The forward security elements are The reaction element may attack the ambush far enough to the front to allow the main body force or may maneuver to block the enemy’s to deploy without serious interference from withdrawal. Column cover provides observa- the enemy. When movement is along a canal tion and fire support to both the moving unit or river, units may take advantage of adjacent and the reaction force. canals to move security elements. (3) During planning, the commander (3) Routes of movement are reconnoi- designates the sequence of command succes- tered in detail from the air; by map; and, if sion, considers intelligence indications, has a possible, by small reconnaissance patrols. Air detailed fire support plan prepared, and plans observation is valuable, but it is not a substi- for the placement of forward observers and tute for ground reconnaissance. An ambush tactical air controllers. If movement is by force, once in place and camouflaged, is not water or if naval gunfire or RAS fire support likely to be detected from the air. is available, these fires are integrated into the (4) Local activities along roads or water- counterambush plan. ways are carefully observed to detect unusual (4) Plans are made to brief and rehearse patterns of behavior. The absence of children all personnel concerning their individual re- in the area or the absence of vehicular or boat sponsibilities and duties if ambushed. All per- traffic may indicate the presence of an enemy sonnel, including embarked troops and the ambush force. If the mission permits, frequent supporting boat crews, are familiar with the questioning of local civilians about recent en- plan for immediate action, control procedures, emy activities in the vicinity may be advan- and artillery and tactical air support available. tageous. c. Counterambush Actions on Land. (5) Security is maintained from the be- (1) Preparation of vehicles.

AGO 20012A (a) Sandbagging the floorboards of all entirely in the kill zone (fig. 5-1) assault and vehicles lessens the effects of mines on person- overrun the ambush positions. When only part nel. Stacking sandbags against the sides of of the unit is caught in the killing zone (fig. unarmored vehicles provides protection from 5-2), the elements not in contact act as a small-arms fire. Placing additional ammuni- maneuver force and attack the flanks and rear tion and grenades in each vehicle insures that of the ambush. Personnel continue to fire even adequate quantities are readily available. after the enemy ceases fire to prevent the en- Lightweight armor kits are used on trucks to emy’s recovery of weapons and bodies. After provide wraparound protection against small- overcoming the ambush, the area is searched arms fire. to insure that the ambush site is clear. (&) Removal of the side panels and (&) Troops moving through suspect lowering of the tailgates are necessary on areas carry WP and offensive grenades. When wheeled vehicles that carry troops. When seats ambushed, they immediately throw grenades are used, they are in the center of the vehicle toward the enemy. Enemy ambush forces of- so that troops sit back to back and face out- ten hide at very close range and assault only ward. When seats are not used, the troops sit after the friendly force has been attacked by or lie in the bed of the truck facing outward. long-range fire. Besides producing casualties, During all movements, personnel are organ- the WP grenade produces a smokescreen that ized to return fire by designating sectors of limits the enemy’s observation and helps make fire to both flanks. his fires ineffective. Offensive grenades may (c) All vehicles are equipped with tow- inflict heavy casualties on the concealed force ropes or chains. Convoys are normally organ- and often prevent its making an assault. ized with the slowest vehicles at the head of (c) The immediate reaction plan pro- the column; however, distribution of weapons, vides for an assault to overrun the enemy security, etc. may dictate otherwise. Drivers positions. Enemy ambush forces often fire are told the interval that they are to main- from only one flank to make the friendly force tain. Ambush forces normally try to block the take cover in a mined area or killing zone. An road by disabling a lead vehicle. Drivers have assault toward the enemy normally lessens instructions to pass disabled vehicles and to friendly casualties and produces more enemy keep the column moving to clear the killing casualties. zone. Recovery vehicles follow at the rear of d. Counterambush Tactics During Water the column to recover disabled vehicles. Movement. (d) Vehicles in convoys do not carry (1) General. a full load of personnel or equipment. If ve- (a) Even though suspected ambush hicles are loaded to their maximum, troops sites along waterways have been attacked by will be unable to use their weapons effectively ; artillery or close air support fires, ambushes therefore, a 21/2-ton truck carries, as a max- may be encountered. The enemy generally se- imum, 18 persons. Unit integrity is maintained lects ambush sites on waterways at points when possible. where maneuvering is difficult and the channel (2) Reaction to enemy ambush. either brings the craft well over to one bank or (a) When a unit is caught in an am- restricts them in a narrow channel. Ambush bush, troops return fire in their assigned sec- forces usually hide in dense vegetation; but, tors. The unit is organized to cover the entire in some areas, they conceal themselves in rice area with a large volume of fire, and troops paddies or tall grass. High banks provide ad- gain and maintain fire superiority. The unit vantageous firing positions above the river increases speed and continues movement un- craft and limit the range of friendly direct less the road is blocked. If movement stops, fire. Avenues of withdrawal are normally troops return fire immediately with organic available to the enemy. Mudflats, steep banks, weapons and follow up with an assault on the or slippery shores hinder friendly troops as- primary ambush, using their individual weap- saulting from the river. ons in conjunction with white phosphorous (&) Normally, the friendly unit coun- (WP) grenades and supporting fires. Units ters the ambush with suppressive fire and

AGO 20012A 63 Enemy force

V. •: i Killing zone - •. V'Flank guard

11 Friendly il Enemy force force Rear guard .^ Elements of mam body Enemy (AW) Flank guard force Enemy force Direction of movement

Figure 5—1. Reaction when entire unit is caught in killing zone.

Enemy force

, ! LU ■ Killing zone

¿ / i;vM Flank guard Enemy force 3 Elements of main body ✓mill (AW) "“'7 Flank guard Enemy Enemy *force force Direction-ef movement

Figure 5—2. Reaction when a portion of a friendly unit is caught in killing zone. forward movement; it commits an element to force under fire. The plan also includes instruc- suppress the ambush while the main body tions on the use of artillery and close moves through the killing zone. The alternate air support. If the unit’s mission specifies de- course of action is to commit the entire unit struction of any ambush forces encountered in a coordinated attack to assault and annihil- en route, plans are necessary to land elements ate the ambush force. The mission, the forces for this purpose and to commit blocking forces available, and the relative size of the ambush or reserves. force determine the tactic to employ. (2) Planning. (c) If a commander plans to counter (a) Reconnaissance of the selected the ambush with suppressive fire and forward waterway is conducted at both high and low movement, his plan includes the designation tide to determine navigability under these con- of ships and watercraft to take the ambush ditions. The commander considers the use of

64 AGO 20012A parallel rivers, streams, and canals by security 1. Troops embarked in ATC’s remain elements. When time permits, reconnaissance but are ready to establish local security if an patrols, well forward of the main body, debark ATC should be beached. These troops are ready and investigate likely ambush sites. When to assist in the recovery of damaged water- scout dogs are available, they are used along craft and to man Navy guns if the ATC crew the banks or in small boats near shore to de- is engaged in emergency damage control or tect ambush sites. Since the return route of has sustained casualties. boats is easily predictable, plans provide for 2. The planned maneuvers of ASPB’s the use of alternate routes. When this is not and monitors and possibly violent course possible, units avoid setting a predictable time changes by the ATC require positive fire con- pattern of return from operations. trol. (b) The plan allocates transportation 3. One alternate tactic for reacting for the evacuation of casualties and damaged to an ambush is for all boats in the killing zone equipment. Army troops may augment Navy to close and move toward the bank from which crews to replace losses. the heaviest fire comes. This maneuver limits (3) Execution. the enemy on the opposite bank to a long-range (a) When ambushed, the waterborne fire with the danger of firing into their own force normally maintains forward movement positions. Fires massed on the shoreline just and executes a coordinated plan for suppres- ahead of the evading watercraft can suppress sive fire, aimed fire to neutralize major weap- the enemy fires on the near bank while the ons, planned artillery or RAS supporting fires, boats pass each ambush position. and close airstrikes. When the ambush is acti- (b) When an assault element lands, vated and only a portion of the unit is in fires are coordinated to support the assault the killing zone, fire support craft (monitors element and to deliver suppressive fire on the and assault support patrol boats (ASPB) ) im- ambush forces. The assault element lands out- mediately maneuver to take positions between side the ambush position, if possible, and at- the armored troop carriers (ATC) and the tacks the flank of the ambush force. When the ambush force. The fire support boats attempt entire waterborne force is caught in the am- to suppress fire until the ATC are past the bush area, the Army commander designates an killing zone; then they disengage and re-form element to assault the ambush position to re- for movement (fig. 5-3). lieve pressure on the movement unit. This as- (AW) I (AW) Enemy force rrnrrEnemy force Enemy force

'O Killing zone C3® CZ3

;-y y.

e-aa/7 LEGEND cr -Monitor. []-ATC. ^ -ASPB. ^ "Minesweeping gear. Figure 5-3. Reaction when an ambush force is suppressed and movement continues.

AGO 20012A 65 sault normally requires the landing of a second mander designates an element to assault the element on the flank to overrun the ambush opposite bank if the enemy’s initial attack is position (fig. 5-4). Suppressive fires are em- a ruse and the ambush force occupies positions ployed against the opposite bank. The com- on both sides of the waterway.

■m

Killing zone r sCIKCZK 1

N/7 m-dzty Enemy Enemy force ^orce

LEGEND -Monitor. | | -ATC. -ASPB. ^-Minesweeping gear.

Figure 5—U. Reaction when troops land.

Section V. CLEARANCE OF WATER OBSTACLES

b. 5-23. General The mud dike, which may be found in canals having a tidal current. This dike re- a. Navy elements clear navigable waterways stricts the movement of military watercraft of obstacles. Divisional engineer elements may and may reduce the flow of tidal currents up- assist in clearance. A planned water obstacle stream from the dike. removal program is conducted throughout the c. The mud dike, 2 to 3 meters wide, later- riverine area. ally reinforced with logs on each side is used b. Close coordination with host country of- the least and is the hardest to remove. ficials is mandatory before the removal of any water obstacle. Dikes may be constructed as 5-25. Waterway Clearance flood control measures. a. Log obstacles are usually removed by fastening heavy lines to the main structural 5-24. Water Obstacles members and by using watercraft as tractors Three basic types of water obstacles are— to pull them out. a. The log, which is theb. Mud most dikes common. are usually removed by using Crossed logs (frequently as small as 3 to 5 either, explosive charges or a clamshell or centimeters in diameter) may be used in dragline. The most common error in using ex- waterways from 25 to 50 meters wide. Inter- plosives to remove mud dikes is failure to woven bamboo and vines strengthen the struc- place the charges sufficiently deep in the dike. ture. In areas where the current flows in only This error, wasteful of time and explosives, one direction, debris, to include small trees, increases the difficulty of ultimate clearance. bushes, and foliage, accumulates on the up- c. The mud dike reinforced with logs can- stream side. not be removed with explosives alone. Logs

66 AGO 20012A as large as telephone poles or reinforced con- d. The stream usually requires widening or crete pillars may be used in constructing this deepening after removal of water obstacles. type of obstacle. The logs on both sides of the Dredges may not be available; however, di- dike are removed first by pulling them out visional engineers can mount a crane on or- with watercraft. Major pieces of debris are ganic rafts and use either a clamshell or drag- then removed from the dike, and explosives line to complete the removal of the obstacle. are used to complete the removal of the obstacle.

Section VI. SURVIVAL, EVASION, AND ESCAPE 5-26. General tials include individual weapon with bayonet, a. This section outlines procedures and tech- ammunition, rations, water, survival kit, niques for survival, evasion, and escape in a smoke grenades, and a signal (light source) riverine environment. device. Any shiny piece of metal or glass can b. Units, and particularly individuals, are substitute for the signal device. A piece of susceptible to enemy actions that isolate them glass blackened on one side is better than from friendly forces. The riverine environ- plain glass. Imagination, ingenuity, and per- ment and the problems in land navigation and ceptiveness reveal materials common to the traversing the area increase the difficulty of area, which the inidividual soldier can use rejoining parent organizations. for survival. c. Failure to survive in remote areas ot the 5-28. Rules for Evasion riverine environment results more often from ignorance or inexperience than from enemy The following rules assist an individual to actions. Survival is difficult, even when the evade capture and to survive in a riverine en- area is devoid of enemy troops. The weather vironment : and terrain provide the evader or escapee with a. Be knowledgable of curfews imposed on both advantages and disadvantages. They key the local populace. This knowledge assists in to survival is maintaining the will to live. determining the best time to travel. d. The material and procedures in FM 21- b. Be familiar with the terrain in the AO. 75, FM 21-76, FM 21-77, and FM 21-77A Know how to use stars as an aide to land apply in the riverine environment. navigation at night. e. Definitions of terms used in this section c. Make maximum use of waterways for follow : travel, using boats, logs, or other materials. (1) Survival—Living through a period of Study the tides and use them to advantage. hardship during evasion or imprisonment. Dry thoroughly after getting wet. (2) Evasion—Action to prevent capture d. Use large waterways for travel because when separated from one’s unit in a un- the smaller the waterway, the greater the friendly area and to return to one’s own unit. danger of detection. Evasion by infiltration is the most successful e. Travel at night, when possible, to avoid means of returning. Evasion by deception is moving when temperatures are high. This difficult, particularly when facial features, helps to reduce drinking water requirements language, and customs of the area are dif- and lessens the danger of being detected. ferent. /. Always travel toward last known friendly (3) Escape—Action to get away from dispositions. the enemy when captured. FM 21-77 and FM g. Avoid exposure during the daylight. 21-77A outline escape procedures. h. Avoid people who cannot be positively identified as friendly. 5-27. Equipment i. Live off the land. As a general rule, food Physical demands on the individual soldier is plentiful. operating in a riverine environment prevent j. Avoid making fires. his carrying nonessential equipment. Essen- k. Be alert for search and rescue aircraft.

AGO 20012A 67 Use any available means to signal them. pellants dissipates rapidly, and its detection 1. Become familiar with insects, animals, by enemy forces has not been verified despite and symptoms of disease common to the area. repeated attempts to substantiate this claim. Recognizing symptoms of diseases assists in Antimalaria tablets, included in individual deciding whether to continue traveling or to survival kits, can prevent malaria when taken stop to overcome the effects of diseases that faithfully. may become serious. e. Treat snakes as if they are all poisonous; however, remember that snakes are a source 5-29. Rufes for Survival of food. /. Watch for leeches. They live in water and a. Do not cut off uniform sleeves. Keep on most jungle undergrowth. Before entering forearms covered to help to prevent cuts and streams, canals, or other waterways, tighten infections and reduce the possibility of mos- sleeve cuffs at the wrists and fasten the trouser quito bites. cuffs outside boots. Apply insect repellant to b. Learn to recognize the local foods that uncovered parts of the body. If these meas- are edible. Pineapples, coconuts, bananas, ures fail, remove leeches carefully with insect other fruit, and fish are usually plentiful in repellant or heat (cigarette). Quick removal most riverine areas. Peel all fruits before eat- of leeches may leave the heads embedded and ing. cause infection. Killing the leech with heat c. Boil or treat water before drinking, if has the same effect as quick removal. possible. Use one water purification tablet per g. Clean and dry armpits, groin, and feet canteen when water is clear ; otherwise, use help prevent fungus infection. Use foot powder two. Drink small amounts at a time to avoid frequently. stomach cramps. h. Individuals in a riverine environment d. Use insect repellants freely. Liberal use frequently suffer from the effects of heat ex- may prevent insect bites and reduce the pos- haustion or heat stroke. FM 21-11 provides sibility of contracting diseases prevalent in a information on the symptoms and recom- riverine environment. The odor of insect re- mended treatment for these conditions.

68 AGO 20012A CHAPTER 6 COMBAT SUPPORT

Section I. INTRODUCTION 6-1. General areas for combat support and combat service Limited ground mobility in the riverine en- support functions are scarce. A combat sup- vironment restricts certain aspects of combat port coordination center (CSCC) (ch 1) co- support. Units may be widely dispersed, and ordinates all combat support functions, pri- environmental restrictions often prevent mu- marily fire support agencies, for an operation tual support. Although support requirements and may be a subordinate element of the are no greater than normal, immediate re- SOICC. sponse is essential. The scarcity of dry land, a. Representation in an SOICC includes which many units need to accomplish their Navy, Air Force, Army aviation, artillery, and mission, requires the commander to establish psychological operations (PSYOP) personnel. priorities for land use. Representatives or liaison personnel from host country, province, or district coordination 6-2. Sector Operations and Intelligence centers and their U.S. advisors may partici- Coordination Center and Combat pate in the SOICC. Additionally, the SOICC Support Coordination Center may provide liaison personnel to host country A sector operations and intelligence coordina- area or regional coordination centers. tion center (SOICC) (ch 1) coordinates op- b. The tactical headquarters of the coordi- erations and intelligence gathering within the nated operation—division, brigade, battalion, political division where there aften are heavy joint task force (JTF), or subordinate JTF— concentrations of civilians and where land is represented in the SOICC.

Section II. FIRE SUPPORT

6-3. General 6-4. Rules for Engagement Continuous, flexible fire support is indispensa- A requirement to defeat enemy forces in ble in riverine areas. Several factors make densely populated areas with minimum loss provision of this support difficult. These fac- of noncombatant’s lives and property necessi- tors include inadequate survey control, either tates a thorough understanding of the rules a lack of maps or inadequate maps, scarcity for engagement. All personnel have to be of dry land for artillery positions, scarcity of aware of the implications associated with the meteorological data, and curtailment of mass- use of long-range direct and indirect fires in a ing fires when fire direction is decentralized. densely populated area. All fire support ele- Although normal fire support procedures ap- ments prepare to provide fires on short notice. ply, some modifications and innovations, par- Rules for engagement normally permit the use ticularly in the use of fire support from river- of indirect fire in populated areas only when the craft, are necessary in riverine areas. Discus- enemy’s position has been positively located sion of these modifications follows. and identified. Liaison personnel from host

AGO 20012A 69 country forces and governmental agencies and &-S. Fire §yp|p©irft €©®E’

AGO 20012A Support of the brigade) ; the battalion heavy fit the existing situation and terrain. The mortar platoon leader and, when appropriate, doctrine, techniques, and procedures outlined the S3 air ; a tactical air control party in FM 6-20-1, FM 6-20-2, FM 6-40, and (TACP) with an air liaison officer (ALO) FM 6-140, and modified by this text apply to and a forward air controller (FAC) ; a shore artillery-operations in a riverine area. fire control party (SFCP) with a naval gun- (1) Artillery fire support must be avail- fire liaison officer (NGLO) and a naval gun- able during movement of the maneuver ele- fire spotter (NGFSPTR), when available and ments. This may require emplacing artillery when naval gunfire is provided; a liaison of- in firing positions prior to movement of the ficer from RAS; and liaison officers from host maneuver elements. The artillery movement country and third country. When an airborne requires security elements from the supported CP is employed, only FSCC personnel essen- unit, as well as support from other artillery tial to the particular phase of the operation units and tactical air or Army aviation units. in progress accompany the commander. When (2) Artillery organization for combat is only the FSCOORD accompanies the com- commensurate with the needs of the opera- mander, he uses radio to coordinate with tion and the availability of artillery units. In other elements of the FSCC. riverine warfare an artillery battalion may /. At brigade, the FSCC at the CP either support a maneuver battalion or artillery bat- aboard the brigade APB, at the land base, or teries, or platoons may support them inde- aboard a CCB coordinates all fire support pendently. Scarcity of adequate position available to the brigade commander. The di- areas may prevent using the quantity and cali- rect support artillery battalion commander is ber of artillery indicated by enemy strength the FSCOORD. Key personnel who normally and area characteristics. operate in the FSCC are the FSCOORD or (3) Position areas are usually small and his assistant (the liaison officer from the di- are located in unsafe areas. rect support artillery battalion) ; the brigade (4) Artillery batteries prepare to use all assistant S3, air when appropriate; the bri- available means of transport during any one gade chemical officer; ALO from the TACP; operation. NGLO from the SFCP; and RAS, host coun- (5) The primary mission of artillery is try, and third country liaison officers. to support the operations; however, batteries g. Division and higher commands establish may provide area support as a secondary mis- either a fire support element (FSE) in the sion. This secondary mission requires the im- tactical operations center (TOC) or a CSCC. mediate readiness of batteries to support host country forces within range. 6-6. Field Artillery (6) Lack of positions in defilade, lack of o. Consideration and Applicability. The fol- cover and concealment, and positioning in an lowing guidance is based on the employment unsafe area necessitate preparation for direct of an infantry division artillery in a riverine fire techniques and use of antipersonnel am- environment. It is applicable to division artil- munition. The supported unit augments the lery of other types of divisions and nondivi- artillery unit’s local security elements. sional artillery units operating in this environ- (7) Artillery’s lack of survey and me- ment. teorological data may prevent its delivering b. General. Artillery units, employing nor- accurate fires without adjustment (registra- mal procedures, provide fire ‘ support to all tion). The division artillery meteorological echelons of the riverine force. Independent section may employ two- or three-man teams fire direction by batteries is a normal proce- equipped with visual siting instruments in dure in riverine operations. Exploiting all support of each direct support battalion. These means of mobility is a key factor in planning teams can provide wind direction and speed and conducting riverine artillery operations. data up to the cloud cover and also surface Artillery tactics do not change; however, the temperature and humidity readings. Meteoro- techniques of artillery employment change to logical messages are necessary every 4 hours.

AGO 20012A 71 c. Positioning Artillery Units. reconnaissance party accompanying the bat- (1) When performing a base defense tery/battalion commander will be smaller than mission, the battery position facilitates— normal when using helicopter transport. (a) Defense of the base area and all (c) When the enemy situation permits, watercraft. Positions selected for defense of armored troop carriers (ATC) may perform base areas insure direct fire coverage on ave- reconnaissance. Normal reconnaissance party nues of approach including canals and rivers. personnel are augmented for security. Stand- They also facilitate loading on watercraft for ing operating procedures (SOP) cover fire movement. Maneuver battalion radar sets as- support and naval escort during reconnais- sist in providing surveillance along the peri- sance by boat. meter of the afloat- or land-base defense sys- {d) Since water movement is normal tem. in a riverine area, the reconnaissance party, (b) All-round defense of the battery whether moving by boat or helicopter, in- position area. cludes the RAS commander supporting the (c) Resupply of ammunition. unit’s move. During reconnaissance of the po- (2) The scarcity of good dryland posi- sition, the reconnaissance party selects boat tions with dispersion laterally and in depth anchorage or debarkation areas for the artil- in riverine areas necessitates maximum use of lery unit. canal banks, riverbanks, and roads when artil- (2) Each artillery unit prepares detailed lery is not firing from watercraft. Normally, SOP for conducting RSOP using all means of artillery cannot collocate with the combat transport. The riverine force commander al- base ; however, positioning to facilitate the pro- locates boats—ATC, and landing craft, mech- vision of fire support to all units has first pri- anized (LCM) (6), or LCM (8)—to artillery ority. When possible, batteries are positioned units for movement. within range of one another to facilitate (3) During all movements, battery com- massing of fires and the firing of planned manders/executive officers (XO) and boat mutual defensive fires. Positions are selected commanders independently and continuously to support the riverine force during move- maintain añ awareness of boat position and ment to, within, and return from the AO. verify it with each other to insure accuracy d. Reconnaissance, Selection, a/nd Occupa- of its location in preparation for an emer- tion of Position. gency occupation of a firing position. FDC (1) Watercraft provide normal artillery personnel plot suspected targets and known movement in the riverine environment. (Cur- locations from which to transfer firing data rent manuals adequately cover procedures for to assist the unit in providing fire support land and air movement.) Artillery movement during the movement. may precede maneuver force movement and, (4) Air and artillery support, air ob- if possible, over a different route. Modifica- servers, and radio retransmission are SOP for tions of normal reconnaissance, selection, and all artillery movements. Naval elements, occupation of position (RSOP) procedures armed helicopters, other artillery, tactical air, and techniques for use in riverine environ- and host country forces may provide support ments follow: and route security on request. (a) Before reconnaissance, host coun- (5) Buoy markers, attached to water- try artillery personnel and their U.S. advisors craft, assist underwater recovery of equip- provide information about available position ment when watercraft sink. areas, recent enemy activity, available host e. Defense of the Battery Position Area. country troop and artillery support during the (1) Plans for defense of the firing posi- reconnaissance, and the location of friendly tion include closein defensive fires, coordi- forces and villages. nated with a mutually supporting battery or (b) When helicopters are available, battalion, when possible. Positioning of artil- they transport the reconnaissance party along lery pieces provides for covering avenues of the movement route, to the selected positions, approach into the firing position with direct and return along the withdrawal route. The fire, using antipersonnel ammunition. Defen-

72 AGO 20012A sive plans include the use of claymore mines, villages and likely target areas to these air trip flares, handheld flares, radar, and seismic observers. intrusion devices. (2) The RAS has no organic observers (2) Battalion/battery personnel can per- to adjust the gunfire support that it provides form duties as security guards when the en- during operations; therefore, artillery FO ad- vironment prevents their employment at their just RAS fires as well as artillery fires. FO’s primary tasks. require training in adjusting RAS fire. SOP (3) Searchlight sections and air defense cover procedures, frequencies, and circuits for artillery in a ground support role may aug- obtaining and adjusting RAS fire. ment organic weapons in the defense of the (3) Fire direction and fire planning fol- position. low conventional methods. Battalion controls (4) Available interpreters and host coun- fire direction when possible, however, widely try military and security police can control dispersed operations and special task assign- and divert civilian traffic near the battery ments may dictate fire control and direction area. Coordination with host country officials by battery. The application of special correc- and their U.S. advisors is necessary to accom- tions to firing data for an open or closed sheaf, plish this task. as requested by observers, is SOP. The bat- (5) Adequate countersurveillance meas- tery position may be only 90 meters wide with ures commensurate with the enemy surveil- the pieces in line, and an open sheaf is nec- lance and detection means, must be provided. essary for the rounds to land in the impact Camouflage techniques are the minimum re- area giving the effect of a normal sheaf of quirements to reduce vulnerability. weapons in an ideal position. A converged /. Observation, Fire Direction, Survey, and sheaf may be desirable when the maneuver Ammunition. element’s disposition is circular; and when (1) Increasedcontact emphasis occurs, on friendlyair observa- and enemy elements tion is necessary in the riverine environment, may be within 30 to 50 meters of each other. particularly during all waterborne movements. FDC personnel and FO’s require proficiency in A lack of commanding terrain necessitates procedures and techniques of firing destruc- air observation in the AO. The coordination tion missions. of air observers with FO’s on the ground in- (4) FDC personnel and FO’s require sures the best artillery coverage, coordination, knowledge of the actions of various fuze/pro- and surveillance of the area. The artillery jectile combinations against the common types headquarters battery observer and uncom- of targets found in the AO. mitted liaison officers and firing battery ob- (a) Smoke. In addition to providing a servers may be used as air observers. Division screen to conceal friendly movements, smoke artillery aircraft may be used to accomplish rounds used for adjustment near populated this mission, or the observer may ride with areas reduce physical damage and injury to the airborne FAC. When trained in adjust- noncombatants. ment of indirect fire procedures, the FAC (ft) VT fuze. The variable time (VT) may perform this mission to augment the fuze is normally more effective than fuze quick Army air observer. Air Force FAC and Army against personnel in this environment. Fuze observer aircraft over the area are coordinated VT may prove particularly effective for H&I to provide continuous air observation of the missions, along trails and small waterways, area to detect fleeting enemy targets. Air ob- for fires to block the enemy in tree lines until servers become familiar with the AO prior to the maneuver elements can be inserted, and on the operation to improve their effectiveness the rare occasions when the enemy is caught for both air and ground operations. Observers in the open. can become oriented with the AO by flying (c) Concrete-piercing and delay fuzes. with Army and Air Force visual reconnais- The enemy normally fights only when he so sance (VR) pilots during regularly scheduled desires and then from strongly fortified posi- flights, thus preventing an increase in air actions. Fuze VT is ineffective in these instances tivity over the AO. VR pilots identify friendly because the positions may have thick, baked

AGO 20012A 73 mud-brick walls with logs for overhead cover. 105-mm howitzers, ammunition, and gun Artillery firing at fortifications requires the crews into position to support operations (fig. use of concrete-piercing fuzes or delay fuzes 6-1). Construction of these barges permit^ the and may possibly require firing destruction howitzers to fire from the barge with negligi- i missions. ble shifting as a result of recoil, even when (5) A secondary mission to provide fire fired at low elevations. LCM (8)’s are used to support to friendly paramilitary forces re- displace the barges to firing positions. Addi-, quires the mutual exchange of call signs and tional LCM (8) provide waterborne facilities radio frequencies with U.S. advisors in the for the artillery battalion CP, FDC, and aid area. The request and clearance for the fire station; battery CP and FDC; ammunition mission come through the responsible local resupply; and damage control. Other water- government official (probably district chief) craft at the position normally consist of 155- before the firing starts. U.S. advisors to local mm howitzers mounted in LCM (8), the bri- governmental officials coordinate the requests. gade CCB, a helicopter (HELO) barge, and a An area support mission requires an aircraft refueler (fig. 6-2). and observer on ground alert to adjust fire be- a. Firing positions for barge-mounted artil- cause paramilitary forces at villages and lery are readily available, and occupation of hamlets normally are not qualified to adjust the positions presents few problems. Desir- fire. Adjustments must be made cautiously to able qualities for position areas are— prevent damage or injury to friendly elements. (1) Steep banks below the surface of the (6) The division artillery’s distance water to decrease listing as the tide fluctuates. measuring equipment (DME) can provide (2) Wide expanse of water to front or survey data to firing points if any survey con- rear to reduce the danger of handgrenade and trol points (SCP) are available as a starting small-arms attack and provide clear fields of point and the unit is in the AO long enough. fire for antipersonnel ammunition fired in de- Liaison with U.S. advisors to host country fense of the position. governmental officials may reveal SCP as care- (3) Limited avenues of approach over fully surveyed public buildings. The flat riv- land. Islands and small peninsulas are desir- erine terrain is excellent for using this equip- able, but frequently have undesirable sloping ment. Survey parties, augmented with security banks. forces and using boats or helicopters, can es- (4) Avoidance of areas of strong current, tablish SCP’s. Lack of survey control probably when possible, to reduce anchorage problems. will necessitate the use of observed firing b. Reconnaissance, selection, and occupa- charts or map firing charts. Small teams of bat- tion of position by barge-mounted artillery in- talion survey personnel at battery can establish clude the following: common direction by simultaneous astronomical (1) Two ATC mine-sweeping craft pre- observation to assist in massing fires. cede the barge-mounted battery while one (7) Methods of employing the counter- ATC, transporting infantry personnel, follows mortar radar include— it. (a) Mounting aboard the brigade per- (2) The riverine force commander nor- sonnel barracks ship (APB). mally places one infantry platoon under the (b) Transporting forward to a selected operational control of each artillery battery ground position in the AO. commander to provide that battery local secu- (c) Emplacing on a tower at the land rity. This platoon secures artillery positions base. prior to the barge’s securing to the shore. The aiming circle is set up concurrently with an- choring the barges, and the pieces are quickly Experience in the Mekong Delta area has laid parallel. shown that barge-mounted artillery is one of (3) Artillery pieces normally remain on the best methods of providing artillery fire barges because the barges provide all neces- support during riverine operations. LCM (8) sities required for the artillery unit to supply are employed to tow barges transporting two fire support. The barges move to a new posi-

AGO 20012A AGO 20012A . * ex. ¿a: z plate Armor ^Z. z fa Gun section bunker AMMI barge rVi'V^. itr‘. >*.A t- . H ’ b I'C ■ ■ j X‘ J Dif -- V - ' barge. Figure 6-1.105-mm howitzer artillery El r\ 1 for direct fire to deck Z > Firing port Z howitzer bolted M102 105-mm 360 °f ire capability barge AMMI N Ui AGO 20012A ‘v. ■ ' .r. S£i»a *£FUE 1C .T ï^î am * T T IT *T T LCMS CM sr/?y . Fflc 'NA/Vs ic«a 55 'V«S iCMa ,5 5MM LCM 155 MM MMS 155 CP RY LCM 8 LCM 8 CM F DC 1 AMMO BTRY Palm Grove T ^ T '7£ 'J' ^ ^ Figure 6—2. Barge-mounted artillery position. HELO BNRGL - » - MS LCM 8 LCM 8 BN BDE CCB BN FDC FWD CP DAM CON =R¡ce_Padi¡es

of JP-4 and 500 gallons of AVGAS for emergency refueling.) for arty LO. Barge has 1,500 gallons of 105 mm (or combination 105 mm/155 mm). Ammo LCM(8) can carry 2,000 rounds tank truck for LCM(8) refueling. Refueler LCM(8) carries 1.200-gallon mm btry and 1 plat of the 155 mm btry are employed elsewhere. In this example, thr remaining 105 r

all times pad for 2 UH -IB or OH-23. (Arty bn normally has 1 OH-23 at NOTES: HELO barge provides helicopter LCM 8 LCM 8 LCM 8 Cl STA BN AID rmn! FOC BTRY CP m tion when they can no longer provide fire sup- (1) Reduce the time that a battery is out port from the original position. of action. c. Requirements for the security of barge- (2) Circumvent the problem of exiting mounted artillery battalion/battery follow: canals and rivers. (1) The defense of the position normally (3) Increase the element of surprise. The requires two ATC and one monitor, with em- speed of deployment increases the element of phasis on patrolling the waterways and pro- surprise; however, this activity may alert the viding flanking fires with 7.62-mm machine- enemy to an impending operation. guns and 20-mm and 40-mm cannon. (4) Prevent the possibility of ambush (2) Concussion grenades and 14-pound while en route. blocks of TNT, dropped in the waterway at (5) Make accessible those position areas random times and locations, deter attacks by that are normally inaccessible from water- swimmers. ways or roads. 6-8. The 155-mm, Self-Propelled Howitzer b. Airmobile deployment may make the bat- Mounted in the LCM(8) tery an integral defense element of the combat base by positioning it in the combat base area The 155-mm, self-propelled (SP) howitzer can with naval and infantry elements. Such po- fire from the LCM (8) in the stream or an- sitioning facilitates defense of the howitzers. chored ashore. The employment of the howitzer in this manner provides medium artillery 6-10. Artillery Mounted in or Transported reinforcing and general support fire capability by ATC or LCM(6) with the force in the AO. The 155-mm SP how- a. A 105-mm howitzer can fire from a itzer maintains a 6,400 mil traverse capability beached ATC or LCM (6), using the tech- when aboard the LCM (8) and offers armor niques described in this paragraph. protection for the crew. The 155-mm SP— (1) Boat cargo capacities, number of LCM (8) combination does not require addi- boats available, and weight of cargo deter- tional boat space for prime movers. mine the amount of ammunition carried into the AO with the artillery pieces. The ammuni- 6-9. Airmobile Positioning of Artillery tion load includes high-explosive (HE), illum- Helicopters may transport artillery units to ination, white phophorous (WP), smoke, and firing positions within the AO. Helicopters antipersonnel ammunition. may position a portable aluminum platform (2) Timbers and sandbags placed in the for firing the 105-mm howitzer. This platform well of the ATC brace the howitzer and trail permits artillery to fire from rice paddies and spades. The piece is laid over the lowered bow soft muddy areas from which accurate artil- ramp. Additional timbers placed behind the lery fires would otherwise be impossible. The trail spades transfer the recoil to the bulkhead platform consists of a 22-foot square alumi- and prevent shifting of the ammunition (fig. num structure with a plywood deck and ad- 6-3). justable legs at the corners. The platform is (3) A combination of winches, cables, air-transportable by helicopter as an external and land anchors holds the ATC in position load. The artillery unit may occupy normal against the shore. Holding the boat in position dryland positions. Regardless of the position against the shore and preventing the current occupied, planners consider the following fac- from broaching the boat require the attach- tors during planning. ment of two lines to the stern and two to the a. Displacement by helicopter is a method bow. of deployment ; however, temperature, air (4) Fire direction at battery may take density, and altitude may limit it and neces- place from inside a prime mover or aboard a sitate disassembling howitzers into suitable watercraft. The artillery units may not be al- loads by weight. Some vehicles for surface located sufficient boats to transport vehicles movement in the AO require deployment by to the battery area for use as an FDC. When airmobile means. Helicopter deployment vehicles are not available, portable radios re- would— place vehicular radios in the FDC. Wire com-

AGO 20012A 77 Aiming ^ Posts v Shoreline Bow Ramp I

Recoil Boxes Ammo Storage FDC Shack

Figure 6S. Firing of 105-mm howitzer from an ATC or LCM(6).

munications between ATC transmit fire com- lected position provides the following infor- mands. Standard fire direction procedures ap- mation: ply. (a) Effects of the tide and width of « (5) Both high- and low-angle fires are the canal at debarkation time. possible; however, low-angle fires place more (b) Riverbank or canal-bank obstacles. strain on the anchor system. Howitzers fire (c) Selected points of egress and alter- along the centerline of the ATC and to the nates. sides within normal traverse limits. (d) Terrain adjacent to and inland b. Prime movers and howitzers back into the from point of egress. cargo compartment during loading. Loading (e) Suspected enemy areas and likely a 2i/2-ton truck prime mover and a 105-mm ambush sites along route and around planned howitzer aboard a single ATC or an LCM(6) position. requires uncoupling the howitzer and spread- (2) Frequently units will occupy unpre- ing the trails. pared positions. To facilitate rapid occupation, c. Successful occupation of land positions battery personnel (less howitzer sections, but in a riverine operation using water transport possibly augmented with personnel from bat- depends on the unit’s ability to traverse the talion) form six security and engineer teams. canal bank or riverbank. The elimination of These teams (one per section) clear the canal some prime movers from the movement and bank of natural and manmade obstacles, as- substitution of additional ammunition might sist in debarking and positioning the how- be a consideration if boats are not available itzers, and assist in providing security. Bat- to carry sufficient ammunition forward on teries prepare for action by piece, organizing initial occupation. Ammunition resupply is by the position as the situation permits. The fol- water or helicopter. lowing techniques are employed in the hasty oc- (1) Reconnaissance of the route and se- cupation and preparation of position: € 78 AGO 20012A (a) Prior preparation of points of pieces within weight and space limitations of egress when possible. Chain saws assist in clear- the vehicle. The LARC family consists of the ing trees and undergrowth from egress points LARC-V (5-ton capacity), LARC-XV (15-ton and position areas. Beach matting, class 30 as- capacity), and the LARC-LX (60-ton capa- sault trackway, pierced steel plank, or T-10 city). The LARC does not have good mobility membrane provide a stable surface condition in some types of riverine terrain; however, it for use by the prime movers in debarking the does have good handling characteristics in artillery pieces. the water. Artillery can fire from the LARC (b) Use of winches, blocks and tackle, with equal or better firing capabilities than and Danforth anchors to help prime movers when the same piece fires from ATC or and howitzers exit the canal. LCM(6). The main advantage accruing from (c) Use of the collimator, infinity aim- this combination is the amphibian character- ing reference, to eliminate the need for a istics of the LARC, which allows the howitzer stable base for aiming posts at 50 and 100 to fire while in the stream, during exits from meters from the piece. the waterway, and after occupation of the (d) Use of helicopters to shuttle artil- firing position—all while remaining aboard lery pieces from boat to position areas. the LARC. (3) When the M113 armored personnel 6-12. River Assault Squadron Fire carrier (APC) is used as a prime mover, additional watercraft may be necessary to trans- The RAS provides direct fire with 40-mm port the piece and prime mover because the guns, 20-mm cannons, M79 grenade launchers, M113 weighs almost twice as much as the and .50-caliber and 7.62-mm machineguns. 21/2-ton truck. Studies of performance of cur- The squadron provides indirect fire with 81- rently available vehicles operating in the riv- mm mortars. RAS fires require close coordi- erine environment indicate that the Ml 13 nation to insure maximum support for the performed better than all wheeled vehicles scheme of maneuver. and most amphibians. Advantages and dis- a. Direct Fire. Boats providing direct fire advantages of using the M113 versus the 2i/2- to a supported unit for one or more phases ton truck follow: of an operation are normally in direct sup- (a) Advantages. The M113— port. These weapons augment infantry heavy 1. Is more maneuverable. weapons by overhead fire, when possible, 2. Climbs canal banks better. and fire to the flanks and through gaps in 3. Traverses paddies and mud areas friendly lines. The use of the .50-caliber ma- better. chinegun and other heavy direct fireweapons A. Provides crew protection against are restricted in relatively flat terrain be- small-arms fire and shrapnel and increases cause of the danger of ricochets. available firepower. b. Indirect Fire. Monitors and assault sup- 5. Requires less space in the water- port patrol boats (ASPB) provide indirect fire craft cargo compartment because it is shorter. support for the water movement and the 6. Crosses dikes and levees better. scheme of maneuver after the assault landing. (b) Disadvantages. The Ml 13— These boats provide fire support independently 1. Has increased weight. or in groups. Each one can process firing data 2. Requires increased maintenance. independently. When grouped, they constitute (4) Dual front wheels installed on 2i/2- a mortar battery in a position area on the ton trucks provide the capstan part of a cap- waterway. One of the boats can provide fire stan and anchor system to assist in climbing commands for all others in the position area. riverbanks and canal banks (app D). Because monitors and ASPB’s also perform minesweeping, waterway patrolling, and fire 6-11. Transporting and Firing Artillery support missions during movement, their, em- From LARC's ployment in an indirect fire support role de- The lighter, amphibious, resupply, cargo pends on the commander’s priorities. The RAS (LARC) can transport a variety of artillery liaison officer and the FSCOORD recommends

AGO 20012A 79 employment of indirect TAS fire, based on the company, aviation battalion, has one platoon commander’s guidance. The normal mission of helicopter gunships armed with combina- assigned to the RAS indirect fire support boats tions of machineguns, rockets, and grenade is reinforcing the direct support artillery bat- launchers. Door machineguns are primarily for talion with short-range, indirect fires. self-defense; but machinegun. pods, rockets, c. Observation and communications. The and grenade launchers provide a capability to RAS cannot provide observers to adjust indi- seek and attack the enemy. Although all heli- rect fires. Normally, the artillery FO with the copters with armament are called armed heli- maneuver unit observes and adjusts RAS in- copters, helicopter gunships possess an attack direct fire. The artillery FO sends corrections capability and provide fire support to maneu- directly to the boats, or through the RAS liai- ver elements. Gunships escort utility helicop- son officer. ters in airmobile operations and also escort and provide armed reconnaissance and flank 6-13. Close Air Support security for waterborne movements. Aviation a. General. Close air support (CAS) for elements available to riverine units can extend units operating in a riverine environment the range of fire support available to the follows current doctrine, principles, and in- ground commander during landings and de- country procedures. The U.S. Air Force, U.S. barkations, and movement to and from an AO. Navy, host country, and/or U.S. Marine Corps Gunships locate, illuminate, and destroy enemy may provide CAS. forces during night operations in conjunction b. Operations and Considerations. The river- with radar- and searchlight-equipped aircraft. ine force uses air/ground procedures that are Gunships fires do not replace other types of standard within the geographic area. Tactical supporting fires, but complement them. Posi- air control parties (TACP) are provided at tive identification of friendly elements is neces- battalion, brigade, and division. The direct air sary before gunships provide fire support. support center (DASC) for the geographic Gunships may be under brigade control or fur- area in which the riverine force conducts op- ther attached to subordinate elements of the erations provides tactical air support. FM 61- riverine force. A gunship platoon is normally 100 contains details for requesting air support. divided into a light fire team of two aircraft When controlling tactical airstrikes, FAC are and a heavy fire team of three aircraft. This airborne as much as possible. Unique features organization permits one section to remain air- and requirements of CAS in riverine opera- borne while the other refuels, thereby provid- tions follow: ing continuous surveillance and readily avail- (1) Effective CAS requires marking able fire support over the battle area. The friendly elements to insure identification. FSCC must be informed of any request for Standard marking procedures used through- aerial fire support to insure that neither the out the area are signals displayed using panels, gunships nor artillery interfere with each colored smoke grenades, flares, and lights. other. Figure 6-4 shows the channels for re- (2) Grid coordinates are necessary when questing this type of fire support. submitting requests for tactical air support. Waterway intersections and river bends used 6-15. Naval Gunfire as reference points assist in orienting the pilot. A sharp contrast between land and water exists a. General. Extensive mudflats and sand- during the dry season, but may not exist dur- bars, which extend for several kilometers into ing the rainy season. The pilot cannot de- the sea, may prevent large naval ships from pend on this contrast to provide positive orien- providing naval gunfire support to river- tation under marginal visibility conditions. ine operations. Destroyers or smaller inshore fire support ships may be able to navigate the 6—14. Armed Helicopter Support principal rivers during seasonal floods or peak Most UH-1 helicopters in an infantry division tidal stages and provide gunfire support. When are armed with two 7.62-mm machineguns this support is available, procedures outlined mounted as door guns. The general support in FM 31-11, FM 31-12, and FM 61-100 apply.

80 AGO 20012A IS

FSCC Ie-- \ X \ JL Army FSCC Avn XX Unit ¡ Higher i s LEGEND TOC ' ¡ Army avn requests. I — • — Army avn tasks. i ¡ NOTE: If the request goes from battalion straight to division, brigade monitors, acknowledges _L receipt, and transmits disapproval only. Army _L Avn Army Unit Avn Unit

Figure 6—4. Air fire request channels.

b. Organization. The command echelon that battalions when naval elements provide gun- controls and employs naval gunfire includes fire support. special staff representation for liaison and c. Observation and Communications. The naval gunfire support. Personnel are available SFCP normally provided a maneuver battalion for liaison and control of naval gunfire at every observe and adjust naval gunfire. Direct sup- level from the maneuver battalion to the high- port ships are in direct support of a specific est echelon present. Air and naval gunfire li- unit, normally a battalion; and general sup- aison company (ANGLICO) personnel may be port ships are placed in general support of a attached to the host country’s area headquar- specific unit, normally brigade or larger. The ters or at U.S. division and above. The duties direct support ship may have a radio set capa- of naval gunfire personnel include planning, ble of entering the artillery fire direction net. providing information regarding gunfire sup- If not, the fire request is transmitted to the port situations and capabilities, coordinating direct support ship via the naval gunfire liai- with other supporting arms, and supervising son officer at the maneuver battalion/brigade naval gunfire support. The naval gunfire officer headquarters. If aircraft are not available to serves as a member of the FSCC. At battalion, the naval spotting team, communication ar- the SFCP consists of an NGLO and a naval rangements will be made to enable an artil- gunfire spotting team commanded by an NGF- lery observer to observe and adjust naval gun- SPTR. This party controls and adjusts naval fire. Figure 6-5 shows naval gunfire request fires. They may be assigned to the maneuver channels.

AGO 20012A 81 Bn FSCC Bde FSCC Div FSE FO Higher FSCOORD FSCOORD FSCOORD HQ

NGLO NGLO NGLO NGFO Arty AOBSR \ 9-elf? NGF Bde NGF Div NGF NGFSPTR AOBSR AOBSR AOBSR

OS of bn GS of bde GS of div

-► Call for fire from supported unit to supporting ship via NGF channels. -► Call for fire from artillery forward observer. Call for additional fire.

NOTE: NGLO/NGFO will monitor and coordinate all calls for fire from air and ground NGFSPTR.

Figure 6-5. Naval gunfire request channels.

Section III. ENGINEER

6-16. General 6—17. Special Requirements of Riverine Engineer support is essential in a riverine en- Operations vironment with restricted lines of communica- Commanders modify engineer operations in a tions (LOG) ; frequent obstacles and barriers; riverine environment to accomplish special re- and a requirement for many rafts, boats, and quirements : temporary bridges. In a riverine environment, a. Construction and maintenance support to the engineer battalion’s taks are more diverse keep the limited and vulnerable LOG open. than in a conventional environment. Normal- This mission may require construction of tem- ly, engineer units operate under centralized porary bridges and ferries. control when the situation permits. As units disperse and as support requirements increase, b. Production of sufficient quantities of pota- decentralization of engineer activities becomes ble water and construction of adequate stor- necessary. The engineer commander prepares age and entrapment facilities for it. to accomplish his mission with little or no c. Technical advice in the construction of heavy equipment. Classification of local bridges barriers, obstacles, and berms in the land and may determine the equipment that supports afloat base areas. operations. Storage space for engineer equip- d. Collection of engineer intelligence. This ment and construction material is limited. mission includes maintenance of liaison with

82 AGO 20012A constantly with the tides and season. Engineer host country engineer units to assist in col- units require instruction in practical tech- lection of engineer intelligence. niques of collecting this type of information. e. Preparation of landing sites on riverbanks Necessary information concerning waterways to facilitate exit from the waterway. Organic includes— engineer raft components transport heavy (1) Width, depth, and bottom character- equipment and supplies across rivers, streams, istics of waterways. and canals. (2) Velocity and nature of current and f. Preparation of helicopter landing sites on tidal effects. land and floating helicopter landing pads on (3) Height, slope, and condition of banks. mobile assault rafts. (4) Location of obstacles and potential g. Demolition support to deny, destroy, or ambush sites. close enemy caves, tunnels, and bunkers. (5) Location and gradient of possible h. Installation or removal of mines and boobytraps. Engineer teams train supported crossing sites. units to detect and remove mines and booby- (6) High- and low-water underbridge traps. These teams accompany land convoys to clearance and clearance between piers of assist in mine clearance. Engineer teams may bridges. also assist in the clearance of naval-type mines b. Reconnoiter hand Areas Contiguous to from navigable waterways. However, naval ex- Waterways. Engineers surveying waterway plosive ordnance disposal personnel train these characteristics also survey contiguous land engineer teams before they are assigned this areas for type and condition of roads, ap- mission. proaches to waterways, and village locations. c. Augment the Organic Topographic Capa- i. Detection of enemy arms and munition bility. Expanded engineer intelligence opera- caches. j. Construction of protective storage and tions require maximum use of battalion intel- shelter facilities that unusual drainage and ligence sections and augmentation of topo- moisture problems necessitate. graphic personnel. The attachment of other k. Production of map substitutes requiring intelligence personnel to engineer units and the updated imagery because waterways change employment of local civilians provide the capa- constantly and cannot be mapped accurately. bility to— Making gridded air mosaics available to (1) Use indigenous guides and interpre- ground, air, and naval elements assists in ters. ground orientation. (2) Maintain and update maps, charts, and air mosaics. 6-18. Intelligence and Reconnaissance (3) Maintain and disseminate waterway Support data, buoy channels, and identify all waterways with legible signs. Street names are a The criticality of terrain intelligence and route source of identification. reconnaissance in a riverine area places unusually heavy demands on engineer reconnais- 6-19. Potable Water sance elements. Air and boat reconnaissance also can produce significant intelligence infor- a. Water Sources. Because a delta-type mation. Army engineers coordinate with the riverine area is close to the sea, its rivers and Navy on these surveys and assist the Navy streams are tidal and much of the water is in buoying channels and other activities neces- saline and unfit, to drink. There are five ways sary to aid navigation. To assist in maintain- to obtain an adequate supply of potable water : ing control of the waterways, army engineer (1) Wells. Although environmental char- units must— acteristics make digging deep wells difficult, a. Determine Waterwayevery Characteristics.possible site isRe- investigated. Seepage liable information of the characteristics of wells are possible in some locations; and ade- waterways is necessary to their proper use. quate, nearby storage facilities are necessary. This information must be gathered continu- The type of storage facility—high tower, con- ously because waterway characteristics change crete storage area, or plastic envelopes—de-

83 AGO 20012A pends on the time that the wells probably will equipment discussed in TM 5-700 supplements be used. Engineer cellular team GB, well drilh the ships’ distilling capabilities. ing (TOE 5-520), can drill and develop wells (&) Team GK, water distillation (Draft to supply water to users at the wellhead. Well TOE 5-520), can produce 6,000 gallons of po- water requires testing and treatment if con- table water from sea or brackish water and taminated. can store 3,000 gallons a day. The water point (2) Entrapment of rainwater. During the teams of the divisional engineer battalions, rainy season the heavy rainfall in delta-type the engineer combat battalions, or the water environments warrants entrapping and stor- purification teams of the TOE 5-500-series can ing as much rainwater as possible. At riverine operate the thermocompression-type equipment land bases, storage facilities should provide required to convert saline water to potable each man 5 gallons of water a day. Rainwater water. Saline water conversion units can be must be tested and, if contaminated, must be mounted on watercraft, with storage facili- treated. ties, to provide mobile, potable water produc- (3) Engineer water supply points. The di- tion and distribution points. visional engineer battalion can operate five (5) Truck or water-barge importation of water points to produce potable water for water. This method is the least desirable for the division. The engineer combat battalion obtaining potable water because of the addi- (army or corps) has a similar capability. En- tional equipment required. gineer cellular water purification teams can b. Supply of U.S. and Friendly Forces. produce varying amounts of potable water. A (1) Potable water supply storage is crit- water supply point located at a seepage well ical. A ship may fill a land-base water storage produces water efficiently. facility initially; however, after adequate stor- (4) Conversion of saline water to potable age and entrapment facilities have been con- water. Saline water, although not potable, is structed, a ship replenishes these supplies only good for washing, sanitation facilities, and in emergencies. bathing. When bathing, troops prevent non- (2) Water supply points are not normally potable water from entering their mouths. established at wells that are a primary source Both the Navy and the Army can convert sa- of water for civilians. Close coordination with line water to potable water. local officials insures an adequate supply of (a) The distillation systems of the water to friendly forces and the denial of po- ships in the Navy support squadron can con- table water to enemy forces. cert saline water to potable water. Each APB can distill 40,000 gallons of potable water a c. Denied to Enemy Forces. Enemy forces day and can store a 4- or 5-day supply. The depend primarily on the entrapment of rain APL can distill 24,000 gallons a day and can and boat importation of water for their sup- store 250,000 gallons. In an emergency, a ship ply. Eliminating stored water or adding chem- can replenish water supplies at land-base facil- icals whose odor or taste makes the water un- ities. The auxiliary and expedient distillation palatable are means of denial.

6-2(0). (SemoraD sources of the division signal battalion and the communications platoons organic to the brig- This section provides information on those as- ade and maneuver battalion, requires certain pects of communications peculiar to the em- techniques not normally used and may require ployment of maneuver elements on afloat bases augmentation of both personnel and equip- and land bases, during waterborne movement, ment. Emphasis is on required communication assault landings, and subsequent operations. during all phases of troop deployments—water- Established communication procedures and borne, overland, airmobile, and airborne oper- principles in current field manuals apply in a ations. Communication considerations applica- riverine area. This operational environment, ble to riverine operations are— which places additional demands on the re-

AGO 20012A a. The requirement for flexible communica- 6-21. Type of Riverine Force tion support for brigades and battalions oper- Communications ating in a larger than normal area. From the Army standpoint, the type of river- b. The requirement for increasing the bri- ine force considered for communication plan- gade’s communication capability and for orga- ning is a brigade with from two to four bat- nizing a self-contained, area-type communica- talions. tions system within the division area system. a. Afloat Bases. The afloat base consists of c. Reliance on portable radio equipment by a brigade APB; battalion APB’s or APL’s; maneuver battalions after landing. This re- CCB’s; and associated supply, maintenance, duces the communications personnel require- and hospital ships. The CCB serves as a for- ments of battalions, under normal circum- ward CP with one required for brigade, each stances. maneuver battalion, and the direct support ar- d. The requirement for extensive signal tillery battalion. planning and coordination with higher, adja- b. Land Bases. For communication planning, cent, lower, and supporting units and with U.S. the minimum land bases required to support advisory teams, host country, and other Free the riverine force are a division main/division World military forces. Division and brigade base and a brigade base. The brigade base is staffs are the primary communication plan- comparable to brigade trains less the combat- ners. This planning includes the continual essential elements that are afloat. Provision is evaluation of very high-frequency—frequency made for incorporation of a division forward modulated (VHF-FM) and high-frequency— CP when and if required. single-side band (HF—SSB) radio teams pro- c. Interconnecting Communications. Radio vided by the division signal battalion to sup- and multichannel radio links connect land and port offensive operations. afloat bases, ships and boats operating on the e. Knowledge of naval communications orga- waterway, ground forces, and security forces. nization and network structure. This requires Figures 6-6 and 6-7 represent a brigade com- knowledge of and qualification in the opera- munication plan. tion of Navy-type radio equipment installed aboard self-propelled barracks ships (APB’s), 6-22. Communication Equipment barracks ships (nonself-propelled) (APL), and CCB’s for use by embarked Army troops. a. Normally the communication equipment The limited flexibility of installed fixed-plant that Army personnel use aboard the APB’s, type of wire communications aboard APB’s APL’s, and CCB’s of the riverine force is per- and APL’s requires alteration of normal pro- manently installed. This equipment is Navy- cedures. provided and part of the ship’s design. It may /. Thorough knowledge of the location and be a mixture of Navy (primarily), Army, and capabilities of area signal centers established Air Force equipment and will net with similar by higher echelons in the riverine area. These Army equipment ashore. This communications centers provide multichannel radio-relay com- equipment is not the normal tables of organiza- munication links and retransmission stations tion and equipment (TOF,) authorization of when organic capabilities are overcommitted the Army units aboard ship. or require augmentation. The afloat-based riv- b. Brigade units normally keep the TOE or erine force completely depends on radio for modification table of organization and equip- communications with units or headquarters ment (MTOE) aboard the APB or APL or at outside the base area. the land base. Typical items of equipment kept g. Increased maintenance and waterproofing on the afloat base are portable radio sets for requirements for all communication equipment. use by debarked forces, telephones to augment h. Use of both rotary- and fixed-wing air- APB and APL facilities or for shore opera- craft for radio relay, particularly during move- tions, and field wire required for shore use. ments. c. When APB, APL, and CCB lack neces- i. Communication security should be empha- sary communications equipment installed for sized during all phases of the operation to riverine use, special arrangements by joint preclude premature disclosure of operations. Army and Navy agreement may be necessary.

AGO 20012A 85 AGO 2001 ZA 4 x Bde comd (GP) (HF) (NCS) 1 X (NCS) comd Navy (UHF) log nets RATT Div (HF) admin/ Div op/ intel (HF) AF tac air dir UHF voice (UHF- Bn comd (AM- SSB) AF air req (AM- SSB) X (AM- SSB) comd Navy (NCS) voice nets HF AM 1 X Bde (AM- SSB) :NCS) comd * —Speech secure. P—Portable radio set. X—Installed radio set. Bde* (FM) air-ground In vl LEGEND host (FM) Aja* country unit or X bn r per ’p (FM) RAS* : X log Bn (FM) :NCS) admin/ X Bn* (FM) (NCS) comd RF—Riverline force. RB—Riverline base. RAS-River assault squadron. 3 X RB* def- (FM) ense (NCS) X helo RF* (FM) mon/ (NCS) com- X In AF* (NCS) (FM) voice nets VHF FM X force Figure 6-6. Type radio nets for a riverine (NCS) (FM) comd Arty* X FD (NCS) (FM) Arty* X log Bde (FM) (NCS) admin/ X O&I Bde* (NCS) (FM) 3 X (FM) comd (NCS) Bde* X & con :omd (NCS) (FM) Flot* OITld CG (FM) Div* Net Statio ^Provided if required. ^Air Force-provided. net. ^May be used to monitor any subordinate battalion comd center. ^Navy operated in wheel house. May be remoled into operations AF DASC or Abn FAC Each embarked co Hospital ship Repair ship Other boats as required Supply ship Debarked bn Arty CCB Bde CCB Bde base Bn APB Bn CCB Bde APB CO » r '1 Bn Bn Bn APB APB !APB

A"' 4 \ . Notes . ^ 1 and 2 Notes I and 2 ^ Notes 1 and 2

Notes 1 and 2 Notes 1 and 2 Sup Hosp 4 Ü 4- Ship Bde \ Ship APB

Rep Ship

x-24’ ‘24. Note 3 Notes 1 and 2 Note 1 «C ./* •

NOTES: 1. Current multichannel radio equipment to be replaced by new PCM equipment when available. 2. Radio terminal sets AN/GRC-163 are also a possibility if frequency interference does not prohibit. 3. Shore-based multichannel radio repeaters are located on advantageous high ground to insure communications from division to bde APB. Only two repeaters are shown as types. 4. Radio multichannel terminals may operate from division forward if required.

LEGEND Q -Ship or boat. Q-Land base. ' Operational as required.

<* -Multichannel radio repeater.

Figure 6-7. Type radio multichannel networks for a riverine force.

87 AGO 20012A Ships and craft may be outfitted largely with event, a second 24-multichannel network from brigade and battalion TOE signal equipment or division forward to division main/division base equipment obtained by special authorization. is established; communications from the bri- This may involve the dismounting of equipment gade APB to division main/division base may from organic vehicles, in which case the con- be then on a switched or “strap-through” basis tributing organization must be augmented ac- out of division forward. The division signal cordingly. Necessary electrical power for the battalion may require augmentation to provide Army communication equipment is ship sup- this support. plied. b. Ship-to-Skip Communications. Separate four-channel terminals aboard the brigade à»—23. ßeadö® Cörnownatriikeafec’ss APB provide common- and sole-user voice and a. A type radio communication plan for a teletypewriter circuits to four-channel termin- brigade is shown in figure 6-6. Emphasis is als aboard each battalion APB and each essen- primarily on the communications required by tial combat service support ship. This com- the Army forces; however, the flotilla communications equipment is not normal TOE au- mand and control net and the RAS net (both thorization of the division/brigade signal or- Navy) are included since their traffic is of di- ganization. Experience indicates that a hospit- rect interest to brigade and battalion com- al ship, supply ship, and repair ship are min- manders. imum essential support ships for a riverine &. Because of the large number of radio sets force of brigade size. aboard the various ships and boats, especially the brigade and battalion APB’s, some type S—2§. ûôvosô©© Sospraail iikatftaDo©^ Sty)p(p©trî of antenna-patching or an antenna-switching a. General. The many variations possible in facility is necessary. Such a system assists in riverine operations prevent establishment of overcoming the radiation problems that occur rigid guidelines for the employment of divi- in a crowded shipboard installation. In addi- sion, brigade, and battalion communications tion, an antenna patching system serves as a systems. However, division communications as positive measure of systems control and fa- described in FM 11-50 remain generally ap- cilitates the exercise of radio net discipline. plicable for the organization and employment of the division signal battalion. Resources of á>—241. MimOtóisD'iismirftsD K si @55© CQimmiuiraeeaifctres the forward communications company are re- A type multichannel radio communication quired for direct support to brigades and bat- plan for a brigade is shown in figure 6-7. talions with assistance from the remainder of a. Ship-to-Shore Communications. the signal battalion as required. (1) A type radio multichannel network b. Division Main/Division Base. from division main/division base to the bri- (1) Elements of division headquarters gade APB requires 24 channels. Multichannel company and support command are located at radio repeaters advantageously located ashore, division main/division base and use the com- on high terrain if available, insure continuous munication facilities organic to the command communications. The brigade CP ashore (or operation and signal support operation com- brigade rear) is normally linked by the divi- panies. This complex requires entry into an sion multichannel network to the brigade area communications system or equivalent com- APB. Provisions are necessary to extend a munications network to provide contact with minimum of four-voice channels from the bri- the next higher headquarters. These facilities gade APB to a brigade forward CP, when es- are provided by the next higher headquarters. tablished. These networks provide common- (2) The tactical situation, units in the di- and sole-user voice and the necessary teletype- vision base, and the additional facilities re- writer circuits. Division main and division quired for riverine operations determine the base are presumably collocated. supplemental communication center service re- (2) If a division forward is established, quired from the command operations and sig- multichannel terminals at this site provide nal support operations companies. For exam- communications to the brigade APB. In this ple, if a combat support coordination center

§§ AGO 20012A (CSCC) is established at the division base, de- communication installations are similar to mands for supplemental communication center those facilities normally provided in a semi- service will increase. permanent conventional military camp or gar- c. Brigade Support. The division signal bat- rision containing a part of the division. Ex- talion organizes and trains mobile radio teams ternal communications from a land base to equipped with HF-SSB voice or VHF-FM higher and lower headquarters are operational voice radio sets. These radio teams are either requirements; therefore, they take precedence motorized or equipped with portable equip- over the installation and operation of an in- ment to augment the facilities of maneuver ternal communications system. battalion headquarters and certain liaison (2) Land-based communications. Brigade teams—the liaison teams to host country, U.S., elements and their organic and attached or or allied military forces. Elements of the for- supporting signal units normally are adequate ward area signal center platoon and one for- to operate and maintain land base facilities reward command terminal section of the for- quired for all forces attached to the brigade. ward communications company normally pro- The time available and the communications fa- vide communication support to a brigade. The cility already in operation determine the ela- division signal battalion may require augmen- borateness of the communications system es- tation to provide this support. tablished in a land base. Supplemental internal communication considerations as described for 6-26. Brigade Communications the afloat base apply equally to the land-based a. Afloat Base. complex. Wire is the primary means for inter- (1) General. When a brigade operates nal base communications. Camp security out- from an afloat base, the brigade headquarters post positions and airstrip facilities require ra- and other personnel are assigned to and bil- dio backup. leted aboard an APB. This ship also serves as the flag ship for the naval river assault flotilla c. Brigade Command and Control Communi- commander. Communication facilities to sat- cations. isfy both the flotilla and brigade commander’s (1) Command helicopter. During combat requirements for all aspects of command con- operations, the brigade commander normally trol and support during riverine operations are commands from a command and control heli- necessary. copter. The Navy Commander also may oper- (2) Shipboard communications. Typical ate from this aircraft during RAS Operations. communication facilities installed aboard a bri- Communications equipment installed on these gade APB are shown in figure 6-6. This ship- helicopters varies in quantity and composition. board communication facility provides the nec- Current production models contain from two essary means to maintain all required radio to four VHF(FM) voice radios and some mod- nets, to operate a telephone exchange, and to els have an additional UHF (AM) radio for air establish a communications center with tele- controller use. Similar equipment, in a slightly type terminations. Brigade organic and at- different configuration, is also available for air- tached signal elements may require augmen- borne FM automatic voice retransmission in tation to operate this shipboard system. Com- support of riverine operations. munications are established with base security (2) Brigade CCB. A CCB is available to forces ashore and with brigade command ele- establish a waterborne brigade forward or a ments operating aboard a CCB. A VHF multi- tactical command post. This boat has the com- channel radio to a land-based area signal cen- munications facilities that the brigade and ter terminates onboard the brigade APB. This flotilla commanders need to control the RAS multichannel link gives the brigade commander and movement of the embarked Army unit to aboard the APB 24 voice channels for entry the objective area. The CCB may also be a into the area or division communications sys- communication radio retransmission station, if tem. necessary. Figure 6-6 shows a typical brigade b. Land Base. CCB radio-net structure. (1) General. Riverine land-based internal

89 AGO 20012A 6—27. Battalion Communications 6-6. Once ashore, the company uses standard radio nets as prescribed by battalion signal op- a. Afloat Base. eration instructions (SOI). (1) General. Normally, one infantry battalion and associated combat support and com- e. Heliborne Infantry Battalion Communi- bat service support elements are billeted cations. Standard communication doctrine and aboard an APB or an APL. techniques apply to airmobile operations in the (2) Shipboard communications. Typical riverine environment. However, when airmobile units operate more than 20 kilometers communications facilities for a battalion APB are shown in figure 6—6. from base areas, they need a man-portable HF SSB, continuous wave (CW), in addition to b. Battalion Command and Control Com- TOE allowances. munications. (1) Command helicopter. The use of heli- 6-28. Artillery CCB copters and the communication facilities avail- Figure 6-6 shows a typical artillery CCB radio- able is the same as for brigade command and net structure. A CCB or an LCM(8) is neces- control helicopters (para 6-26c(l)). sary for the forward control of artillery fires (2) Battalion CCB. The use of a CCB and from the waterway. The artillery CCB or the communications facilities available to the LCM(8) may require additional radio sets for battalion and RAS commanders is the same as essential fire control. for brigade and flotilla commanders (para 6- 26c(2)). In addition, the battalion CCB radios 6-29. Other Ships and Boats may relay requests for supporting fires, and a. Combat Service Support. Experience in- transmit adjustments. Figure 6-6 shows a typ- dicates that a supply ship, hospital ship, and ical battalion CCB radio-net structure. repair ship are essential combat service sup- c. Debarked Battalion. Once ashore, the de- port for a brigade riverine force. Minimum es- barked battalion headquarters operates in the sential communication requirements for each radio nets shown in figure 6-6. of these ships are identical and are shown in d. Embarked Company. En route to its land figure 6-6 and 6-7. objective, the embarked rifle company has a b. Other Boats. Army units use other boats requirement for the radio sets shown in figure as required (fig. 6-6).

Section V. INTELLIGENCE 6-30. General (4) U.S. military and civilian advisory a. FM 30-5, FM 32-10 and other field man- assistance programs. uals in the FM 30- and 32- series contain the (5) Intelligence operations established by general doctrine, methods, and procedures for higher headquarters. collecting, processing, and disseminating intel- 6-31. Sociological, Political, and Economic ligence. The procedures discussed in these manuals vary in their application in riverine op- Considerations erations. This section contains information on a. Basic intelligence includes population size special aspects of intelligence that apply spe- and distribution; basic racial stock and physi- cifically to operations in a riverine environ- cal characteristics ; ethnic and minority ment. groups; social, structure; health organization b. In addition to the combat intelligence and capabilities; religion, culture, and political needed to support offensive operations and tendencies; and organizations in areas adja- base area defense, a requirement exists to sup- cent to land and afloat bases and in prospec- port— tive AO’s. This basic intelligence assists in the (1) Host country internal security and in- development of intelligence sources in the area ternal development operations. and is essential to the success of psychological (2) PSYOP. and civil affairs operations. (3) Civil affairs operations. b. Among important local economic consid-

90 AGO 20012A erations are the income-producing activities stacles on land and water, LOG, land and water (agriculture, fishing, etc.), transportation, traffic, fortifications, weapon emplacements, food supply sources, and living conditions at and propaganda displays). Air observation can various social levels. Tactical operations that continue during darkness, by using night vi- improve the economy usually result in better sion devices. intelligence, more successful tactical operations, (2) Because of the contrast in riverine and less effective enemy activities. Conversely, topography between wet and dry seasons, friendly operations that, unnecessarily disrupt aerial photography updates existing maps and or destroy the economy tend to confirm enemy produces map supplements for tactical unit propoganda and to gain local support for the commanders down to the platoon/boat level. enemy forces. Aerial photography, particularly during peri- c. The enemy’s use of inland waterways and ods of low-water level, may identify the main his attempts to control friendly use of them de- channel of waterways and obstacles—fishtraps, mand special attention. Barricades or obstacles sandbars, water vegetation, entrapped debris, often may restrict friendly military move- and enemy-emplaced obstacles. Night aerial ment, but allow local watercraft to reach photography provides a capability for night market areas. Enemy tax stations at various surveillance along LOG. Night photography, locations restrict or harass movements of food however, has the disadvantage of requiring vis- and supplies. The securing of routes for trans- ible artificial illumination. Repetitive, detailed portation of rice or other agricultural products interpretation of photos detects enemy activ- to market becomes important to the local popu- ities. As the imagery interpreter becomes fa- lation who depend on the income from the sale miliar with the area, he can readily detect of such products. changes in the topography and evidence of enemy activity. 6-32. Intelligence Collection Consideration (3) Side-looking airborne radar (SLAR) o. Adaptation of Conventional Intelligence is well suited for near all-weather repetitive Agencies, Sources, and Techniques. Conven- coverage of large areas and for surveillance of tional intelligence collection agencies, sources, linear distances such as coastlines and inter- and techniques are adapted to the riverine en- national boundaries. vironment and the local enemy forces. Proce- (a.) When the • SLAR has an in-flight dures that clearly define the responsibility for processing capability, it may produce near real- intelligence collection and exploitation are nec- time target data information in the aircraft essary for all U.S. Forces and agencies oper- cockpit for transmission to an appropriate ating in a riverine area. ground or airborne station. b. Sources for Information. Host country (6) Limitations exist in the resolution units, agencies, and individuals are primary of both moving and stationary targets with sources for information about the area. When the SLAR system. Boat traffic cannot be iden- possible, division units exploit these sources tified as to size, shape, or type. SLAR imagery through the U.S. military and civilian ad- cannot detect or identify small stationary visors working with them. Province and dis- tactical targets against a land background. trict SOICC provide a mechanism for quickly (c) Fixed target imagery from a obtaining collected information. Initial con- SLAR can provide readily available, accurate tact is made with U.S. advisors to establish mapping of uncharted areas or areas previ- procedures. ously mapped inaccurately. (Silting constantly c. Tactical Air Reconnaissance and Air Bat- changes the configuration of islands, channels, tlefield Surveillance. and beaching locations along major waterways (1) Visual air andobservation coastal areas.)provides Although re- radar mapping sponsive and detailed surveillance of a riverine cannot be used when great detail is required, area to detect enemy activity. As an observer it does afford up-to-date, fairly constant-scale becomes more familiar with an assigned area, reproduction of a riverine area. he can more readily detect changes in the to- (4) Infrared imagery, which records pography and evidence of enemy activity (ob- thermal emissions, is particularly effective for

AGO 20012A 91 passive nighttime surveillance of waterways. e. Employment of Specialized Intelligence This type of surveillance may indicate the gen- Agencies. eral size and shape of watercraft. Other in- (1) The employment of the military infrared targets include heat emissions along telligence detachment attached to the division LOG and in suspected enemy locations. is similar to that provided in FM 30-9. Divi- (а) The infrared system has limited sion requirements for imagery interpreters capabilities for detecting heat sources through may increase because map supplement imagery heavy cloud layers, dense jungle or tree requirements increase. canopies, or similar heat-absorbing environ- (2) Electronic warfare operations and ments. that support provided by the U.S. Army Se- (б) When employed to detect heat curity Agency (USASA) Division support emissions or other activities along riverbanks company are planned to support riverine oper- and trail systems and inland areas, the infra- ations. red sensor either complements or supplements (3) Special forces detachments operating other means of surveillance. It can confirm or in the riverine area can provide information deny the existence of targets reported by other and intelligence to the riverine force. intelligence sources. (4) Long-range patrols are discussed in (c) An infrared sensor can readily de- paragraph 5-4. tect moist areas or hidden streams due to /. Mobile Intelligence and Civil Affairs temperature variance. Team. A mobile intelligence and civil affairs (5) The commander employs simultane- team (MICAT), organized as shown in figure ous multisensor coverage of the area of inter- 6-8, enters the AO before the operation be- est when possible. gins. The MICAT collocates with governmental facilities in the AO and obtains information d. Ground Surveillance and Reconnaissance. of benefit to the riverine force in planning the (1) Ground surveillance and reconnais- operation. MICAT is land based and moves sance are within the capabilities of all maneu- from one area to another in advance of the ver units. They are accomplished either as part riverine force to compile intelligence and to of the normal unit SOP or as a result of the plan PSYOP and civic action operations that commander’s specific intelligence require- will aid the units on arrival in the AO. To pre- ments. Effective ground surveillance and re- vent disclosure of scheduled operations, the connaissance are difficult in riverine areas be- MICAT periodically visits areas where no cause the dispersed and frequently isolated operations are scheduled. operations often prevent mutual support by (1) The duties of MICAT civil affairs units on the flanks and in the rear. Therefore, personnel include but are not limited to coordi- battalions may have difficulty in providing nating with U.S. advisory personnel, Agency their own all-round defense without reducing for International Development (AID), and their offensive capabilities. Reconnaissance province/district officials concerning— elements may have to perform security-type (a) The present status of revolutionary missions for land and afloat bases and combat development in the area. bases or serve as a reserve maneuver force. (b) The status of hamlets in the AO. (2) The employment of ground surveil- (c) A listing of projects that the river- lance devices takes full advantage of their all- ine force can undertake to complement the weather, day-and-night capability. Surveil- local governmental revolutionary program. lance radars, anti-intrusion devices, night vi- (d) Locations to conduct medical civic sion devices, and searchlights complement hu- action projects/dental civic action projects man reconnaissance and surveillance. These (MEDCAP/DENTCAP). devices are essential to land and afloat base (e) Surveys of areas that may be of defense, and they support offensive operations special interest to the riverine force. in AO’s. (2) The duties of MICAT PSYOP per- (3) Details on patrolling in a riverine sonnel are— area are contained in paragraphs 5-1 through (a) To study and analyze intelligence 5-7. in the planned AO.

AGO 20012A ARVN

TOC

U S Sector TOC Mb nte

and

CA Tm Sbbsector

Bde S2 IPW Tm MP Tm CA Tm PSYOP Tm Tm

AsstS2 QIC MP sqd Two S5 rep T*dPSYOP Intel NCO NCO interrogator %-ton trk specialists Rdo op EM interrogator ^■tori trk Intpr EM intpr %-ton trk Two ARVN Ml NOTE: The MICAT is an expedient organization developed specialists in Vietnam to.gain access to host country intelligence nets^ %-ton trk

Figure 6-8. Mobile intelligence and cival affairs team.

(b) To extract from this intelligence tactical operations are difficult. Local civiliansj information of value in planning PSYOP sup- a number of whom may support the enemy port for operations. forces, constantly observe the riverine force. (c) To interview defectors and prison- Every individual and unit in the area not Only ers of war in order to collect information on must understand necessary security measures enemy morale, activities, and weaknesses of but also must observe them ; counterinteliL value in determining PSYOP themes for the gence specialists, alone, cannot achieve and particular area. maintain security of information. 6-33. Security and Counterintelligence d. Riverine bases are particularly vulnerable to enemy sabotage because of the diffi- a. Effective counterintelligence increases culty of controlling the waterways. A combi= both the security of riverine forces and the nation of physical security measures, orders, probability of surprising enemy forces. The and controlled access to information and in* presence of large numbers of civilians in the stallations provides the best defense for bases. area and the difficulty of identifying enemy Only carefully screened, essential civilians are personnel among them frequently complicate allowed entrance to land or afloat base areas; counterintelligence activities in riverine areas. and constant control and supervision of them b. Counterintelligence operations rely on in- are necessary to reduce sabotage. formation from civilian informants concern- e. Care must be exercised to prevent the ing enemy activities—sabotage, subversion, enemy force from effectively employing cover and espionage. and deception techniques against the friendly c. Efforts to prevent premature disclosure of forces.

AGO 20012A 93 Section VI. TACTICAL AIRLIFT

6-34. General Prompt and speedy removal from land or Tactical airlift is the means by which air- afloat aid stations can save lives. craft deliver personnel, supplies, and equip- c. Artillery Positioning. Helicopters fre- ment on a sustained, selective, or emergency quently position or reposition artillery and, in basis to dispersed sites under a wide range of some cases, may be the artillery’s only means climate, terrain, and combat conditions (FM of displacing. 100-27). This airlift increases the Army’s d. Combat Service Support. Often, air move- battlefield mobility by air-landing or airdrop- ment of essential supplies is necessary to main- ping combat elements and providing them sustain the momentum of offensive operations. tained logistic support. The U.S. Air Force Helicopters frequently resupply artillery am- may sustain an air line of communications munition in the AO. (ALOC) for Army forces in a riverine area. Army aviation units augment the Air Force 6-36. U.S. Air Force Airlift capability for movement, supply, and resupply Air forces may be tasked to provide tactical operations; and they support combat elements airlift support to riverine forces. Air forces as operational requirements dictate. Air Force may operate from airfields adjacent to land and Army aircraft complement each other in or afloat bases or from outside the riverine tactical airlift. FM 57-1 and FM 57-35 pro- area. Detailed planning and coordination are vide information in airmobile and joint air- essential when using airlift support. Air Force borne operations. troop carriers deliver airborne troops to an objective area by airdropping or air-landing. 6-35. Army Aviation Airlift When airfields are available, Air Force troop a. Airmobile Operations. Paragraphs 4-7 carrier^ can preposition units and supplies (in through 4-11 describe airmobile operations. coordination with appropriate Army Logis- The division aviation battalion and nondivi- tical elements) in preparation for future op- sional aviation units can introduce troops into erations. Resupply is accomplished by air- an AO rapidly. The division’s airlift capabil- landing, or airdropping—LOLEX (low-level ity is limited, however, and operations require extraction system), PLADS (parachute low- careful planning and detailed coordination to altitude delivery system), or LAPES (low- be effective. Operations involving the simul- altitude parachute extraction system). An taneous airlifting of more than one battalion ALOC, may have to be used to support riverine requires nondivisional aviation units. operations in some instances. With necessary b. Medical Evacvxition. Helicopters provide prior coordination, Air Force aircraft may be rapid evacuation of casualties from AO’s. used for medical evacuation.

Section VII PSYOP 6-37. Concept (2) Fear, where the host country has a. Host country psychological campaigns such control of the situation and populace that aim at all elements of their society as well as it can afford to adopt a firmer policy of either the enemy forces. Emphasis in internal de- unconditional surrender or death. fense and internal development operations in (3) Reward, where an individual is of- riverine areas is directed at reorientation of fered money to secure allegiance or support. people who support the enemy forces or at the b. Both U.S. and host country tactical enemy forces themselves. These reorientation PSYOP conform to generally accepted tech- efforts, essentially surrender programs, are of niques and media to support offensive opera- three general types : tions. FM 33-1 and FM 33-5 contain infor- (1) Amnesty,mation where on an these individual techniques. is of- In densely popu- fered amnesty on renouncing the enemy cause lated areas, consolidation PSYOP assumes in- and returning to the side of the government. creased importance.

94 AGO 20012A c. Themes employed are simple. Attempts to civilian population does not have access to “sell” abstract concepts such as national solid- radio receivers. arity or possible third country encroachment c. Two general types of division PSYOP to rural agrarian societies usually are not suc- are— cessful. (1) Tactical PSYOP, which are actions d. Host country personnel should write all directed against enemy forces and friendly or propaganda because U.S. personnel normally neutral civilians in areas under enemy control. cannot present thoughts that appeal to the (2) Consolidation PSYOP, which are ac- target audience as well as someone familiar tions directed toward friendly or neutral civil- with the customs, religion, and background of ians, friendly forces, and enemy or enemy the target audience. sympathizers in areas under friendly control. In areas subject to enemy subversion, consoli- 6-38. Purpose dation PSYOP in support of the host country . a. PSYOP support offensive operations and government may be the military commander’s base security in a riverine environment for first effective psychological means to maintain the same basic reasons as in other areas: stability. During hostilities, these operations (1) To reduce the combat efficiency of the also help to prevent sabotage and espionage. enemy military forces. (2) To support the combat effort by modifying or manipulating attitudes and be- 6-39. Planning and Coordination havior of special audiences. a. Tactical PSYOP, as well as the overall (3) To facilitate reorganization and con- staff supervision for PSYOP, are the responsi- trol of areas regained from enemy control, bility of the G3/S3. Consolidation PSYOP are operating in conjunction with civil affairs and the staff responsibility of G5/S5. During in- host country government. ternal defense and internal development oper- (4) To induce enemy units and individ- ations in a riverine environment, no clear dis- uals to defect. tinctions exist between the area and phases of (5) To win the cooperation of allies and tactical PSYOP and consolidation PSYOP. neutrals in support of U.S. and host country This requires close coordination and integra- efforts. tion between tactical PSYOP and consolida- (6) To exploit the population as a source tion PSYOP. of intelligence. b. The chief of the U.S. diplomatic mission b. PSYOP are planned, coordinated, and to the host country has overall responsibility integrated military operations, employing for U.S. PSYOP in internal defense and in- propaganda and spreading ideas orally, or ternal development. Any PSYOP campaign through printed matter. Propaganda, or the that U.S. forces initiate must conform with manipulation of ideas, increases in importance policies of the U.S. diplomatic mission or its in an internal defense and internal develop- designated agent for information, the United ment environment. When the opposing mili- States Information Service (USIS) of the tary objective is based on ideology rather than United States Information Agency (USIA). a pure struggle for political or economic Any subdivision of either agency, such as a power, the most effective weapons and tactics joint United States Public Affairs Office will also be ideological. Fighting ideas with (JUSPAO), that is designated for a specific ideas rather than with firearms seems more purpose is included. These agencies normally feasible. All types of propaganda (black, are represented at the political level at which white, and gray) apply to riverine operations. the division G3 and G5, and possibly the However, the transmission of propaganda is brigade S3 and S5, coordinate. Coordination restricted to host country methods ; e.g., with host country information and PSYOP propaganda cannot be transmitted over civil- agencies, at all levels, should be handled ian radio frequencies if the majority of the through the U.S. military advisors.

AGO 20012A 95 Section Vlli. ARMY AVIATION

6—40. General movement of his watercraft is under observa- The mobility provided by Army aviation units tion can cause him to reduce or discontinue adds to the flexibility of the Army commander use of the waterways during daylight. conducting riverine operations. Helicopters b. Night. The availability of night obser- airlift personnel and materiel needed to meet vation means permits interdiction operations many of the requirements of these operations, at night. A successful technique is the use of a and gunships deliver responsive fire support searchlight-equipped helicopter to locate and where and when needed. The helicopter’s abil- illuminate enemy craft for destruction by gun- ity to move virtually without regard to terrain ships. obstacles, to land on very small land areas, or to perform tasks by loading or unloading while 6—43. Helicopters Operating With Airboats hovering over areas in which no land is avail- and Air Cushion Vehicles able gives supported riverine forces a distinct a. General. Helicopter teams support water- advantage over forces lacking aviation sup- craft operations to form an effective fighting port. FM 1-100 provides general doctrine and unit and to promote an important advantage guidance for the employment of Army avia- over conventional units operating in the river- tion in support of military operations on land. ine environment. This section provides information on specific b. Security. Helicopter elements provide tasks that helicopter units can perform in sup- armed escort during movement of watercraft. port of forces engaged in riverine operations. When the movement unit is ambushed, gunships can engage the ambushing force and 6-41. Ambush provide suppressive fire to cover the advance a. Enemy. Air observers can detect points or withdrawal of the surface elements. of likely ambush or enemy activity indicating c. Armed Reconnaissance. Helicopter crews the preparation of an ambush and provide in- can direct escorted airboats and air cushion formation for use by friendly troops in avoid- vehicles over selected routes to avoid terrain ing or countering the ambush. obstacles and suspected ambush sites. b. Friendly. Observation of repeated enemy d. Finding and Fixing. Helicopters can find use of certain waterways can provide oppor- and fix enemy positions, develop the situa- tunities for the establishment of ambushes tion, and direct the movement of surface ele- by friendly forces. Helicopters, using decep- ments to the site. tive means, can transport troops to points at e. Blocking Force. Helicopter elements can or near the location of the planned ambush. aid in blocking the retreat or advance of enemy elements while allowing friendly forces 6—42. Interdiction sufficient time to maneuver. a. Day. Gunships can deny enemy water- /. Reaction Force. Helicopter elements can craft free use of waterways. Observation heli- move quickly to any point on the battlefield to copters, supported by on-call1 gunships or aid in exploiting a success of the maneuver quick-reaction watercraft, can accomplish the elements or to deliver direct fire support to al- same mission. The enemy’s awareness that low the surface elements to maneuver.

96 AGO 20012A CHAPTER 7

COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT

Section I. GENERAL

7-1. Basic Considerations f. Combat service support in a riverine environment is primarily support of land and a. The principles, techniques, procedures, afloat bases and operations launched from these and organizational concepts of combat service bases. support in Army field manuals in support of g. Backup support provided by higher eche- divisions, brigades, and battalions conducting lon is that normally available from the field ground, airborne, or airmobile operations ap- army support command (FASCOM) and its ply with modifications to riverine operations. support brigades. FM 54-2, FM 54-3, and FM The basic dissimilarity in riverine operations 54—4 contain detailed information on this sup- is the extensive use of ships and watercraft port. to provide combat service support. b. A riverine environment severely restricts movement overland. Except for a few primary 7-2. Responsibilities highways, interconnected road nets are often nonexistent. The extensive use of waterways a. Each Service is responsible for adminis- to move supplies and personnel partially over- tration and logistic support of its component comes this disadvantage. Helicopter and fixed- forces. Joint operations in riverine areas re- wing aircraft may also provide combat service quire close coordination of combat service sup- support. port to make the best use of the limited facil- c. Other factors requiring special consider- ities and available lines of communications ation are the need for increased control of in- (LOG). dividuals and traffic in the area of operations (AO) ; the lack of suitable landsites for large, b. The Army component commander sup- semifixed combat service support installations; plies and maintains common and Army-pecu- the requirements for support of watercraft liar items to both Army and Navy forces. The and associated equipment; and maintenance Navy component commander supplies and problems aggravated by the weather and ter- maintains Navy-peculiar items and provides rain. transport to move Army supplies. The Army d. The economical use and the conservation and Navy commanders of the riverine force of combat service support resources are para- are mutually responsible for coordinating mount. logistic support and determining the specific e. Plans make provisions for civic action arrangements and procedures to accomplish supplies, services, and medical treatment for the mission. civilians in the AO. Section II. SUPPLY

7-3. General support installations outside or on the periph- ery of the riverine area, initially. As suitable a. Forces stationed on either an afloat or a areas become available, combat service support land base receive support from combat service

AGO 20012A 97 installations are established within the river- LST on station. Supply and transportation are ine area. handled— b. Coordinated Army and Navy supply ac- (a) Either by using one LST contin- tivities insure the most efficient use of limited ually on station as a floating supply point and transportation resources, supply personnel, resupplying periodically with a second LST. and available storage facilities. In addition to This is the preferred method based on combat normal resupply, special items needed include experience. assault boats, outboard motors, paddles and (ö) Or by using each of two LST al- poles, life preservers, rope, waterproof matches ternately, with one supplying the afloat force and maps, waterproof bags, insect and leech when the other is replenishing supplies from repellant, and foot powder. Clothing and the supporting installations. When this meth- equipment wear out fast, thus increasing the od is used, Army personnel billeted aboard the normal replenishment rate. LST on station transfer to the incoming LST each time the ships rotate. 7-4. Resupply of a Land Base (3) In either method, a periodic replen- a. Truck transportation provides the most ishment cycle is necessary to keep reserve responsive means for resupplying a land base stocks from falling below a 3-day level. if an adequate LOG is available. Naval supply b. Classes of Supply. vessels are another means of transportation (1) Class I. Each self-propelled barracks for resupplying a land base adjacent to a river ship (APB) and barracks ship (nonself-pro- or canal. Air movement may be used for high- pelled) (APL) is initially stocked with a 30- priority or emergency resupply. day supply of rations. Resupply is by LST. b. Supply policies and procedures for units (2) Classes II, IV, VI, and IX. stationed at a land base generally compare {a) These supplies for Army units sta- with those for resupplying base camps in non- tioned on the afloat base consist primarily of riverine areas. The type and the amount of fortification materials, individual clothing and storage space available at the land base influ- equipment, personal demand items, and limited ence the stockage maintained. repair parts. (b) Supplies for Navy elements on the afloat base consist primarily of repair parts 7-5. Resupply of an Afloat Base and assemblies. Most of these items are car- a. Periodic Resupply. Resupply ships and ried aboard the repair ships ( ARL). Resupply watercraft provide the primary means of is by the LST or during periodic calls at a sup- transporting supplies between combat service porting shore base. support installations and an afloat base. Heli- (3) Classes III AND 111(A). copters are an alternate or an emergency (a) River assault squadron (RAS) means of resupply. watercraft are refueled with diesel and JP-5 (1) One landing ship, tank (LST) should from the APB and supply LST. The supply be in the afloat base—on station—at all times. LST refuels the APB’s and other ships of the In addition to normal resupply missions, the flotilla as required. LST of the river support squadron supporting (b) Motor gasoline (MOGAS) for the afloat base provides for— Army assault boat outboard motors, motor ve- (a.) Storage of a portion of the afloat hicles, and naval auxiliary engines is supplied unit’s basic load. from the landing craft, mechanized (LCM (6) Transportation of supplies, equip- (6)) refueler in each RAS. The 500-gallon ment, salvage, and personnel between the collapsible tank provides a flexible means of afloat base anchorage and the supporting com- storing and transporting MOGAS and diesel bat service support installation. fuel aboard the LCM(6) refueler. The 600- (2) Each LST can carry and store a 10- gallon metal tank may also be used. Commer- day supply of dry cargo for a brigade afloat cial barges or military yard tankers (YOG) base. Army supply personnel and portions of may refill the LCM (6) refuelers periodically. maneuver elements may be billeted aboard the (c) A combination of stocks at an air-

98 AGO 20012A field adjacent to the afloat base and stocks pre- for a battalion to conduct a 1-day operation. positioned for support of specific operations An additional 2-day supply for a battalion is provide JP—4 and aviation gasoline (AVGAS) transported in the ATC’s carrying troops. The for supporting helicopter units. Command battalion S4 controls and issues these supplies. and control helicopters may refuel on the Howitzer ammunition accompanies the artil- helicopter (HELO) barge normally deployed lery piece aboard each watercraft. Watercraft with the barge-mounted artillery. or helicopters resupply artillery ammunition {d) The LST supply ship provides re- in the AO. supply of packaged class III products. d. An LCM(6) refueler or helicopters nor- (4) Classes V and V(A). mally transport bulk MOGAS to resupply as- (a) Normally, that portion of the sault boat outboard motors and motor vehicles unit’s basic load issued to individuals and in the AO. Refueling points may be estab- weapons crews is stored on the AMMI barge. lished in the AO using a collapsible fuel tank. The remainder of the basic load may be stored The tank will float in water and can be dropped either on the LST or on the armored troop by fixed-wing aircraft or helicopters or towed carriers (ATC). Storing part of the basic load into position by watercraft. on ATC obviates the requirement to transfer e. Potable water, in 5-gallon cans or plastic class V items from the LST to other water- containers, is distributed with rations in the craft for resupply to an AO. Detailed load AO. Purification tablets are available for use plans are necessary when ATC stock part of with water from local sources when potable the basic load. water is not provided. (b) Normally, ammunition for sup- f. Development of a brevity code simplifies porting Army aviation units is provided by supply request procedures. With such a sys- the aviation units. tem, a code word or an alphabetical designator, transmitted by radio, identifies and requests a single item or several associated items 7-6. Resupply During Tactical Operations of equipment or supplies to be issued. a. ATC’s, helicopters, air boats, or air cush- g. Assault boats can transport supplies on ion vehicles (ACV) may transport supplies to shallow waterways, in relatively secure areas, units in the AO. U.S. Air Force planes may to units within the AO. provide backup resupply in the AO when the h. Night kits include such items as mortars, area and the nature of the operation warrant. starlight scopes, water, recoilless rifles, sundry b. Unit distribution of supplies in the AO packs, and items of personal clothing that are is normal procedure. Distribution of supplies needed at night but are not needed during the in the AO is facilitated when supplies are day. Night kits are normally stored aboard the packed in one-man loads. supply LST during the day and delivered to c. One ATC can transport sufficient supplies the AO each night.

Section III. MAINTENANCE 7-7. General c. Direct support maintenance, provided by the division maintenance battalion, does not a. This section contains guidance for the include maintenance of medical, crypto- organization and operation of maintenance graphic, automatic data processing/electronic units supporting Army forces conducting com- accounting machine (ADP/EAM), air-deliv- bat operations in a riverine environment. FM ery equipment, and personal and organiza- 9-30, FM 29-20, and FM 29-22 contain additional clothing and equipment. Signal elements tional information on maintenance support. located in the division base provide direct sup- b. Maintenance services include repair of port maintenance for cryptographic items. materiel, supply of repair parts for organiza- Direct support maintenance of medical, ADP, tional maintenance, and supply of replacement air-delivery equipment, and personal and or- end items using operational readiness float ganizational clothing and equipment is not procedures. accomplished within the division.

AGO 20012A 99 d. The size and the composition of the nance tasks at the land base or the afloat base. maintenance unit depend on the size, compo- Contact teams should have authority to per- sition, and equipage of the supported force; form controlled cannibalization in the AO, the degree of support that the Navy forces land base, and afloat base as an emergency (e.g., repairmen and test and tool sets) can method of obtaining critical repair parts. provide; and the requirement to provide sup- g. Backhaul transportation (aircraft, water- port to the Navy elements (which may be craft, and available armored personnel car- partly equipped with Army-type equipment). riers (APC) returning from supply or combat e. The mission and the requirement for missions) evacuate materiel and deliver sup- deviation from normal operational techniques ply requests from using units. influence the organization, equipment, and h. Maintenance battalion elements in bri- deployment of the maintenance structure pro- gade areas evacuate items requiring complex viding support. Operations in a riverine en- repairs to the maintenance battalion’s main vironment require more reliance on an air or support company in the division base camp. water LOG for resupply of needed end items The main support company operates the pri- and repair parts than on a ground LOG. De- mary repair parts supply point in the division. pendence on air and water transportation re- i. Operational readiness float procedures quires special orientation of maintenance sup- provide serviceable end items in exchange for port to provide needed capabilities and delete unserviceable end items. unneeded capabilities. j. Navy maintenance personnel augment the productive capacity of Army maintenance 7—®. iPiriiívsiples iVkaorattemairage Sypp@rt for units and vice versa. KSverme OperafSomts 7—9. íVksooiifteiraQiirüge ©perattooims The organization and the operation of the maintenance support system follow these A U.S. Army division in a host country de- principles : velops a series of bases (base camp, land and a. Detailed planning insures that units afloat, combat, and patrol) to mount, control, maintain minimum essential maintenance sup- and support operations in a riverine area. The plies and equipment consistent with planned number, size, and composition of these bases operations. depend on the size and deployment of the com- b. Detailed analysis of the mission insures mitted force and the functions performed at that maintenance units and teams contain these bases. An aircraft landing facility at minimum essential personnel. each base facilitates operations. c. Plans to provide transportation support a. Division Base Camp. The headquarters of maintenance services consider all methods and main support company and the aircraft of transport. The commander allocates a part maintenance company of the maintenance of the available airlift and watercraft to sup- battalion are in the division base camp to pro- port maintenance units and teams. vide backup support to elements of the riverine d. Procedures for repair parts resupply are force (Army, Navy, or both). Brigade ele- as simple as possible. Verbal requests for re- ments may place equipment not suited to pair parts are acceptable. Maximum use of riverine operations in limited storage at the direct exchange reduces the number of unserv- division base or the brigade land base. iceable items of equipment. b. Land Base/Afloat Base. These bases are e. Unit distribution of maintenance supplies semipermanent installations containing essen- and repair parts is the normal procedure in a tial command, control, and combat service riverine area. Packaging maintenance sup- support elements for the organization (bri- plies and repair parts for distribution in the gade or battalion) as well as any attachments AO permits further distribution without using necessary (e.g., boat and outboard motor vehicles for transportation. maintenance personnel). The direct support /. Contact teams from the maintenance bat- maintenance personnel or elements attached talion accomplish critical on-site maintenance for support of the brigade (less personnel and in the AO. They accomplish normal mainte- equipment detached for support of brigade

AGO 20012A equipment that remains at the division base) ion; and at division base by the headquarters provide support from the land base. and main support company and the aircraft c. Combat Base. Battalion maintenance ele- maintenance company of the maintenance bat- ments and direct support contact maintenance talion. Navy maintenance personnel, assigned teams perform on-site maintenance services in to the ARL as part of the Navy riverine force, combat bases (para 1-3;'). The majority of accomplish Army maintenance tasks within this maintenance is perfonned on.,combat es- their capability. sential items. Less critical items of equipment b. Division direct support maintenance per- are repaired either aboard the battalion APB sonnel aboard ARL ships perform mainte- or APL or at the land base. nance on weapons, vehicles, communication/ d. Patrol Base. Contact maintenance teams, electronics equipment, outboard motors, gen- battalion or direct support personnel, move to erators, assault boats, and other fiber glass patrol bases (para 1-3A;) to perform neces- equipment. Repair facilities available aboard sary repair of combat essential items of equip- the ARL include office space; toolroom and ment. On completion of the repairs, these repair parts storage area ; and shops for repair teams normally return to the combat base. of small arms and weapons, assault boat outboard motors, generators, and communication/ 7-10. Considerations Influencing electronics equipment. Repair and storage Organization of Maintenance Units space aboard the ARL for Army maintenance a. Scarcity of adequate maintenance facil- tasks include the following: ities and the need to support widespread units (1) Communications/electronics equip- require decentralization and the increased use ment, Army and Navy—350 square feet. of contact teams by the maintenance battalion. (2) Repair parts storage, with storage b. The riverine environment is unusually bins—1,000 square feet. destructive to all types of electronic and fire (3) Small-arms repair—200 square feet. control equipment. Daily cleaning of equip- (4) Operational readiness float storage, ment is mandatory. Technical assistance to weathertight—300 square feet. the user is necessary to insure effective or- (5) Water level barge space for repairing ganizational preventive maintenance. fiber glass boats. c. Modifications in organizations and equip- c. The difficulties of evacuating unservice- ment eliminate the need for most types of able major items require emphasis on contact heavy repair equipment, which may remain at teams operating forward with the units or the division base area. Limitations of the road responsive to their needs. Naval craft or heli- net in the area may require substitution of copters accomplish required evacuation of lighter vehicles for the authorized vehicles. equipment. These means, which are normally The existence of many navigable waterways more secure than ground means, provide fast in the area indicates that augmentation of the evacuation. Evacuation overland is less se- unit with boats and outboard motors is feasi- cure and requires security elements to accom- ble for the movement of men and materiel. pany the movement. Air resupply of end items and repair parts in d. Maximum use of an operational readiness the AO may become necessary. float provides using units an immediate re- d. The joint nature of riverine operations placement for unserviceable equipment. requires the close coordination of maintenance e. The forward support company elements support to obtain maximum advantage from operating at the afloat or land base perform the limited facilities and maintenance equip- their duties based on the following principles: ment available. (1) Perform only those repairs that can be accomplished speedily, using the minimum 7-11. Direct Support Maintenance of heavy repair equipment and heavy, bulky a. This level of maintenancerepaii* takes parts. place in three general locations: in the AO by contact (2) Perform maintenance at the site of teams; at the afloat or land base by the for- the equipment failure, using contact mainte- ward support company, maintenance battal- nance teams.

AGO 20012A 101 (3) Even though the headquarters and J-O. Supply ©? Kepaiir Parts and main support company normally accomplishes OperaiianaD leadóness Fl@aî lîems complex or time-consuming repairs at the di- a. General. vision base, elements of the forward support (1) Quantities of maintenance supplies company supporting a brigade may accomplish and repair parts stocked by units depend on these repairs in the following instances: needs of the unit, availability of transporta- (a) When a critical need for the equip- tion, and responsiveness of resupply. Repair ment exists and the performance of repairs, parts stockage by maneuver units includes regardless of complexity, is faster than ob- only combat essential items. The headquarters taining an operational readiness float item as a and main support company operates the divi- replacement of the unserviceable equipment. sion supply point for maintenance supplies Repair parts necessary to complete repairs in and repair parts. these cases may require airlifting or controlled (2) Procedures for resupply of mainte- cannibalization of similar items awaiting nance items are included in the standing op- evacuation. erating procedure (SOP). Development of a (b) When LOG are interrupted, the brevity code simplifies supply request proce- forward support company performs all repairs dures. With such a system, a code word or within its capability and obtains repair parts alphabetical designator, transmitted by radio, through controlled cannibalization of similar identifies and requests a single item or several equipment. associated items of equipment or supplies be (4) The commander allocates part of issued. available transportation to maintenance ele- b. Repair Parts Supply. ments for movement of contact teams, evacu- (1) The repair parts supply element of ation of materiel, resupply of repair parts, and the forward support company operates at the movement of operational readiness float items. brigade base. Maneuver battalion maintenance (5) Perform overflow organizational personnel accomplish repair parts storage, maintenance for the brigade and assist Navy requisitioning, and issue functions. maintenance elements, as necessary. (2) The supply element of the forward (6) Provide the maximum number or re- support company provides repair parts and pair components to brigade elements through maintenance supplies to all units of the bri- direct exchange procedures. gade and common items to the Navy element /. The headquarters and main support com- and to the maintenance elements of the company and the aircraft maintenance company, pany. Maintenance supplies and repair parts normally in the division base, provide direct are combined with shipments of other types support maintenance for units in the division of supplies to use available transportation to base and backup direct support maintenance the maximum. When possible, the forward for the forward support companies in bri- support company delivers repair parts directly gade areas. Contact maintenance teams from to the requesting unit. the companies in the division base perform c. Operational Readiness Float Items. The their duties on site, when possible, repairing supply and transport battalion provides re- heavy equipment and aircraft in brigade areas placement of lost or destroyed end. items. or AO’s. Unserviceable materiel that exceeds Headquarters and main support company, the repair capabilities of the forward support maintenance battalion, provides the division companies and contact teams from the divi- operational readiness float. Each forward sup- sion base is evacuated to the division base for port company provides a limited operational repairs or further evacuation to field army readiness float of end items to exchange for support command ( F ASCOM) units. The reparable end items. This float consists pri- headquarters and main support company oper- marily of small arms, fire control instruments, ates collecting points in the division base for and portable radio sets, and includes a limited recovered U.S. materiel and captured enemy quantity of other critical end items as deter- materiel. mined by experience factors.

H02 AGO 20012A kept clean and dry. Because of the space lim- 7-13. Destruction of Supplies and f Equipment itations on board the APB and APL, users o equipment perform preventive maintenance Supplies and equipment are not abandoned. If services on their equipment onboard the units cannot evacuate equipment, they destroy it (except for medical items) ; SOP of all units AMMI barge moored to each barracks ship. include means and priorities for destruction. Maintenance sheds or express containers FM 5-25, the FM 23-series, and technical man- (CONEX), placed on these barges, provide a uals dealing with specific types of equipment storage area for organizational maintenance contain information on which to base destruc- equipment and supplies. tion plans. b. Unit armorers and maintenance personnel aboard the APB and the APL perform organizational maintenance on all equipment 7-14. Organizoiianal Maintenance deployed from the afloat force. Maintenance a. Preventive maintenancefacilities is essential available to for a maneuver unit on prevent overtaxing organizational mainte- board include a teletype/radio repair work- nance capabilities. The condition of seals and shop, a radio/electronics workshop with test the operation of valves and pumps require spe- equipment, and a shop for small-arms main- cial attention. Individual weapons must be tenance.

Section IV. MEDICAL 7-15. General medical care for personnel stationed on the a. Medical support in a riverine area follows afloat base. Navy medical corpsmen normally the basic principles and practices of military provide medical support for Navy personnel in medicine; however, provision of this support the flotilla. The battalion medical platoon is more complex. The distances between sup- aboard each battalion APB or APL provides porting bases and AO’s and the semi-independ- medical care for Army personnel embarked. ent nature of operations (particularly the b. Small medical treatment facilities aboard waterborne phases) complicate medical treat- APB’s and APL’s necessarily limit the care ment and evacuation. Medical service organ- that may be provided at the afloat base. Med- ization and procedures usually require modifi- ical care normally will be restricted to that cation. treatment within capabilities that may re- b. Army medical personnel at land or afloat store patients to duty status or to that neces- bases and Navy medical personnel of the river sary for evacuation to medical treatment fa- flotilla work together to support coordinated cilities ashore. Selected patients may be held operations effectively. Joint medical facilities in the AO for observation and care for limited provide the most effective use of limited re- periods in accordance with command policy sources. to maintain combat effectiveness. The APB’s and APL’s have a landing pad for use of 7-16. Medical Support of a Land Base medical evacuation helicopters. The Army commander provides medical serv- c. If watercraft are mined, 30 to 40 percent ices for all personnel stationed at a land base. of the injured may require surgical treatment. Medical organization and procedures generally The surgical capability of the medical company compare with those used to support base camps of the division medical battalion, augmented by in nonriverine areas. A medical company of appropriate TOE 8-500 medical teams, pro- the division medical battalion, augmented as vides the necessary level of competence. A cen- necessary by appropriate TOE 8-500 medical tralized medical facility for the afloat base may service teams, normally collocates with the be established aboard a specially configured brigade at the land base. APB or APL, or an accessory LST may be provided for a mobile surgical hospital. Use 7-17. Medical Support of an Afloat Base of an LST or other similar craft to house a a. The base commander is responsible for reinforced division medical company or surgi-

AGO 20012A 103 cal hospital provides a readily accessible type environment. The high incidence of ma- means of a medical support. laria, cholera, plague, tuberculosis, diarrhea, and louseborne diseases among the local pop- F—ÏS. Mœdlkeal S®d®D C@ü’âs5deü‘®]lïî®[fi)§ treated uniform does not give adequate pro- a. Personal health and hygiene are particu- tection against these pests, which are abundant larly important for troops operating in a delta- in some areas.

functional areas of traffic control, prisoner of 7—2@. ©e®eir®il war (PW) and refugee operations, and secur- a. Military police support in riverine opera- ity of critical areas and supplies. Additionally, tions involves increased considerations in the support in populace and resources control be-

AGO 20012A comes important because of the semi-independ- boats from waterways and inspecting boats ent nature of riverine operations. when necessary. b. Military police resources organic to the division may be insufficient to provide the neces- 7-22. PW Operations sary support; therefore, plans for augmenta- a. The processing and handling of enemy tion are necessary. The riverine force com- PW’s conform to the principles and procedures mander normally retains this augmentation un- outlined in FM 19-40. der his direct control. b. Planning for PW evacuation includes a detailed study of transportation used in the 7-21. Traffic Control operation with special attention to the boat a. Traffic control, a military police function, traffic plan. Use of the multiplicity of trans- is important in riverine operations because the portation available in a riverine area increases generally poor road network and numerous flexibility and expedites the early evacuation small canals hinder combat and combat support of PW’s from the AO. elements as they traverse the riverine area. c. An increased number of civilian detainees Continuous boat traffic on navigable waterways may require special considerations for segrega- presents additional requirements for traffic tion and increased coordination with civil af- control and may also require special military fairs personnel. police support. d. The control and the handling of repatri- b. Traffic control in a riverine area follows ates receive special consideration. Treatment the basic principles applied to river-crossing is oriented toward early rehabilitation. and amphibious operations and the general guidance enumerated in FM 19-25 with the ex- 7-23. Security Operations ceptions that— a. Military police security operations orient (1) Flexibility is necessary because of the on populace and resource control with special greater frequency of water obstacles and the consideration to environmental restrictions. generally poor trafficability of the area. b. Security operations require advance and (2) Greater decentralization may be neces- continuous coordination with civilian police to sary because of the wider dispersion of combat restrict indigenous persons from the base area elements. and to control their movement throughout the (3) Greater than normal resources may AO. have to be assigned to the control of refugee c. Afloat base security involves consideration traffic. of a special traffic plan on the waterways and (4) Military police elements use patrol the use of river curfews and control points for river boats (PBR) and amphibious vehicles to civilian river traffic. provide mobility on the network of waterways in the AO. d. Additional considerations are the use of (5) The integration of military police ele- boat patrols to secure LOG and the use of mili- ments in advance, flank, and rear guards of tary police on supply vessels to provide added water convoys assists them in clearing civilian security.

AGO 20012A 105 CHAPTER 8 DEFENSE OF BASE AREAS

Section I. GENERAL

8-1. Mission control of the inland waterways and existing The mission of units defending base areas in road nets in areas selected for either land or the riverine environment is to maintain a se- afloat bases. These operations deny use of the cure base from which to support and conduct waterways and roads as lines of communica- offensive operations by preventing or disrupt- tions (LOG) for enemy forces that threaten ing enemy attacks by use of fire, close combat, the base area or future operations. Operations and counterattack. to maintain a secure base continue for the duration of the riverine campaign. This chap- 8-2. Concept ter describes tactics and techniques for the de- As the initial phase of a riverine campaign, fense of these semipermanent installations. river patrols and ground operations gain local

Section II. FUNDAMENTALS OF BASE AREA DEFENSE

8-3. Basic Considerations required for base defense. Factors considered The defense of land and afloat bases, established in selecting the base location are— to provide all-round security for the base with (1) Artificial obstacles that improve the a minimum expenditure of available forces, re- natural defensive characteristics of the terrain. quires detailed planning and centralized con- (2) Existing roads, rivers, and canals used troi. Security measures are necessary to safe- for military LOG and civilian commerce. guard troops, installations, and equipment. (3) Control of land areas surrounding the They may also protect adjacent key civilian base complex to a range beyond that of enemy communities or communications centers when mortars and rockets as well as control of water feasible. The defense of a base area, both ag- approaches. gressive and offensive, prevents the buildup of (4) The use of rivers and canals as obstacles. enemy forces. The characteristics, capabilities, b. Security. Early warning of pending en- and weaknesses of the enemy force require con- emy actions insures the base commander time stant evaluation. Vigilance and sound security to react to any threat. Outposts, patrols, ground measures not only reduce enemy interference surveillance and countermortar radar, scout with operations from the base, but may cause dogs, and air reconnaissance and surveillance enemy forces to divert their operations from provide the required early warning. Civilian the base area. Planners consider the following informants and the actions of natives near the fundamentals when planning and organizing base area are excellent indicators of pending the base area defense: enemy actions. Security measures vary in de- a. Use of Terrain. When planning the degree with enemy threat, forces available, and fense, evaluation and organization of the area other factors; however, constant all-round se- are essential to reduce the number of forces curity is essential.

106 AGO 20012A c. Mutual Support. The positioning of de- for offensive operations away from the base. fense forces insures mutual employment of de- These offensive actions consist of aggressive fensive resources, which include fires, observa- patrols to detect an enemy force attempting tion, and maneuver elements. The capability of to reenter the area and provisions for conduct- providing mutual support between defensive ing raids, ambushes, air attacks, and support- elements requires careful planning and positioning fires to destroy an enemy force that has ing because of the circular aspects of the de- successfully reestablished itself in the area. fensive area. The commander employs surveillance, obstacles, prearranged fires, and maneu- h. Dispersion. Dispersion is hard to main- ver elements to exploit or reinforce fires to contain in base areas. The use of outposts and trol gaps in defensive positions. Defense plans strongpoints to strengthen defenses provides provide for use of all available support includ- dispersion as a side benefit. To compensate for ing armed helicopters and close air support. lack of dispersion, routine base security meas- d. All-Round Defense. In defensive planning, ures change frequently to prevent the enemy the base commander prepares to defend against force from obtaining detailed information an enemy attack from any direction. Plans are about locations, composition, and habits of de- sufficiently flexible and reserves are positioned fense elements needed for the enemy to plan an to permit reaction to any threat. The command- attack. er commits maneuver forces and available sup- i. Time Available. In formulating his de- porting weapons to detect, engage, and destroy fense plan, the base commander considers the any enemy force near the base. All personnel time available to prepare defensive positions. within the base area are assigned positions Careful selection and precise timing of tasks and sectors of responsibility. are prerequisite to the successful defense. De- e. Defense in Depth. The size of the base area fensive planning and improvement of positions dictates the degree of defense in depth. Alter- continue during the occupation of the base. nate and supplementary positions, combat outposts, and mutually supporting strongpoints j. Integrated and Coordinated Defensive forward of the base forward defense area can Measures. increase the depth. The commander also plans (1) Fire planning. Maneuver and coordi- fires throughout the defensive area up to the nated fires are the principal means to defeat maximum range of available weapons. an enemy assault forward of the defensive po- /. Responsiveness. Attacks against a base sition or within it. Fires of all weapons of area may range from long-range sniper, mor- attached and supporting units, including wea- tar, or rocket fire to attacks by suicide demo- pons of Navy ships and afloat base craft, in- lition squads or major forces. The enemy has flict maximum casualties on the attacking for- the advantage of deciding when, where, and ces. with what force he will attack. The defender (2) Barrier plans. Terrain features, some positions his forces and plans fires and move- of them obstacles in themselves, defended and ment to meet the widest possible range of con- tied in with obstacles provide an effective de- tingencies. The defender prepares plans, to in- fense. Canals and streams, for example, may clude counterattack plans; and he practices, be obstacles in base area defense. Fires cover evaluates, and revises them as necessary. all obstacles tied in with defensive positions. g. Maximum Use of Offensive(3) Action. Defense Since against swimmers and sabo- the mission of the base defense is to maintain teurs. Swimmers and saboteurs usually attack a secure base, the defender uses offensive ac- specific and important targets such as a boat, tion to the maximum to engage enemy forces communications center, supply point, or air- forward of the base area. On initial occupation craft. Host country civil police, military, and of the base site, friendly forces use offensive paramilitary forces supplement local security actions to destroy enemy forces in the imme- elements in defending against this threat. Cen- diate area. Once the defensive area is clear, a tralization of the equipment in one sector of small force continues offensive actions in de- the base area reduces the vulnerability and in- fending the base, thereby releasing other forces creases security.

AGO 20012A 107 S—isas® Defíeiras® Areas the entire defensive area. This method provides a. A base defense (fig. 8-1) contains a base excellent unity of command, but reduces the area, a forward defense area, and a recon- combat strength available to the brigade for naissance and surveillance area. Defense ele- offensive operations. ments in these areas vary in composition and (b) One company-size element from strength as the specific mission, capabilities of each battalion employed in each of three bat- enemy forces, terrain, location and size of the talion sectors. This method allows each bat- base area, and the strength and capabilities of talion commander to determine the forces and troops available dictate. weapons to remain behind and designates battalion sectors for each battalion when it is in the base area. Unity of command is not as Reconnaissance and good as in method (a) above, but it provides surveillance area more combat forces for offensive operations. (c) Support personnel and troops not Forward defense area actually engaged in combat and weapons not required for the combat mission defend the base. This method releases the greatest number Base of troops for offensive combat, but does not provide for combat troops to defend the base area. Organizing the base area into sectors and designating sector commanders who employ all units and troops in their sectors provide unity of command. Communications are necessary for each sector, and a base defense command and control center is required. (3) Reconnaissance and surveillance area. The reconnaissance and surveillance area ex- tends forward from the forward defense area to the limit of employment of security ele- Figure 8—1. Defensive areas—circular base defense. ments. These elements are far enough forward to provide timely warning of the enemy’s ap- (1) Base area. For both land and afloat .’proach; to deny the enemy direct fire into the bases, those individuals not employed in the re- base area; and, if possible, to deny the enemy connaissance and surveillance and forward de- observed mortar fire into the base area. Security fense areas are assigned positions and sectors elements also prevent unrestricted observation of responsibility within the base. In addition, of the base area and the undetected assembly all friendly forces in the surrounding area may of enemy forces within striking distance of the be considered as possible base reserve forces. base. The organization of the security elements Because the use of ambush tactics against re- provides an appropriate balance of available action forces outside the base is probable, the combined arms, supported by fires from at- cautious employment of reserve forces is neces- tached or supporting units. sary. (2) Forward defense area. Within this b. The base area tactical operations center area, defensive forces repel and destroy the (TOC) controls fire and maneuver and inte- enemy force and prevent its entering the base grates the two into an effective defense. Repre- sentatives from the artillery, tactical air, Army area or destroying the base. The forward de- aviation, and naval fire support elements and fense force requires defense capabilities com- host country and other friendly forces in the mensurate with enemy attack capabilities. For local area are present in a fire support coordi- a brigade-size base, defense forces in the for- nation center (FSCC). Also, U.S. liaison is ward defense area deploy in one of the follow- necessary with the host country sector opera- ing ways: tions and intelligence coordination center (a) One battalion(SOICC), frompreferably the brigade through for assigned U.S.

AGO 20012A advisors, and combat support coordination sary because of the population density in most center (CSCC). Close coordination is neces- riverine environments.

Section III. PLANNING AND ORGANIZING THE BASE DEFENSE

8-5. Planning the Base Defense (11) Use of mortars and artillery in an in- a. The fundamentals of defense are the bases direct as well as a direct fire role covering for planning the base defense. The normal de- avenues of approach. fense planning sequence provides steps in plan- d. On initial occupation of the base, the com- ning the base defense. The base commander mander devotes considerable combat power to considers the terrain and plans maximum use base defense. The attitude of civilians in the of available resources in accomplishment of immediate area; the proximity of cities and the assigned mission. Planners develop both towns ; the location of host country forces, the maneuver and the fire support plans con- both military and paramilitary; and intelli- currently and integrate them to insure maxi- gience indications of enemy activities are con- mum use of available resources. Defensive siderations to reduce the size of base defense planning is continuous. Contingency planning forces as the surrounding area becomes secure. and planning to implement alternate plans are Support forces housed in the base area provide concurrent with the preparation of the basic their own interior guard. plan. Plans are simple and flexible, and their execution depends on the size and capabilities 8-6. Frontage and Depth of forces present in the base area at any given Frontage and depth depend primarily on the time. size of the base and the security in the area. b. Commanders, assisted by their staffs, con- Larger frontages can be assigned when bases duct a detailed reconnaissance of the area on are established in a secure area. foot or by vehicle, boat, or air. On the basis of reconnaissance and other available informa- 8-7. Other Security Measures tion, they analyze the defensive area to deter- a. The base commander determines the ad- mine which canals, rivers, or wooded areas re- ditional security measures employed—electron- quire control. The defense covers all likely ave- ic surveillance devices, infrared equipment, nues of enemy approach. light intensification equipment, illuminants, c. The commander considers the following barbed wire, antipersonnel mines, and alarm defense measures: devices. When time permits and the land base (1) Use of aviation and reconnaissance is reasonably stable, commanders may order units to provide early warning. construction of a berm completely around the (2) Obstacles and barriers. main defensive line to prevent flat-trajectory (3) Defense against guerrillas, sabotage, fire from landing in the base area. Strongpoint infiltration, suicide demolition squads, and defensive positions are in the berm. swimmers. (4) Defense during reduced visibility. b. Safe lanes, provided in barriers, allow (5) Security or control of the civilian units to shift rapidly to meet threats. Com- population near the base area. manders consider the location of defensive po- (6) Defense against waterborne attacks. sitions and the effect that barriers have on the mobility of friendly forces, particularly in (7) Defense against mortar, recoilless the counterattack. Forward elements prepare, rifle, and rocket attacks. control, and fire exploding flame devices, flame (8) Use of weapons not required by units expedients, and illuminants to create obstacles. conducting operations away from the base area. 8-8. Control Measures (9) Use of support personnel not normally organized into combat operational units. Control measures used in defense of a base (10) Employmentarea are of tacticalthe same air as and those naval used in other de- fire support. fensive plans. The use of boundaries and eo-

AGO 20012A 109 ordination points establishes defensive sectors area and continues for the duration of the base. and fixes unit responsibilities. Adequate defense against attack is necessary during all stages of organization of the de- 8-9. Organizing the Base Defense fensive position. a. The commander in a riverine area may plan and conduct a movement to a base area, b. When units arrive on position, they im- conduct operations to secure the area, and es- mediately start preparing the base defense. tablish the defense of the base all at the same The base commander establishes priorities of time. The organization of the land or afloat tasks in preparation of the position. FM 7-11 base area begins as soon as troops arrive in the contains a recommended sequence of tasks.

Section IV. DEFENSE OF THE AFLOAT BASE

8-10. General c. The base commander and the Navy com- a. The afloat base area (fig. 8-2), must be mander jointly select the specific location of the relatively secure before the barracks ships ar- afloat base. Factors considered in selecting a rive. There must be sufficient room to moor base location include— the afloat base and provide suitable artillery (1) Proximity to the ara of operations positions for adequate fire support. (AO). (2) Relative security of the area, including proximity to friendly forces. Boat pat r°l / (8) Proximity to suitable sites for emplacement of barge-mounted or land-based artillery. (4) Proximity to an airstrip or suitable helicopter landing zone for parking transient Base aircraft and mounting airmobile reaction forces. (Afloat base For war d\ Reconnaissance (5) Sufficient room to moor the ships and anchorage! defenseland surveillance craft of the afloat base without impeding the area I area normal flow of host country commercial and military water traffic. (6) The effect of the local population on the deployment of an adequate defensive screen on the riverbanks and the employment of ef- Boat patrol fective defensive fires. d. Forces sent ahead initiate base security operations prior to the arrival of the afloat base. These operations include minesweeping of the anchorage, an initial sweep of the adjacent Figure 8-2. Afloat base defense. riverbanks, and initial measures to control civilian water traffic. b. The Navy commander provides support to e. When hydrographic conditions permit, the the afloat base commander in the defense by base periodically moves a few kilometers with- providing fire support and assisting in security in the selected anchorage area to present the measures taken against waterborne threats. enemy with a more difficult targeting problem The afloat base ships are subject to a variety for rocket, mortar, or recoilless rifle attack. of waterborne threats, such as swimmers using 8-11. Planning limpet-type mines, drifting contact mines, suicide attack boats, or boats loaded with explo- a. The afloat base is subject to a variety of sives. Boat patrols, integrated into the defense threats from both the water and the surround- plan, protect against waterborne threat. ing land areas.

110 AGO 20012A (1) Waterborne threats include swim- The habitual association of a reconnaissance mers, mines (command-detonated, contact, or unit with an RAS element provides a highly drifting), swimmers using limpet-type mines, effective force. suicide attack boats, boats loaded with explo- (10) Imposition of blackout or use of sives, and boats mounting large-caliber weap- lights to illuminate waterlines as a defense ons. against swimmers. (2) Threats from the surrounding land (11) Use of spotlights by patrol boats to areas include rockets, mortars, recoilless rifles, detect and identify water traffic. and automatic weapons, as well as sniper fire. c. Ship crews may require augmentation by b. In coordination withArmy the personnel Navy com-for sentries (watch Standers). mander, the afloat base commander, considers Special duties for all personnel embarked will the following factors in preparing the defen- be incorporated into the naval general quar- sive plan : ters plan (alert plan). Army personnel re- (1) Selection of defense forces, consid- ceive briefings on— ering the congestion of personnel aboard ship (1) The location of friendly ships and and vulnerability of the afloat base. craft. (2) Integration of all weapons of the (2) Locations of all Army personnel dur- Navy element into a coordinated fire support ing general quarters. plan. (3) Navy plans for darkening the ship (3) Use of surveillance equipment and and maintaining watertight integrity. countermortar radar. (4) Tide and water conditions, such as (4) Use of nets, booms, sonar, and other slack tides, periods of reduced visibility, and Navy equipment, if available. bad weather, that require imposition of strict (5) Enforcement of a river curfew; and security measures. during noncurfew hours, conduct of boat pa- (5) Detection and reaction plans against trols to control host country civilian and mili- swimmers and saboteurs. These plans provide tary traffic in the afloat base area and to de- specific instructions on the detection of swim- tect and destroy waterborne attacks. mers, the approach of indigenous craft, and (6) Formulation of contingency plans for the use of defensive measures, such as drop- use when tide, current, or weather have an ef- ping handgrenades over the sides at random fect on the defense of the afloat base or on and firing into floating debris. future operations. (6) Fire discipline and control proce- (7) Designation of reaction forces, both dures for individual and crew-served weapons. Army and Navy. d. The afloat base defense area is normally (8) Designation of a command ship divided into sectors, with the land sectors afloat, or a TOC ashore, to serve as the base (riverbanks) being defended or patrolled by defense control center. Army elements and the water sectors being (9) Employment of boat patrols to secure, patrolled by Navy elements. LOG. This mission requires joint forces to op- e. A joint defense operations center is or- erate on a continuing or periodic basis to ganized to coordinate and control the defense achieve and maintain dominance of designated of the afloat base. water routes. Army elements may operate /. Each ship of the afloat base is responsible either in conjunction with or attached to for close-in defense, to include sentries to Navy elements. For example, elements of the guard against swimmers or small boat attacks. division armored cavalry squadron and river g. An emergency relocation plan, prepared assault squadron (RAS) boats may conduct each anchorage, permits rapid relocation of continuing combat patrols on the waterways. the base if a significant threat develops.

Section V. DEFENSE AGAINST ENEMY MORTAR, ROCKET, AND RECOILLESS RIFLE ATTACK 8-12. General trate the base area perimeter in strength, a. When enemy forces are unable to pene- they may infiltrate mortars, rockets, and re-

AGO 20012A 111 coilless weapons into preplanned and prepared available when deciding whether to employ an positions within range of the base. The en- airborne observer. emy prepares plans to place a large volume of b. Countermortar radar scans the most surprise fire on the base area to inflict heavy likely direction of attack. Defense plans in- casualties and destroy equipment. When exe- clude preplanned fires for likely enemy firing cuted, these attacks normally last from 10 to positions, coordinated with countermortar ra- 20 minutes, with a large number of rounds dar operations. Artillery and mortar units being fired. The weapons are normally exfil- execute these preplanned fires as soon as an trated from the area when the mission is com- attack begins. When radar positively locates plete or when friendly forces locate and fire enemy firing positions, commanders employ on the enemy position. all available fires against them. b. The commander prepares a plan for ag- c. The commander plans the use of reaction gressive action to detect the infiltration of forces, lifted into the area by helicopter or weapons and to locate firing positions. When other available transportation to cut off the formulating the plan for defense against en- retreat of the enemy, in preparing defense emy mortar, rocket, and recoilless rifles, the plans. The reaction force avoids establishing commander considers possible firing positions, a pattern, such as always using the same land- intelligence reports, indigenous personnel re- ing zone (LZ). If the enemy is aware of a ports, and resources available to him for im- pattern or if he can predict LZ, he may plan plementation of the plan. He plans aggressive an ambush to destroy the reaction force. action to locate and destroy the enemy and passive actions to reduce casualties and dam- S-M. Passive Deiemise Measures age. The best defense against these attacks is a. Defense plans include passive defense to make them so costly in execution that the measures within the base area. In addition, enemy considers them unworthwhile. an effective psychological warfare and civic c. Since the establishment and mainte- action program attempts to insure civilian co- nance of a restricted area around the base operation. Established procedures insure eval- area is not always possible, aggressive counter- uation of all sentry or intelligence reports in- mortar and recoilless rifle fire plans are nec- dicating an attack. Preparation of positions, essary. Intensive patrolling within the secu- movement of weapons or ammunition, un- rity area is effective in detecting infiltration. usual actions or movement of the civilian These combat patrols operate in conjunction population, and reports by indigenous person- with the outpost line. They change positions nel may be indications of enemy attack. each night to prevent the enemy’s planning b. Passive defense measures include— or preparing firing positions within range of (1) Dispersing personnel and valuable the base area. The selection of patrol sectors equipment, such as aircraft or boats. and outpost location does not establish a (2) Constructing revetments around recognizable pattern. parking, docking, or storage areas. (3) Constructing primary and alternate ©—113. Aeffóve (Defecnse ¡MesisOTes positions. (4) Preparing individual protective em- a. An airborne observerplacements. is one of the best active defense measures against enemy mor- (5) Varying placement of sentries; ran- tar, rocket, or recoilless rifle attack. Army ob- dom use of patrols on foot or by vehicle or servation aircraft, armed helicopters, or Air boats, incorporated with the use of scout dogs. Force planes orbit the base area checking (6) Employing positive screening and likely or suspected positions and noticeable search procedures for personnel entering or changes in the terrain. When a position is exiting the base area. discovered, they take action against the po- (7) Maintaining proper radio and tele- sition, adjusting artillery or using their own phone procedures. weapons against it. The base commander (8) Controlling the movement of vehi- evaluates the threat in relation to aircraft cles, boats, and personnel.

AGO 20012A (9) Making periodic relocation within (10) Using an aircraft for radio retrans- the general area. mission when antenna systems are inoperative.

AGO 20012A 113 i

CHAPTER 9 CIVIL AFFAIRS

Section I. GENERAL 9-1. Civil Affairs Operations effort. These psychological operations (PSY- a. Civil affairs is a command responsibility. OP) involve all forms of propaganda to in- Civil affairs operations obtain essential civi- fluence the behavior of neutral or friendly lian cooperation and support or reduce civilian groups and to support civil affairs programs interference with the attainment of the mili- designed to gain their support. Mostly, the tary objective. These operations influence the individual soldier’s participation in this area relationship between the military forces and falls under the heading of civil-military re- the civil authorities and people. Civil affairs lations—another improtant aspect of civil af- operations may require military forces to per- fairs. form some or all functions that the government normally performs. See FM 31-23, FM 9-2. Civil-Military Relations 41-5, and FM 41-10. a. Any military organization stationed b. Military civic action is a major activity within or in proximity to a civilian populace of the civil affairs effort in a riverine environ- exerts influence on it. This influence contri- ment. Military or paramilitary forces use butes to the attainment of political and mili- their military skills, equipment, and resources tary goals or detracts from it in almost direct 4 in economic and sociological projects that are proportion to the success or failure of the ci- useful to the local population at all levels. vil-military relations program that military Projects may be in such fields as education, commanders institute. Civil-military relations training, public works, agriculture, transpor- become more critical when military forces are tation, communications, health, and sanita- in foreign lands at the invitation of a host tion. Military civic action programs are per- country. formed in cooperation with or in behalf of b. Civil affairs operations are an important host country civil authorities. military factor in areas with a rural agrarian c. Populace and resources controls are ma- society and include both personal and organi- jor activities of the civil affairs effort. These zational contacts. Development and stabiliza- two related civil affairs operational programs tion of agricultural and fishing areas, which exist concurrently, separately, or in mutual may be the economic base of the entire coun- support of each other. Populace controls are try, are absolutely essential. The securing of measures that the civil or military authority land or air routes, in addition to water routes institutes to mobilize human resources for the obstructed by hostilities, for transportation of government and to deny these resources to rice or other agriculture products to market, the enemy. Resources controls are measures becomes important to the local population to identify those material items required by which depends on income from sale of such the enemy and to deny their diversion to the products. The totality of civil-military rela- enemy, or to deny his acquisition thereof. tions, therefore, directly impacts on opera- These controls have overlapping effects. tions and affects courses of action that the d. Consolidation psychological operations commander consider. FM 41-10 provides de- are of major importance to the civil affairs tailed information on the most important as-

114 AGO 20012A € pects of a well-integrated civil affairs pro- applicable to internal defense and internal gram. Succeeding sections contain guidance development in riverine areas.

Section II. MILITARY CIVIC ACTION

9-3. Purpose 9-5. Concept During division operations, brigades and bat- In the base area, military civic action plan- talions participating in military civic action ning emphasizes assistance, guidance, and ini- contribute to the economic and social develop- tiation of self-help programs possible with ment of the population. This contribution is available resources. Advisors and local offi- to improve the environment and the standing cials coordinate all military civic actions to of host country and allied armed forces in the obtain approval prior to implementation. The area and to win the cooperation of the local brigade or battalion civil affairs officer co- inhabitants. ordinates with the division G5 for approval of projects. In independent operations, the 9—4. Coordination and Direction brigade or battalion civil affairs officer coor- a. Whether the activities are centrally di- dinates with the civilian or military equiva- rected or voluntary, the goals are similar. lent agency—diplomatic mission, AID repre- Military civic action activities are coordinated sentative, and international or multinational among all staff sections, as well as with nonprofit organizations. He also determines other action agencies (Agency for Interna- the availability of specialists, teams, or in- tional Development (AID), U.S. military ad- dividuals with appropriate technical skills visors, and local political and military offi- from civil affairs, engineer, medical, mainte- cials), to avoid duplication of effort and pre- nance, transportation, signal, and aviation vent depletion of resources on projects that do units. Considerations in designing a successful not contribute to the overall objective. This military civic action program follow: coordination insures most efficient use of a. The political, economic, and sociological skills, labor, supplies, equipment, and funds background of the people. involved and the continuation of programs. b. The establishment of priorities for the b. Directed activities usually involve spe- most critical projects, considering national in- cific assignments, central funding, and author- ternal development plans. ization to use military resources. These ac- c. The capabilities of the brigades and bat- tivities in riverine operations are usually in talions, technical skills available, time, and the vicinity of base areas. available equipment^ c. Voluntary activities take place in both d. The desires of the local population. base areas and operational areas. They follow e. The availability of local labor. Local general guidelines from higher headquarters people provide labor for projects as much as and the host government. These activities re- possible. Benefits decrease when too few quire greater initiative and resourcefulness at people are in the area or when U.S. troops do the lower unit level than the directed activ- all or most of the work. Timing of projects ities. The major effort is toward encouraging, is extremely important. Local workmen may guiding, and supporting self-help programs. not be enthusiastic about building a new Directives to subordinate units encourage school during the harvest or planting season. such activities, provide program guidelines, /. The majority of the people benefit from and authorize the use of equipment and fa- the projects. cilities for these purposes. Motivation of the g. A willingness to accept responsibility for local military or paramilitary forces to assist project maintenance after completion of the in civic action is easier if the living conditions project. This requires coordination with host of local forces and their dependents improve, country forces in the area. either prior to or concurrently with projects h. The fact that projects do not assist for the civilian population. citizens of questionable loyalty to achieve a

AGO 20012A 115 higher living standard or political status than (3) Distribution of candy, tobacco, cook- loyal citizens. ing oil, and school and sewing supplies. i. An understanding by both local people (4) Minor repair to community build- and U.S. personnel of the basic reasoning be- ings, dispensaries, schools, and churches or hind projects. Projects to develop a clean temples. water supply may fail if the people do not (5) Minor repairs to roads, canals, realize the need for clean water. If the local bridges, dikes, culverts, and drainage systems. people do not understand that rats carry dis- (6) Sanitation projects—clearing ditches ease, then they have no interest in rodent con- and insect and rodent control. trol. (See FM 41-10 for types of projects and k. The possibility of longer range projects types of units that logically can accomplish in the area surrounding the base, which, be- them.) cause of the permanency of the base, can contribute to civic development. j. The necessary exercise of caution to avoid l. Opportunities, in both short- and long- becoming involved with longe-range projects, duration projects, for education and training especially those in which U.S. units are sole of local people in technical and nontechnical sponsors. Priority is given to short range or areas. immediate impact civic action projects, such m. The psychological and intelligence bene- as— fits to be gained from providing language (1) Medical and dental treatment. training to U.S. personnel engaged in civic (2) Distribution of relief supplies. action projects. Sseflooire III. IP©IPUILÂ€i AMD KESOyiCiS COMT« IMk Cotra^epiff signed or supporting military and civil police Host country agencies conduct populace and resources is essential. The control necessary, resources control programs. U.S. units nor- the identification of type and number of mally assist host country government agencies people and resources to be controlled, the limitation of authority, and the desire of local in these programs. U.S. participation ranges authorities to establish necessary controls are from minor support in the area of operations the bases for brigade and battalion planning. (AO) to complete control in a base area. Operation orders contain a civil affairs annex These controls are extremely difficult for U.S. to prescribe populace and resources control personnel to impose. Commanders maintain measures. Host country authorities provide in- the framework and authority of the local gov- formation on the populace and resources con- ernment, when possible, to avoid alienating trol plan as well as information or policy on the population. U.S. troops assist local author- confiscation and disposition of commodities ities when they are in danger of losing con- such as salt, medical supplies, and chemicals trol and host country military forces are not of an explosive nature. available or are ineffective. Populace and re- b. U.S. programs attempt to isolate the en- sources controls assist base security and of- emy from the population and resources in the fensive operations. Populace and resources AO or a base area and assist in mobilizing controls are part of both the internal defense those assets for the host country government. and internal development programs and assist The specific objectives of populace and re- in the achievement of host country national sources control are— objectives. (1) To deny the enemy support from the local population... ^—7. PlsamnniDiragi amd Díreelfemí (2) To detect and neutralize the enemy a. Unit civil affairs staff officers (G5/S5) infrastructure and activities in the base area accomplish planning and staff supervision for and the AO. those aspects of populace and resources con- (3) To assist in the provision of a secure trol for which the divisional units may have physical and psychological environment for responsibility. Close coordination with as- the population. m AGO 20012A (4) To assista housein mobilizing or a concentration material andof sewing machines. human resources on behalf of the government. Caution should be exercised because the med- c. The control imposed on the population icine may be insulin required by a diabetic or depends on their cooperation in the base area the concentration of sewing machines may be or AO. Imposing rigid controls on a village a licensed tailor shop. that collaborates with the enemy may be necessary. The control measures established are a 9-8. Execution of Populace and Resources joint military/civilian effort and may in- Control Measures clude— a. The populace and resources control as- (1) Checkpoint and patrol operations. pects of base security and offensive operations (2) Search operations in populated areas. are important. Although the use of local gov- (3) Surveillance of populated areas. ernment personnel, with U.S. Forces as a re- (4) Detention of enemy sympathizers or serve, to enforce populace and resources con- village militia. trol measures is desirable, the host country (5) Prevention of illegal political meet- may not be able to provide enough qualified ings and rallies. personnel to accompany U.S. units conducting (6) Registration and documentation of operations. Agreements establishing limits of all civilians, vessels, and vehicles. U.S. detention authority are made locally. (7) Inspection of individual identifica- b. When conducting checkpoint operations, tion documents, permits, and passes. the commander considers the following: (8) Restrictions on public and private (1) Checkpoint operations are normally land and water transportation and communi- used to control civilian movements, to confiscation means. cate illegal goods, to apprehend enemy sym- (9) Curfew. pathizers, and to check the adequacy of such (10) Censorship. other controls as identification passes and (11) Control of production, storage, and travel and fishing permits. U.S. Forces train distribution of food and protection for food- and rehearse the establishment of surprise producing areas. checkpoints. Host country military or civil po- (12) Control of the possession of arms, lice representatives, when available, search and ammunition, demolitions, drugs, and medi- inspect. cine. (2) Normally, units establish checkpoints (13) Evacuation of areas when required. where there is sufficient space to assemble peo- d. U.S. troops normally require special ple under guard and to moor boats and park training to recognize or identify contraband vehicles for search and investigation. Sufficient and controlled or critical items. Brigade and troops are near the checkpoint to apprehend battalion forces screening an area or manning vehicles, boats, and individuals attempting to checkpoints require the ability to identify a avoid the checkpoint and to provide fire sup- variety of critical items. An extensive list of port. Local security elements are necessary to chemicals, medicines, fertilizers, machines, protect the checkpoint. and equipment may be subject to government (3) Processing of individuals, vehicles, regulation, for example— and boats at the checkpoint is as rapid and (1) Potassium chlorate and arsenic sul- efficient as possible. Personnel conducting phide, when combined, form an explosive. Ci- searches are impersonal, but thorough. vilians possessing such combinations are sus- c. Search operations are conducted to search pect. watercraft and inhabited areas ; apprehend (2) Blacksmith equipment or a concen- enemy personnel; and seize illegal arms, com- tration of machinery and medicines may ap- munication means, medicines, and other con- pear harmless. However, this material alerts trolled items. U.S. personnel to the possibility that there d. In rich food-producing areas, depriving en- may be a well-camouflaged enemy base in the emy forces of food is difficult. Offensive opera- area. tions may uncover large stores of rice or salt. (3) Unusual amounts of medicine found in Unwarranted destruction of these commodi-

AGO 20012A 117 ties, though it deprives enemy forces of food, devices to satisfy immediate family needs. En- could alienate many civilians and make them emy forces may exploit the fishermen, much enemy sympathizers. like the farmers, to supply a portion of their (1) When possible, units transport rice basic food needs. Plans for surveying food and salt to areas under friendly control. These items in the AO include control of the fish commodities are available for refugees or dis- harvest. On discovery of bulk supplies of fish placed persons or for a civic action food pro- or fish products in enemy areas, U.S. units gram in areas where food is scarce. normally move these supplies to areas under (2) Ponchos or canvas placed in cargo friendly control. Investigation of these supplies beds of vehicles, boats, and aircraft prevent is thorough to insure that their removal does bulk rice and salt from dropping through not cause hunger or hardship among civilians crevices into moving parts. Rice and salt are remaining in the area. Fishing operations in kept covered during transport to prevent wa- contested or neutral areas pose other significant ter damage. civil affairs problems that U.S. units recognize (3) If rice and salt cannot be moved and and deal with appropriately. must be destroyed, spoilage kits are available. (1) Curfew hours must be realistic. Fish- Local host country governmental and military ing operations normally require a fisherman officials determine disposition. The following to depart in early morning hours to reach the are some effective methods of destruction: best fishing areas. Such things as tide and (a) Spreading on the ground and wet- tide tables also are considered. Ignoring these ting down with water. considerations may force a fisherman to choose (b) Chemical burning with JP-4 diesel between a reduced harvest or violating the cur- fuel. few. (c) Burning, using tar to ignite. (2) Distinguishing between a legitimate (d) Dumping in rivers, streams, or fishing operation and a military movement dis- wells. guised as a fishing operation is difficult. In re- (e) Using charges or available hand- mote or fringe areas where establishment of tools to scatter over a large area. checkpoints is difficult, waterborne forces may (4) Large stores of rice and salt are not control the movement of fishing craft. Air sur- always an indication that the local population veillance provides an excellent means of check- is supporting enemy forces. Local government ing the flow of traffic ; but, with the exception officials inform U.S. units of the amount of rice of amphibious aircraft, physical examination authorized per person per family. The con- of the watercraft is not possible. Use of air fiscation of rice and salt from a family may surveillance and waterborne forces jointly pro- deprive some enemy forces of food, but may vides an ideal solution. also alienate a great many civilians and make (3) The enemy may force fishermen to them enemy sympathizers. transport enemy forces and materiel. Unarmed (5) The movement of large stores of cap- vessels are defenseless against this impress- tured rice from the combat area is usually a ment and unfortunately will, in most cases, be difficult operation for the tactical unit, and treated as enemy when apprehended. Claims usually conflicts with their primary mission. of impressed service by the apprehended fish- Therefore, high headquarters must be prepared ermen warrant detailed investigation. In all to make a timely decision on whether to con- cases, local government officials determine guilt tinue with the tactical operation or whether to or innocence. degrade it by expending the manpower and logistical resources for the movement of the 9-9. Control of Refugees, Evacuees, and rice. Displaced Persons e. In riverine areas, fishing normally is the a. When preparing plans, commanders con- chief livelihood for a number of people. Fishing sider evacuees, displaced persons, and refugees operations may range from organized business- as one group. Host country officials, U.S. ad- es employing small fleets, processing areas, visors, and representatives of U.S. agencies markets, and other facilities to single units or such as AID have responsibilities in this area

118 AGO 20012A and prepare plans to solve problems, to include of greatest congestion to care for the refugees’ the logistical support required to handle dis- immediate needs. placed persons (e.g., transportation, food, shel- (5) Coordination with local and national ter, sanitation, and water). If other officials agencies in the area to expedite movement and or agencies are not present or are not able to facilitate assumption of responsibility by host handle a situation, U.S. commanders assist in country agencies. handling refugees or assume control. f. Planning considerations include the fol- b. The commander makes every effort to plan lowing : and conduct tactical operations so that civilians (1) Control point locations require ade- unavoidably involved in the operational area quate turnaround room for boats or vehicles. will react favorably. Their treatment during (2) Providing transportation for refugee initial contact with friendly forces may well movement may require that local government decide their final allegiance. A well-planned, representatives commandeer boats and vehicles. well-coordinated, business-like manner is nec- Returning assault boats and helicopter lifts essary when administrating to the needs of may assist in refugee movement. refugees. Humane, just, and efficient handling (3) Local police, assisted by U.S. military of refugees, evacuees and displaced persons im- police, provide traffic escort, direction, and proves the cooperation and rapport between guards. Tactical units positioned along routes the local people and the host country and U.S. may assist police elements. Forces. (4) Knowledge of the size and construc- c. Five major steps involved in the care and tion of camps required for refugee temporary handling of civilians in large numbers are— occupation is necessary. (1) Collection to facilitate control. (5) The selection of sites for refugee (2) Assembly in a specific area. camps near water, food supplies, and power, (3) Evacuation from the operational area. if possible, is necessary. Within each camp, sep- (4) Provision of minimum essential hous- arate facilities are necessary for— ing, food, clothing, and medical treatment. {a) Different nationalities or ethnic (5) Return to or resettlement in their groups. home areas when operations end. (i>) Family groups. d. The advantages of establishing refugee (c) Unattached males. centers are— (d) Unattached females. (1) Provision of an opportunity to friend- (

AGO 20012A 119 camp officials exploit the propaganda aspects (d) Reincorporation of ralliers and de- of information provided within the camp. fectors into the friendly society. ÊÊ (11) Liaison with other interested agen- (e) Employment of ralliers and defec- * cies (AID, military assistance advisory group tors against enemy forces. (MAAG), International Volunteer Serivces, (2) Propaganda is generally more con- and host country military and governmental structive in amnesty programs than in tactical personnel) is paramount in refugee operations. operations. It usually explains the national U.S. advisors provide liaison when they are cause in detail. Themes employed are usually present in the area. of a benevolent nature. Coordination between g. The host country may have an amnesty U.S. PSYOP efforts and the host country’s am- program. U.S. troops must become familiar nesty program is necessary. U.S. troops con- with the mission and objectives of the program trolling refugees and captured suspects require and provide cognizance to persons voluntarily familiarity with the recognition signals of ral- returning to host country control. liers or defectors. Since the host country often rewards ralliers and defectors for the turn-in (1) Host country amnesty programs con- of weapons, their weapons are kept separate sist of— from other captured weapons. Expeditious (a) Propaganda. handling and delivery of ralliers and defectors (ft) Collection of ralliers and defectors, and their weapons to the host country agency (c) Eresponsibleducation and for redirectionthe amnesty of program the are es- ralliers and defectors. sential. Seeîô@ini OV. CONSOdiDATIOIMl ’SYaKfâtLOGOCM OPERÂTOONS

©-H©. [PwpQse Ç-lï'. PÜŒiiwiiiinig eaindl ©©roeepî a. Civil affairs operations assist in the in- a. The G3/S3 has staff responsibility for tac- telligent handling of military contacts with tical PSYOP. The G5/S5 has staff responsibil- civilians to help the commander accomplish his ity for consolidation PSYOP. The G5/S5 co- mission. These operations are most successful ordinates with G3/S3 on assignment and use of when supported by consolidation PSYOP di- PSYOP units and personnel, and with G2/S2 rected toward civilians located in the unit area on intelligence support requirements. PSYOP of responsibility. staff and units advise commanders concerning b. Consolidation PSYOP direct propaganda the psychological implications of proposed cour- toward neutral or friendly populations to pro- ses of action. They use organic U.S. and host mote maximum cooperation and cohesion among country personnel and equipment to produce various factions. Tactical PSYOP generally di- and disseminate propaganda in support of se- rect propaganda toward enemy target audien- lected courses of action. ces and neutral or friendly audiences under b. Planners consider such current factors as enemy control to assist in the achievement of general attitudes and morale, information tactical objectives. media available, and qualified technicians avail- c. A commander uses consolidation PSYOP able. Evaluation of the effectiveness of past to attain civil affairs objectives just as he uses PSYOP and civil affairs operations is continu- firepower to support a plan of maneuver. De- ous and critical. Planners at division, brigade, tailed doctrine for the support of civil affairs and battalion integrate and coordinate their objectives by PSYOP is contained in FM 31- separate programs to emphasize the effects of 23 and FM 41-10. FM 33-1 and FM 33-5 con- the programs on various target audiences. tain PSYOP doctrine and techniques. Seeiforc' V. ©©íVlMONIYY ETIONS AMD OTOiR SPiCOAIL

©-Í2. [Pwpaiss eairsd ©@iniee[ptt to a civil population, the commanders must de- a. When the U.S. force must operate close velop and implement a comprehensive civil- i AGO 20012A military relations program. The effects of poor coordination precedes troop saturation of the civil-military relations may go beyond the local area. Wage increases may be in order when community and have far-reaching implications. the economic level rises; however, they require Good relations promote better understanding coordination with other aspects of the economy. between civil and military elements and en- The establishment of labor and wage control courage cooperation between the two groups. boards requires further assistance from local b. Without properly oriented troops and government officials. Host country officials, units and a good civil-military relations pro- when possible, process laborers, perform secur- gram, “cultural shock” may occur among both ity checks, make payment, and process com- the U.S. troops and the local population. Im- plaints. pressions formed at the time of U.S. entry are c. Perhaps the largest single problem is the the strongest. A lack of consideration by U.S. supply of potable water in a riverine area. troops for the social and economic environment The local people have their own traditional may alienate the people and upset any balance methods of sustaining their needs. Storing or stability that exists in an area. water in large crocks, for example, provides c. The individual soldier receives area-orien- breeding places for malaria-bearing mosqui- tation through area study, troop information, toes. This method does not meet U.S. sanita- and preparatory training for the specific area. tion standards. U.S. Forces do not use water A basic list of “do’s” and “donTs” based on from such sources. Army units can improve knowledge of the cultural, religious, economic, community relations by helping inhabitants and political aspects of the area provides in- find new and better sources of potable water formation for troop use. Most items listed are if time and equipment are available. commonsense matters ; however, presenting d. The commander distributes fair price them formally achieves uniformity and con- lists, based on the economy of the immediate formity. FM 31-73 contains detailed informa- and surrounding communities, and requires tion on this subject. strict adherence to them. e. Units and individuals purchase comfort 9-13. Planning, Direction, and Coordination and area improvement items from the local Civil-military relations are considerations in economy, such as: the initial stages of entry into foreign lands (1) Ice, which usually requires transporta- and throughout all subsequent operations. In tion from the larger cities. This item can be addition to the usual considerations, civil af- the source of employment for many people. fairs staff officers, in their planning, coordinate Civil affairs officers consider establishment of with appropriate staff sections and consider the an icemaking plant in the civic development following in their initial assessments and esti- plan as a-self-help, civic action project in base mates: areas. (2) Perishable items of food, fresh veget- a. Civic development and coordination ables, eggs, and bread. These items also provide groups, established with representatives of opportunity for increased employment, indus- United States, local government, military, and try, and agricultural development. police, promote proper understanding of local (3) Lumber, cement, sand, cement blocks, laws, policies, U.S. regulations and restric- bricks, tin roofing, pipe, and plumbing hard- tions, and security measures and adherence to ware are construction materials that may have them. They also settle claims and handle civil- been introduced into the area by AID. ian personnel in both the base area and the (4) Barber, tailor, and laundry shops, AO. planned and controlled through proper coordi- b. The procurement of local labor, properly nation with local officials and U.S. Forces, are screened for security and loyalty, is desirable necessary. to free combat troops for operational duties. (5) Souvenirs become popular market The wages established, after valid investiga- items for U.S. troops. Unless controlled, the tion and consultation with local government demand and the chance of quick monetary re- officials and their military and civilian advisors, turns may lure farmers and craftsmen from are in accordance with local wage scales. This their necessary trades.

AGO 20012A 121 9-14. Civil Affairs Operations on Initial items on a first-come-first-served basis. The lo- Entry cal civilians, because of the large requirements From the standpoint of civil-military relations, of the U.S. units, may not be able to purchase the establishment of bases, both permanent these everyday commodities. The district chief and tactical, in stability operations presents informs local merchants not to sell these items problems for the commander. These problems to U.S. troops until the merchants can stock a are not insurmountable; appropriate solutions sufficient quantity to meet both civilian and are available through imagination and enthus- U.S. military needs. iasm by the commander and his staff, especial- c. Semipermanent Base Camps. ly the commander’s civil affairs staff officer. (1) The civil affairs officer initially recog- nizes civil-military relation problems, such as a. Types of Base Camps. There are basically establishing price lists and interpreting curfew two types of base camps: brigade and larger regulations. semipermanent camps and battalion combat (2) The initial civic action endeavor pro- bases. vides immediate impact on the population and b. Establishment of Camps. Generally, base paves the way for the U.S. troops. Medical camps are in populated areas and certain gen- civic action programs with concurrent use of eral remarks apply regardless of the size of PSYOP to explain the U.S. presence are ex- the camp. amples. (1) Normally, a battalion operating in a (3) On establishment of the camp, subor- base camp away from the division base coordi- dinate units assume civil affairs responsibili- nates with a district chief through his U.S. ties, on a recurring basis, for the hamlets con- military advisor, unless the battalion is located tiguous to the base camp. This insures con- contiguous to a province headquarters. The tinuity of effort in the civic action program. brigade controlling the operation normally coordinates directly with the province chief d. Battalion Combat Base. through the province senior U.S. advisor. (1) The civil-military relations problem in (2) In any base camp, the decision as to establishing combat bases is the same as that whether to employ civilian labor rests with in establishing a large semipermanent camp, the commander. The local commander and the but is of a lesser magnitude. PSYOP are es- province or district chief agree on acceptable sential, especially in areas with little or no wages when the unit employs civilian labor. local government influence to explain U.S. The wage must not contribute to inflation or presence in the area. provide unfair competition to other employers. (2) The actual area selected for the base The commander of a large base employing hun- camp is chosen with consideration to prevent dreds of civilian laborers each day may con- crop damage. sider temporarily altering labor hire during the e. Checklist for Civil Affairs on Initial En- harvest season to prevent interference with try. local seasonal employers. (1) This checklist is adaptable for use by (3) Units survey and identify arts, monu- civil affairs personnel who are inaugurating ments, and archives before moving into a new civil affairs/civic action in a new area. They area to prevent possible damage. Troops, are aware that the military requirements of through command guidance, receive instruction the situation may prevent the accomplishment in identification and protection of these items. of any or all of the subsequent actions. This (4) Price control and a form of rationing checklist contains two sections: one for the are important aspects of civil-military rela- province and one for the district. tions. Normally, a district chief will be happy (a) Province. to prepare a price list, which, if agreed to by 1. Introduction, offering of support, the U.S. commander, becomes binding on the and mutual declaration of problem areas. merchants. The published price list informs 2. Determination of current political all troops of the established prices in the dis- boundaries. trict. Items such as soft drinks, beer, and ice 3. Current hamlet status report. require rationing because merchants sell these -4. Refugees:

122 AGO Ü0012A (a) What local food stocks are on 3. Determination of civil information hand to support refugees, and where are they media available in the district. located? How can food stocks be obtained? A. Determination of amount of rice (b) Are medical supplies, cloth- authorized each family. ing, and related items available? 5. Price control: (c) Where are the refugee centers, (a) Determination of current and what are their capacities? prices. 5. Labor: (b) Determination of whether there (a) What type of labor is available are items in short supply that the commander in the area (skilled, semiskilled, unskilled) ? will prevent U.S. troops from purchasing. (b) What is the availability of la- (c) Ascertaining whether local borers in the categories listed above? leaders can provide assistance in stabilizing (c) Can the province and the com- prices. mand reach an agreement on the number of 6. Determination of whether farming laborers available for hire with an appropriate or other activities will interfere with military wage scale? operations. (b) District. (2) This checklist is merely a guide for 1. Identification of local arts, monu- civil affairs officers to follow in establishing ments, and archives to safeguard from possible civil-military relations in a new area. It es- damage or desecration. tablishes the fundamentals, which, when added 2. Determination of curfew exemption to rapport among U.S. military, U.S. advisors, and travel exemptions for indigenous popula- and indigenous officials, are the initial steps tion. Publication of curfew and travel exemp- toward success in establishing a unit in an tions for U.S. troops. area.

AGO 20012A 123 APPENDIX A

REFERENCES

AR 320-5 Dictionary of United States Army Terms AR 320-50 Authorized Abbreviations and Brevity Codes FM 1-100 Army Aviation Utilization FM 5-25 Explosives and Demolitions FM 6-20-1 Field Artillery Tactics FM 6-20-2 Field Artillery Techniques FM 6-40 Field Artillery Cannon Gunnery FM 6-140 Field Artillery Cannon Battalions and Batteries FM 7-11 Rifle Company, Infantry, Airborne, and Mechanized FM 7-15 Rifle Platoon and Squads Infantry, Airborne, and Mechanized FM 7-20 Infantry, Airborne Infantry, and Mechanized Infantry Battalions FM 7-30 Infantry, Airborne, and Mechanized Division Brigades FM 11-50 Signal Battalion, Armored Infantry, and Infantry Mechanized Divi- sions FM 17-1 Armor Operations FM 17-15 '* Tank Units, Platoon, Company, and Battalion FM 17-36 Divisional Armored and Air Calvary Units FM 19-25 Military Police Traffic Control FM 19-40 Enemy Prisoners of War and Civilian Internees FM 20-22 Vehicle Recovery Operations FM 21-11 First Aid for Soldiers FM 21-50 Ranger Training and Ranger Operations FM 21-75 Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling FM 21-76 Survival, Evasion and Escape (S) FM 21-77A Joint Worldwide Evasion and Escape Manual (U) FM 30-5 Combat Intelligence FM 30-9 Military Intelligence Battalion, Field Army FM 30-10 Terrain Intelligence (C) FM 30-10A Special Applications of Terrain Intelligence (U) FM 30-15 Intelligence Interrogation FM 30-16 Technical Intelligence FM 30-17 Counterintelligence Operations (C) FM 30-17A Counterintelligence Special Operation (U) (S) FM 30-18 Intelligence Collection Operations, Intelligence Corps, U.S. Army (U) (CM) FM 30-31 Stability Operations—Intelligence (U) (S) FM 30-31A Stability Operations—Intelligence Collection (U) FM 31-11 Doctrine for Amphibious Operations FM 31-12 Army Forces in Amphibious Operations (The Landing Force) FM 31-16 Counterguerrilla Operations FM 31-23 Stability Operations, U.S. Army Doctrine FM 31-30 Jungle Training and Operations

124 AGO 20012A (C) FM 31-40 Tactical Cover and Deception (U) FM 31-73 Advisor Handbook for Stability Operations (C) FM 32-5 Signal Security (SIGSEC) (U) (S) FM 32-10 United States Army Security Agency in Support of a Field Army (U) (C) FM 32-20 Electronic Warfare (Ground Based) (U) (S) FM 32-20A Electronic Warfare (Ground Based) (U) FM 33-1 Psychological Operations—U.S. Army Doctrine FM 33-5 Psychological Operations—Techniques and Procedures FM 41-5 Joint Manual for Civil Affiairs FM 41-10 Civil Affairs Operations FM 54-2 The Division Support Command FM 54-3 The Field Army Support Command FM 54-4 The Support Brigade FM 57-1 U.S. Army/U.S. Air Force Doctrine for Airborne Operations FM 57-35 Airmobile Operations FM 61-100 The Division FM 100-27 U.S. Army/U.S. Air Force Doctrine for Tactical Airlift Operations TC 3-16 Employment of Riot Control Agents, Flame, Smoke and Herbicides in Counterguerrilla Operations TM 5-700 Field Water Supply JCS Pub. 1 Dictionary of United States Military Terms for Joint Usage JCS Pub. 2 Unified Action Armed Forces (UNAAF)

125 AGO 20012A i

APPENDIX B

REFERENCE DATA

This appendix contains a description of vehicles, craft, and equipment usable in a riverine environment. The vehicles and craft represented are not all that are available for use, but are representative of those in the current inventory of the U.S. Services, those used by host country forces in Vietnam, and those in the prototype stage. Section I. NAVY RIVERINE EQUIPMENT AND CHARACTERISTICS B-l. River Flotilla Equipment (2) Patrol craft, escort (PCE). a. River Support Squadron. (3) Patrol motor gunboat (PGM). (1) Self-propelled barracks ship (APB). (4) Landing ship, support, large (LSSL). (2) Barracks ship (nonself-propelled) (5) Landing ship, infantry, large (LSIL). (APL.) (6) Landing ship, medium (LSM). (3) Landing craft repair ship (ARL). (7) Minesweeper, coastal (MSC). (4) Tank landing ship (LST)—542 class. b. Craft. (5) Tank landing ship (LST)—1156 class. (1) Landing craft, utility (LCU). (6) Large harbor tug (YTB). (2) Landing craft, mechanized (LCM(8)). (7) Net laying ship (AN). (3) Landing craft, vehicle/personnel (LC- b. River Assaidt Squadron. VP). (1) Armored troop carrier (ATC). (4) Landing craft, vehicle/personnel (2) Refueler. (armored) (LCVP(A)). (3) Command and control boat (CCB). (5) Landing craft, personnel, ramped (4) Monitor. (LCP(R)). (5) Assault support patrol boat (ASPB). (6) Landing craft, mechanized, armored (LCM(A) ). B-2. Other Navy Equipment (7) Commandament. a. Ships. (8) Monitor. (1) Inshore fire support ship (IFS). (9) FOM/STCAN. (2) Landing ship, medium, rocket (LS- (10) River patrol craft (RPC). MR). (11) Command junk. b. Craft. (1) Patrol boat, river (PBR). B-4. Descriptive Data (2) Patrol craft, fast (swift) (PCF). a. Self-Propelled Barracks Ship (3) Inflatable boat, small (IBS). (1) General characteristics. A converted (4) Minesweeping boat (MSB). LST of the 542 class, the self-propelled bar- (5) Personnel air cushion vehicle racks ship (APB) provides mobile billeting (PACV). facilities for river flotilla and Army units em- (6) Patrol boat (Coast Guard) (WPB). barked. One ship will have command facilities suitable for a brigade headquarters. B-3. Vietnamese Navy Ships and Craft (2) Specific data. a. Ships. Length : 328 feet (1) Patrol craft (PC).Width: 50 feet

AGO 20012A € 126 » mmâ

* <■

Figure B—l. Self-propelled barracks ship (APB). (AMMI barage and watercraft moored alongside)

Figure B-2. Barracks ship (nonself-propelled) (APL).

» AGO 20012A 127 Draft: 14 feet (full load) b. Barracks Ship {Nonself-Propelled). Weight: 3,640 tons (full load) (1) General characteristics. Barracks ships Speed : 12 knots maximum sus- (nonself-propelled) (APL) serve the same pur- tained Engines : 2 diesels pose as the APB; however, they do not have Complement: 11 officers and 123 en- the versatility of the APB because of com- listed pactness of space and lack of mobility. Capacity : (2) Specific data. Personnel : 55 officers and 1,034 Length : 261 feet enlisted; brigade Width: 49 feet flagship 114 officers Draft: 11 feet and 899 enlisted Weight: 2,580 tons (full load) Fuel: 128.000 gallons Capacity: Potable water: 40.000 gallons per day Personnel : 35 officers and 589 en- Armament : listed 2 3-inch/.50 Messing : 6 officers ' and 200 en- caliber rapid- listed fire single Potable water: 250.000 gallons mounts Armament : None 2 40-mm quad Armor protection: None mounts Miscellaneous : 8 .50-caliber Electric power: 3 100-kilowatt machineguns generators Armor protection: None Distilling plant: 24.000 gallons per day Miscellaneous : Bow doors sealed. c. Landing Craft Repair Ship. Landing platform (1) General characteristics. The landing for one helicop- craft repair ship (ARL) is a conversion of the ter. LST 542 class hull to provide repair facilities

ff Ik

7* ^ 1L

<47»

5MÍ re U

Figure B-3. Landing craft repair ship (ARL).

AGO 20012A 112© for landing ships and craft. Naval elements Miscellaneous : aboard perform up to direct support mainte- Bow doors sealed. nance. Army maintenance personnel also may Largest boom— 60-ton. perform direct support maintenance aboard Cargo space— this ship. Minimum logistic support is main- 40,000 cubic tained on board. feet. (2) Specific data. d. Tank Landing Ship. Length: 328 feet (1) General characteristics. The tank Width: 50 feet landing ship (LST) normally transports and Draft: 14 feet lands amphibious vehicles, tanks, combat vehic- Weight: 3,640 tons (full load) les, and equipment. It frequently serves as a Speed : 12 knots maximum sus- cargo ship in areas where pier space is inade- tained Engines: 2 diesels quate and loading/unloading across a beach is ■ Complement: 15 officers and 232 necessary. Two classes of LST’s, the 542 class enlisted and the 1156 class, are currently employed in Capacity: riverine operations. The 542 class, the smaller Cargo : 300 tons of the two, is used as a resupply ship. The 1156 Personnel : 18 officers and 248 enlisted including crew class, when appropriately modified, serves as Fuel: 185,260 gallons an organic element of the afloat base in the Armament: 2 40-mm quad mounts capacities of a resupply ship, riverine assault Armor protection: None craft mother ship, barracks ship, helicopter

Figure B-4. Tank landing ship (LST)—542 class.

AGO 20012A 129 *JS¡ % -'J3 vfcí

íOk 4!!s

Figure B-5. Tank landing ship (LST)—J-Z56 class.

JUi r î> IW>

Figure B-6. Large harbor tug (YTB). base ship, and morgue. Its larger size makes it (2) Specific data—5A2 class. preferable for use in riverine operations as a Length : 328 feet part of the afloat base. Both ships have heli- Width: 50 feet Weight: 3,640 tons (full load) copter landing pads. no AGO 20012A Speed : 11 knots maximum Complement: 10 officers and 165 en- Engines: 2 diesels listed Complement : 9 officers and 106 en- Capacity: I listed Cargo : 1,580 tons (full load) Capacity : Personnel : 15 officers and 377 en- Cargo : 1,500 tons (full load) listed Personnel : 10 officers and 110 en- Fuel : Sufficient for sustained listed plus crew endurance of 17,300 Fuel: 185,260 gallons nautical miles at 9 LVT: 14 knots Armament : LVT: 1 LCP(L), 3 LCVP, 2 40-mm twin and 17 LVT mounts Armament: 3 3-inch twin mounts 2 40-mm single Armor protection : None mounts Miscellaneous : Armor protection: None Bow door dimen- 15 by 17 feet Miscellaneous : sion Bow door dimen- 13 by 14 feet Cargo space: Tank deck 8,400 square sions feet Cargo space: Tank deck 6,328 square Weather deck : 5,200 feet square feet Weather deck 5,000 Largest crane: 7 tons square feet Boat davits: 2 LCVP Largest crane : 5 tons Boat davits: 2 LCVP e. Large Harbor Tug. (1) General characteristics. The large (3) Specific data—1156 class. Length : 384 feet narbor tug (YTB) has the capability to pro- Width: 55.5 feet vide assistance to other ships and craft, in- Weight: 5,777 tons full load cluding pushing, towing, firefighting, and Speed : 13.5 knots maximum minor salvage work. Engines : 2 diesels

fer* r hi

m: À

itBEu ■X

tea* Figure B-7. Net laying ship (AN).

AGO 20012A 131 (2) Specific data. (2) Specific data. Length : 109 feet Length : 56 feet Width : 28 feet Width : 17 feet 6 inches Draft: 13 feet Height above water- reducible to 9 feet 6 Speed : 12 knots line: inches Crew: 12 Draft: 3 feet 4 inches (full Engine: 1 diesel load) Armament: None Weight: 130,900 pounds Armor protection : None Speed : 8 to 12 knots Engines : 2 diesels (GM6-71) f. Net Laying Ship. Capacity: (1) General characteristics. Net laying Weight: 240,000 pounds ships (AN) lay, maintain, and recover nets, Personnel : 40 ( + ) Vehicles: 1 APC booms, and other harbor defense equipment. 1 105-mm howitzer with (2) Specific data. prime mover Length : 169 feet Armament : Width : 34 feet 1 20-mm cannon Draft: 15 feet 2 .50-caliber Weight: 855 tons machineguns Speed : 12.7 knots 4 7.62-mm Engines : 1 diesel machineguns Complement : 5 officers and 49 en- 2 40-mm grenade listed launchers Armament: 3 20-mm twin mounts Armor protection : Yes Armor protection: None Miscellaneous: Miscellaneous : Largest boom—10-tons Bow ramp width : 9 feet 6 inches Cargo deck: 9 feet 6 inches by 31 g. Armored Troop Carrier. feet 2 inches (1) General characteristics. The armored Chain drag mine- troop carrier (ATC), a converted LCM(6), sweeping equip- functions as the general-purpose carrier of the ment river assault squadron (RAS).

Figure B—8. Armored troop carrier (ATC).

132 AGO 20012A Figure B-9. Command and control boat (CCB).

(3) Refueler. The refueler is the ATC Capacity : with portable tanks installed in the cargo well. Battalion-size The capacity of the tanks is 1,200 gallons of command post 11 ( + ) in com- gasoline, 300 gallons of oil, and a 300-gallon mand and com- mixing tank. munications h. Command and Control Boat. compartment (1) General characteristics. The command Armament: and control boat (CCB) serves as a floating 1 40-mm cannon 1 20-mm cannon communications facility and command post for 3 .50-caliber Navy and Army commanders controlling river- machineguns ine operations. The hull modifications are gen- 4 7.62-mm erally similar to those of the ATC. A faired machineguns bow has been added and a command and com- Armor protection: Yes Miscellaneous: munications compartment has been installed Radar : 1 Raytheon 1900N in the cargo well. Compass : 1 MK-27 gyro (2) Specific data. Chain drag mine- Length : 60 feet 6 inches sweeping equip- Width : 17 feet 6 inches ment Height above water- reducible to 9 feet 6 i. Monitor. line: inches (1) General characteristics. The monitor Draft : 3 feet 6 inches (full load) provides fire support during water movement Weight: 167,000 pounds and assault landing phases of riverine opera- Speed : 8.25 knots tions. The hull and superstructure of the mon- Range : 150 nautical miles at itor closely resemble the CCB, but an 81-mm full load and ma> mortar is installed aft of the 40-mm gun. mum speed Engines : 2 diesels (GM6-71) (2) Specific data. Crew: 11 Length: 60 feet 6 inches

AGO 20012A 133 Width: 17 feet 6 inches (2) Specific data. Height above water- reducible to 9 feet 6 Length : 50 feet line: inches Width: 15 feet 2 inches Draft : 3 feet 6 inches Height above water- reducible to 9 feet 9 Weight: 169,000 line: pinches ounds Speed : 8.25 knots Draft: 3 feet 9 inches Range : 150 nautical miles at Weight: 71.000 pounds (full full load and maxi- load) mum speed Speed : 15 knots maximum, 10 Engines: 2 diesels (GM6-71) knots cruise Crew: 7 Range : 200 nautical miles at 10 Capacity : No space designated knots and full load for Army personnel Engines : 2 diesels (GM12V-71) Armament : Crew: 7 1 40-mm cannon Capacity : 5.000 pounds; about 15 1 81-mm mortar troops 1 20-mm cannon Armament: 3 .50-caliber 1 20-mm cannon machineguns 1 twin .50-caliber 4 7.62-mm or 7.62-mm machineguns machinegun Armor protection: Yes with automatic Miscellaneous : 40-mm launcher Radar : 1 Raytheon 1900N 1 81-mm mortar Compass : 1 MK-27 gyro Armor protection: Yes Chain drag mine- Miscellaneous: Chain drag minesweep- sweeping equip- ing equipment ment k. Inshore Fire Support Ship. j. Assault Support Patrol Boat. (1) General characteristics. The inshore (1) General characteristics. The assault fire support ship (IFS), designed to provide support patrol boat (ASPB) is a fast, highly a high volume of rocket fire for neutralization maneuverable craft for fire support, mine- of shore defenses in preparation for amphibious sweeping, patrolling, and convoy escort on in- assault, also provides fire support for troops land waterways. ashore.

aiÄf.:'*

Figure B—10. Monitor.

AGO 20012A Figure B-ll. Assault support patrol boat (ASPB).

r «

5PM» g|^f3

Figure B-12. Inshore fire support ship (IFS).

(2) Specific data, Armament: Length : 245 feet 1 5-inch/.38-caliber Width: 38 feet single mount Draft: 101 feet 8 5-inch rocket Weight: 1,560 tons launchers Speed : 15 knots maximum sus- Armor protection: None tained Engines : 2 diesels l. Landing Ship, Medium, Rocket. Complement : 9 officers and 140 en- (1) General characteristics. The landing * listed ship, medium, rocket (LSMR) is designed to AGO 20012A 135 Figure B-1S. Landing ship, medium, rocket (LSMR).

Figure B-14. Patrol boat, river (PBR)- provide a high volume of rocket fire for neu- Armament: tralization of shore defenses in preparation for 1 5-inch/.38-caliber amphibious landings. It can also provide fire single mount 2 40-mm twin support for troops ashore and destroy surface mounts and air targets at close range. 8 5-inch rocket launchers (2) Specific data. Armor protection: None Length : 211 feet Width: 34 feet 6 inches m. Patrol Boat, River. Draft: 9 feet 10 inches (1) General characteristics. The patrol Weight: 1,280 tons boat, river (PBR) is a fast, fiber glass-hull, Speed : 13 knots maximum Engines : 2 diesels shallow-draft patrol boat for interdiction pa- Complement : 7 officers and 119 en- trols on major waterways. It has water-jet pro- listed pulsion.

136 AGO 20012A I < ti

I Mm

5s«r'

sç.

Figure B—15. Patrol craft, fast (swift) (PCF).

1 single .50-caliber machinegun 1 40-mm grenade m launcher Armor protection: Yes n. Patrol Craft, Fast (Swift). (1) General characteristics. The patrol craft, fast (swift) (PCF) is a high-speed, shallow-draft boat configured for patrols on

ss coastal and major inland waterways. 0 (2) Specific data. Length : 50 feet 1 inch Width: 13 feet 6 inches 1w, Draft : 5 feet Weight : 43.000 pounds Speed : 28 knots maximum Engines : 2 diesels (GM12V-71) Crew: 1 officer and 5 enlisted Capacity: 10.000 pounds weight Armament: 1 twin .50-caliber Figure B-16. Inflatable boat, small (IBS). mount 1 naval 81-mm mortar with .50- (2) Specific data. caliber machine- Length : 31 feet gun Width: i 10 feet 8 inches Armor protection: None Draft: 18 inches (at rest) ; 9 inches (at speed) o. Inflatable Boat, Small. Weight: 14,500 pounds (1) General characteristics. The inflatable Speed : 26 knots maximum boat, small (IBS) is an inflatable, pneumatic Engines : 2 diesels (GM6V-53) boat with good steering and maneuvering char- Crew: 4 or 5 acteristics. This craft is suitable for silent wa- Capacity : Weight: 2,000 pounds ter operations and may be propelled by paddles, Personnel : 6 including boat crew poles, or small outboard motors. Armament : 1 twin .50-caliber (2) Specific data. machinegun Length: 12 feet

137 1 AGO 20012A Width : 6 feet Crew : 7 Draft: 16 inches Armament: .30- and .50-caliber Weight: 225 pounds machineguns in- Speed : Paddle speed or about stalled for employ- 5 knots per hour with ment in Vietnam motor Armor protection : None Propulsion : Paddle, pole, or up to q. Air Cushion Vehicle. 7 %-horsepower outboard motor (1) General characteristics. The air cush- Capacity: ion vehicle (ACV), a militarized version of Weight: 1,000 pounds (esti- the Bell Aerosystems SK-5 air cushion ve- mated) hicle, can travel over water and marginal ter- Personnel : 7 rain at speeds up to 55 knots. The ACV can Armament: Individual weapons Armor protection: None clear a vertical wall 1 meter high, an earth mound 1.5 meters high, cross ditches up to •p. Minesweeping Boat. 3.5 meters wide and 2.5 meters deep, and travel (1) General characteristics. The mine- over vegetation 1.8 meters high. The Army is sweeping boat (MSB) is a wooden-hull craft procuring three air cushion vehicles, which are designed to sweep mines in shallow water less similar to the Navy’s PACV’s. than 9 meters in depth. (2) Specific data. (2) Specific data. Length: 38 feet 9 inches Length : 57 feet Width: 23 feet Width: 15 feet Height : 16 feet 6 inches Draft: 5 feet 6 inches Weight: Weight: 45 tons Net: 16,325 pounds Speed : 11 knots; 6.5 knots Combat loaded: 18,350 pounds (sweeping) Capacity : Engines : 2 diesels Crew:

an-: irwa Ü rr

a?« -à*.

Figure B-17. Minesweeping boat (MSB).

138 AGO 20012A Troops : 4 plus crew Armor protection: Limited Cargo weight: 880 pounds r. Patrol Boat (Coast Guard). Cargo space: 144 by 92 by 72 inches I Speed : (1) General characteristics. The patrol Maximum: 55 knots boat (Coast Guard) (WPB) is designed for law Cruising: 50 knots enforcement and search and rescue. It has been Range : 300 nautical miles fitted with additional deck-mounted weapons Gradability : for coastal patrol in Vietnam. Forward slope: 12 percent at zero speed 30 percent for 50 yards (2) Specific data. with 25 knots initial Length : 82 feet speed Width : 17 feet Side slope: 12 percent Draft : 6 feet Turning radius: Weight: 65 tons Pivot: 30 feet Speed : 17 knots Cruise : 200 yards at 30 knots Engines : 2 diesels 550 yards at 50 knots Complement : 10 Draft: Armament: Cushionborne : None 4 .50-caliber Afloat: 8 inches machineguns Armament: 2 .50-caliber machine- 1 naval 81-mm guns on cabin roof mortar with .50- 2 7.62-mm M60 ma- caliber machine- chineguns installed gun in port starboard side Armor protection: None window and center bow window s. Patrol Craft. 1 40-mm grenade (1) General characteristics. The patrol launcher i ' I H

itaa. hh

» Figure B-18. Personnel air cushion vehicle (PACV). 139 AGO 20012A craft-^PO. deigned for convoy-escort opera- t. Patrol Craft, Escort. tions at sea, is employed in coastal patrol and (1) General characteristics. The Vietnam- gunfire support. ese Navy patrol craft, escorts (PCE) are ex- (2) Specific data. U.S. craft (converted PCE and MSF’s (mine- Í Length : 174 feet sweeper fleet)) and are employed in coastal Width : 23 feet patrol and gunfire support. Draft : 8 feet Weight: 450 tons (2) Specific data. Speed : 16.7 knots maximum Length : 184 feet 6 inches (15 knots maximum Width: 33 feet 9 feet sustained) Draft : Engines : 2 diesels (GM16-258- Weight: 944 tons Speed : 14.7 knots maximum S) Crew: 6 officers and 54 en- (14 knots maximum listed sustained.) Armament: Engines : 2 diesels 1 3-inch/.50- Crew: 6 officers and 83 en- caliber single listed mount Armament: 1 40-mm single 1 3-inch/.50-caliber mount single mount 1 20-mm twin 2 40-mm single mount mounts 2 20-mm single 4 20-mm twin mounts mounts 1 60-mm mortar Armor protection: None Armor protection: None €

Figure B-19. Patrol boat (Coast Guard) (WPB).

-rz^r

mm 'ÆÎ

1 PC r*«* . Mr«. ZJ o-y

Figure B-20. Patrol craft (PC). 140 € AGO 20012A Figure B-21. Patrol craft, escort (PCE).

Figure B-22. Patrol motor gunboat (PGM).

u. Patrol Motor Gunboat. Draft : 8 feet (1) General characteristics. The patrol Weight: 143 tons Speed : 17 knots maximum motor gunboat (PGM) is designed to conduct (16.5 knots maximum patrol, gunfire support, and escort operations in sustained) coastal and inland waterways. Engines : 2 diesels (2) Specific data. Crew: 8 officers and 25 en- Length: 101 feet listed Width : 21 feet

AGO 20012A 141 Armament: 2 .50-caliber 1 40-mm single machinegun mount single mounts i 2 20-mm single Armor protection : None mounts

rj rl

Figure B-2S. Landing ship, support, large (LSSL). i

r m

r''r

It CS&

Figure B-24. Landing ship, infantry, large (LSIL). « AGO 20012A v. Landing Ship, Support,ship, infantry, Large. large (LSIL) can transport and (1) General characteristics. The landing land troops and light equipment. It has good ship, support, large (LSSL) can transport fire support capabilities. I troops and light equipment. It was designed1 (2) Specific data. primarily for fire support of amphibious opera- Length : 158 feet tions and has no ramp. Width: 24 feet Draft : 7 feet (2) Specific data. Weight: 393 tons Length : 137 feet Speed : 12.5 knots maximum Width: 23 feet (10 knots maximum Draft : 6 feet sustained) Weight : 387 tons Engines : 8 diesels (GM6-71) Speed : 15 knots maximum (9 Crew: 5 officers and 50 en- knots maximum sus- listed tained) Capacity : Crew : 6 officers and 54 en- Weight: 12 tons listed Personnel : 76 (combat equipped) Engines : 8 diesels (GM6-71) 1 Armament : Capacity : 60 personnel (combat 1 3-inch/.50-caliber equipped) single muont Armament : 1 40-mm single 1 3-inch/.50- mount caliber single 2 20-mm single mount mounts 3 40-mm twin 2 .50-caliber mounts machinegun 4 20-mm single single mounts mounts 2 81-mm mortars 2 81-mm mortars 2 60-mm mortars 2 60-mm mortars Armor protection: None Armor protection: None x. Landing Ship, Medium. w. Landing Ship, Infantry,(1) Large.General characteristics. The landing » (1) General characteristics. The landing ship, medium (LSM) is designed to transport

Viàv* jvwfri'j.

3 Figure B-25. Landing ship, medium (LSM). AGO 20012A 143 and land troops, vehicles, and tanks. It has (2) Specific data. an open well deck and discharges cargo and Length : 144 feet troops through bow doors. Width : 28 feet (2) Specific data. Draft: 10 feet 6 inches Weight: 360 tons Length : 204 feet Speed : 13.5 knots maximum Width : 35 feet sustained Draft: 10 feet Engines: 2 diesel (GM8-268A) Weight: 1,095 tons Complement: 4 officers and 35 en- Speed : 13 knots maximum listed ( 12.5 knots maximum Armament: 1 20-mm twin mount sustained) Armor protection: None Engines: 2 diesels (F-M38D81/8 Crew: 5 officers and 73 en- z. Landing Craft, Utility. listed (1) General characteristics. The landing Capacity: craft, utility (LCU), designed for amphibious Weight: 250 tons Personnel : 400 (combat equipped) operation to transport tanks and other large Armament: vehicles, is often used for inland waterway 1 40-mm twin logistic lifts. mount (2) Specific data. 2 20-mm single Length : 115 feet mounts Width: 34 feet 2 4.5-inch rocket Draft: 5.2 feet aft; 3 feet for- launches (twin) ward . Armor protection: None Weight: 196 tons (light load) Miscellaneous: Speed : 6 knots (maximum sus- Bow door: 14 feet by 14 feet tained) Cargo space: 12 feet by 23 feet by Engines : 3 diesels (GM6-71) 186 feet Complement: 1 officer and 17 enlisted y. Minesweeper, Coastal. (Navy) (1) General characteristics. The mine- 2 officers/warrant officers and 9 enlisted sweeper, coastal (MSC), designed to sweep (Army) mines in water as shallow as 9 meters, con- Capacity: ducts limited mine hunting and is capable of Cargo Weight: 170 tons limited self-defense. This ship is often employed Personnel : 300 to 400 in coastal patrol. M113’s: 6

R 1ï>

• » «

Figure B-2ti. Minesweeper, coastal (MSC).

144 AGO 20012A Figure B-27. Landing craft, utility (LCU).

* ~'1

LCMUO

Figure B-28. Landing craft, mechanized (LCM(8)).

2%-ton truck: 8 (2) Specific data. Armament : Length: 73 feet 7 inches 2 20-mm cannon Width: 21 feet 1 60-mm mortar Draft : 3 feet 10 inches for- Armor protection: Yes ward (loaded) Miscellaneous : 5 feet 2 inches aft Cargo space : 77 feet 6 inches by 30 (loaded) feet 2 feet forward (light) Bow ramp width: 14 feet 6 inches 3 feet 6 inches aft (light) aa. Landing Craft, Mechanized. Weight: 129,500 pounds (light) (1) General characteristics. The landing Speed : 9 knots (loaded), 12 craft, mechanized (LCM(8)), designed for am- knots (light) phibious operations, has been used effectively Engines 2 diesels (GM6-71) to carry MllS’s in the Mekong Delta. Crew: 5 enlisted 145 AGO 20012A Capacity : (A)) is a converted LCVP normally used for Cargo : 120,000 pounds escort and minesweeping in riverine operations. Personnel : 200 troops MllS’s: 3 (2) Specific data. Armament: 3 20-mm single mounts Length : 35 feet 8 inches Armor protection: Yes Width: 10 feet 6 inches Miscellaneous: Draft: 4 feet 6 inches Bow ramp width : 14 feet 6 inches Weight: 15 tons Cargo space: 45 feet 6 inches by 14 Speed : 7 knots maximum (6 feet 6 inches knots maximum sustained) ab. Landing Craft, Vehicle/Personnel.Engines: 1 diesel (GM6-71) (1) General characteristics. The landing Crew: 9 per 2 (LCVP (A) craft vehicle/personnel (LCVP), a V-bottom Capacity : Weight: 4.2 tons wooden boat with plywood sides and double- Personnel : 12 (combat equipped) planked bottom, lands personnel and small ve- Armament: hicles in amphibious operations. Paramilitary 1 20-mm single and police forces use it in South Vietnam. mount 3 .30-caliber ma- (2) Specific data. chineguns Length : 35 feet 8 inches Armor protection: Yes Width : 10 feet 6 inches Miscellaneous: Equipped to sweep Draft: 3 feet with grapnel and Weight: 16,400 pounds chain drag Speed : 7 knots ad. Landing Craft, Personnel, Ramped. Engines: 1 diesel (GM6-71) Crew: 3 (1) General characteristics. The landing Capacity : craft, personnel, ramped (LCPR) is a V- Cargo : 8,100 pounds bottom wooden craft with plywood sides and Personnel : 36 plus crew double-planked bottom. Paramilitary organiza- Armament: Various tions use it in Vietnam. Armor protection: Yes Miscellaneous: (2) Specific data. Bow ramp width: 6 feet 10 inches Length : 36 feet Cargo compart- 17 feet 3 inches by 7 Width: 11 feet ment: feet 5 inches Draft: 3 feet 6 inches Weight: 13,500 pounds ac. Landing Craft, Vehicle/PersonnelSpeed : (Arm- 10 knots ored) . Engines : 1 diesel (GM6-71) (1) General characteristics. The landing Crew: 3 craft, vehicle/personnel (armored) (LCVP Capacity : Weight: 8,595 pounds m

Figure B-%9. Landing craft, vehicle/personnel (LCVP).

146 AGO 20012A Figure B-30. Landing craft, vehicle/personnel (armored) (LCVP(A)).

Figure B-31. Landing craft, personnel, ramped (LCP(R)). Personnel: 39 including crew craft, mechanized (armored) (LCM(A)) is a Armament: Various converted LCM used to transport and land Armor protection: Yes troops, vehicles, and cargo in riverine opera- Miscellaneous: Bow ramp width: 3 feet 4 inches tions. Cargo space: 7 feet wide by 21 feet (2) Specific data. (overall shape is Length : 56 feet asymmetrical) Width: 14 feet ae. Landing Craft, Mechanized (Armored). Draft : 4 feet t (1) General characteristics. The landing Weight: 37 tons AGO 20012A 147 \ Vv -,o V -y

<.? -' O O. cri'L JL -¿DÊi ■',CV-

—d

Figure B-32. Landing craft, mechanized (armored) (LCM(A)).

FJTTZZnim

n. ^ V

, ( D

■ /Sv

r ^

"=|2Ín;'

Figure B-SS. Commandament, Speed : 8 knots maximum (6 Weight : 65 tons knots maximum sus- Speed : 8 knots maximum (6 tained) knots maximum sus- Engines: 2 diesels (GM6-71) tained) Crew: 7 Engines: 2 diesels (GM6-71) Capacity : Crew : 10 Cargo : 30 tons Armament: 2 20-mm single mounts Personnel : 90 (combat equipped) Armor protection : Yes plus crew Armament: ag. Monitor. 3 20-mm single (1) General characteristics. The monitor mounts is a converted LCM(6) designed for fire sup- 2 .50-caliber ma- port of riverine operations. chineguns (2) Specific data. Armor protection: Yes Length : 56 feet Miscellaneous : Width: 14 feet 6 inches Bow ramp width: 9 feet 6 inches Draft: 4 feet Cargo space: 9 feet 6 inches by 31 Weight: 56.5 tons feet Speed : 8 knots maximum (6 af. Commandament. knots maximum sus- (1) General characteristics. The com- tained) mandament is a converted LCM for use as a Engines: 2 diesels (GM6-71) Crew: 10 command boat for riverine operations. Armament: (2) Specific data. 1 40-mm single Length: 65 feet 5 inches mount Width : 14 feet 2 20-mm single Draft: 4 feet 6 inches mounts

yt r:~v Ä1 VLV * ' -

■ J“ P

% r

Figure B-3U. Monitor.

AGO 20012A 149 FiffUTe ¿?—55. FOM/STCAN.

1 i

Figure BS6. River patrol craft (RPC). 1 ,50-caliber ma- Speed : 10 knots maximum 8 chinegun knots maximum sus- 1 81-mm mortar tained) Armor protection: Yes Engines : 1 diesel (GM6—71) Crew: 8 ah. FOM/STCAN. Armament : (1) General characteristics. The FOM/ 1 .50-caliber ma- STCAN, a French-designed boat with a V- chinegun bottom, performs inland waterway patrol, es- 3 .30-caliber machinegun cort, and gunfire support missions. Armor protection: Yes Miscellaneous : Some are equipped (2) Specific data. with grapnel and Length : 34 feet 9 inches chain drag mine- Width: 9 feet 10 inches sweeping equipment Draft : 3 feet Weight : 13 tons

AGO 20012A 150 ai. River Patrol Craft. chinegun single (1) General characteristics. The river pa- mounts (on early trol craft (RPC), designed for river patrol boats) Armor protection : None and escort operations, has an inverted V-bottom and is the fastest boat in the South Viet- aj. Command Junk. namese river assault group. It has excellent (1) General characteristics. Command beaching and retracting characteristics. junk is the largest and fastest of the junks (2) Specific data. used by the South Vietnamese coastal force. Length : 36 feet Width: 10 feet 10 inches (2) Specific Data. Draft: 3 feet 6 inches Length : 54 feet 8 inches Speed : 15 knots maximum (13 Width: 16 feet 5 inches knots maximum sus- Draft: 4 feet 7 inches tained) Weight: 25 tons Weight: 26,000 pounds Speed : 12 knots maximum (10 Engines : 2 diesels (GM6-71) knots maximum sus- Crew: 3 to 5 tained) Capacity: 17 personnel including Engines: 1 diesel (GM6-71) crew Crew: 10 Armament: Capacity : 2 .50-caliber ma- Weight: 19.4 tons chinegun twin Personnel : 25 (combat equipped) mounts plus crew 2 .30-caliber ma-

: yuv-^4* I H Í

Figure B-S7. Command junk.

AGO 20012A 151 Armament: 1 .30-caliber ma- 1 .50-caliber machinegun chinegun Armor protection: None i

Section II. ARMY RIVERINE EQUIPMENT AND CHARACTERISTICS

B-5. Organic Equipment Bridge, floating, raft section, light tactical 2 a. The following equipmentCombat is organicengineer vehicleto a 4 Ferry conversion set, infantry support 2 typical infantry division engineer battalion op- Outboard motor, 25 horsepower 8 erating in a riverine area, when equipped with mobile assault bridge equipment: B-6. Other Army Equipment Nomenclature Quantity The Army units operating in a riverine area Boat, landing, inflatable, assault craft, nylon cloth, 15-men 18 require the following additional supplies and Boat, reconnaissance, pneumatic, 3-man 28 equipment : Bridge, floating, mobile assault, 36-foot 16 a. Aluminum footbridge (for light cargo, Bridge, floating raft, section, light tactical 2 light vehicle, and wounded personnel). Combat engineer vehicle 4 b. Assault boat, plastic, 16-foot. Ferry conversion set, raft 2 c. Can, water, collapsible, plastic, 5-gallon. Outboard motor, 25 horsepower 8 b. The following equipment is organic to a d. Mat, beaching, woven steel wire. typical infantry division engineer battalion e. Mat, beaching, 4-ply, heavy duty. operating in a riverine area, when equipped /. Membrane surfacing, filament nylon yarn, with M4T6-class 60 bridge equipment: woven. (1) 3 feet by 100 feet.’ Nomenclature Quantity (2) 3 feet by 180 feet. Boat, bridge erection, 27 feet long 8 Boat, landing, inflatable, assault craft, h. Rope, nylon, iys inches in circumference, nylon cloth, 15-man 18 3,000-pound breaking strength. Boat reconnaissance, pneumatic, 3-man 28 i. Outboard motor, 40-horsepower. Bridge, floating, highway, aluminum deck balk _ 4 j. Thermocompression-type equipment for Bridge, floating, highway, class 60, 135 feet 4 water distillation, skid or trailer mounted. or Bridge, steel, floating, class 60 4 k. Landing vehicle, tracked, engineer (LV- TE).

Figure BS8. Airboat. € 152 AGO 20012A A-t its 4 • m m r m

m m

Figure B-39. APC, M11SA1. , Z. Canal bridge for troops. other watercraft in performing these missions. m. Four-man lightweight fabric boat. A limiting feature is the very high operating n. Lightweight flotation gear. noise level. o. Grapnel with line (propelled). (2) Specific data. p. Portable artillery firing platform. Length : 17 feet | q. Air-transportable troop platform. • Width: 7 feet 3 inches ¡ Weight: 1,160 pounds without load B-7. Equipment Characteristics and Data Capacity : o. Airboat {Hurricane Air cat). Personnel : 5 to 8 (1) General characteristics. The airboat Cargo : 1,000 pounds Speed : 38 miles per hour (33 is a military version of the commercial Hurri- knots) cane Aircat. Its construction is of molded fiber Draft: 1 to 2 inches minimum glass with a semicatamaran force and a flat Vertical obstacle: 24-inch dike at 20 miles bottom aft, hull shape. A 180-horsepower Ly- per hour coming engine drives a propeller mounted on Armor protection: None Armament: 1 .30-caliber or 7.62- the stern. The airboat can operate in water as mm machinegun shallow as 2.5 to 5 centimeters, traverse swamp 1 40-mm grenade vegetation, and cross dikes up to .6 meters launcher individual high. Airboats provide transportation for pa- weapons of crew trolling, reconnaissance, and flank security b. APC; M113A1. missions on inland waterways and inundated (1) General characteristics. The M113 areas. Airboats combine with helicopters and APC is a lightweight, armored, airdroppable,

153 AGO 20012A full-tracked vehicle designed to transport per- (2) Specific data. sonnel (squad) and cargo. It is capable of wa- Length : 191% inches ter operations on inland lakes and streams, ex- Width: 105% inches tended cross-country travel over rough terrain, Height: Overall : 98% inches and high speed over improved roads. This ve- Reducible : 79% inches hicle has limited mobility in marshy terrain Weight: and a limited capability to negotiate riverbanks Net: 20,870 pounds and canal banks without aid. The M113 pro- Combat : 24,080 pounds vides armor protection against small arms and Capacity: Crew: 1 shell fragments. Several special purpose ve- Troops : 12 hicles that use the basic Ml 13 chassis also are Cargo weight: 3,210 pounds available. They include the M106 armored self- Cargo space: 110 by 96% by 49% propelled 107-mm mortar; M125 armored self- inches propelled 81-mm mortar; M132 armored self- Speed : Improved roads: 42.5 miles per hour propelled flamethrower; M577 armored com- Cross-country: 8 to 12 miles per hour mand post; M548 unarmored cargo carrier; Water: 3.6 miles per hour and M696 unarmored recovery vehicle. A bull- Range : 305 miles (500 dozer kit, crane attachment, and bridge launch- kilometers) on land jer attachments also are available. An “Al” Gradability : added to the basic model number of a vehicle Forward slope: 60 percent in the M113 family denotes a diesel engine. Side slope: 30 percent

Figure B-40. Armored reconnaissance/airborne assault vehicle, M551.

154 AGO 20012A Ground clearance: 16 inches Armor protection Vertical obstacle: 24 inches Turret: Steel Trench crossing: 66 inches Hull: Aluminum Turning radius: 13 feet Armament: Ground pressure: Primary : Gun launcher for 152- With payload: •7.6 psi mm conventional am- Net weight: 6.6 psi munition or Fording depth: Floats Shillelagh missile Armor protection: Aluminum (small Secondary : .50-caliber machinegun arms) 7.62-mm coaxially Armament: 1 .50-caliber machine- mounted machinegun gun Grenade projector system c. Armored Reconnaissance/Airborne As- sault Vehicle, M551 (AR/AAV) (General Sher- d. Armored Personnel Carrier, Launched idan). Bridge. (1) General characteristics. The M551 (1) General characteristics. The light- Sheridan weapon system is a lightweight, air- weight marginal terrain assault bridge mounts transportable, airdroppable, armored reconnais- on and launches from an M113A1 APC. The sance and assault vehicle. It has a maximum bridge consists of four tapered box sections speed of more than 40 miles per hour, has good pinned together at the hinges to form a tread- cross-country mobility over difficult terrain, way. Construction is of weldable aluminum al- and can swim on inland waterways. A barrier, loy, and employment is possible where heavier used when swimming, can be erected in 11/2 equipment would bog down. It is particularly minutes to protect the vehicle against water useful in delta-type riverine areas for crossing wash above the basic hull height. The vehicle canals and steep-sided irrigation and drainage operates effectively at night and under condi- ditches. The bridge is 269 centimeters wide and tions of low visibility. The General Sheridan will support class 12 loads over gaps up to performs reconnaissance and security missions 10.5 meters. Operation is by hydraulic power; as part of combined arms teams and may be and emplacement time is less than 2 minutes, the main assault weapon for them. It can pro- from its mounting on the M113 without ex- vide fire support in rough terrain and partici- posing personnel to enemy fires. Retrieval of pate in airdrop or vertical envelopment opera- the bridge is possible in 10 minutes by revers- tions. Its 152-mm dual purpose cannon fires ing the launching procedure. The total weight either conventional ammunition or the Shille- and ground pressure of the combined trans- lagh guided missile. The multipurpose conven- porter/launcher and bridge are slightly less tional round is effective against armor, troops, than that of the combat-loaded basic M113A1 and fortifications. APC. The addition of the launcher and bridge (2) Specific data. does not detract appreciably from mobility of Length : 248 inches the basic vehicle on land or in water. The M113 Width: 110 inches launched bridge is an improvement over the Height: M113 launched deck balk bridge, which also Overall : 116 inches is available. The deck balk bridge is built from Reducible : 95Y2 inches 10 sections of M4 balk carried on two APC and Weight: 33,600 pounds combat loaded launched by one of the carriers fitted with a Crew: 4 field-fabricated H-boom. The balk bridge Speed : takes 12 minutes to install compared with less Land: 43.5 miles per hour than 2 minutes for the new assault bridge. Water: 3.5 miles per hour Range: 373 miles (2) Specific data. Maximum grade: 40 to 60 percent de- Length : 209% inches. pending on surface Width: 123% inches Ground clearance: 19 inches Height: 109% inches Turning radius: Pivot Weight: Vehicle and 21,030 pounds Ground pressure: 6.8 psi Fording depth: Floats launcher Freeboard : 24 inches Bridge : 2,750 pounds

AGO 20012A 155 *

Figure B-41. Armored personnel carrier launched bridge. Gross: 23,780 pounds being the welded-in mortar beam and a three- Crew : 2 part circular hatch cover on the M125A1. Other characteristics are similar to those of basic M113A1 APC (2) Specific data. Length: 191% inches e. Armored Self-Propelled 81-mm Mortar, Width: 105% inches M125A1. Height : Overall : 98% inches (1) General characteristics. The M125A1 Reducible : 78% inches armored self-propelled mortar is a lightweight, Weight: 24,550 pounds combat full-tracked, amphibious vehicle, which carries an 81-mm mortar. The M125A1 is an adapta- Crew: 6 tion of the Ml 13 personnel carrier and uses Speed : Improved roads: 42.5 miles per hour suspension and power train components com- Cross-country : 8 to 12 miles per hour mon to those of the M113 family of vehicles. Water: 3.6 miles per hour Like the Ml 13, the M125A1 is capable of op- Range : 300 miles (483 erations across lakes and streams, extended kilometers) cross-country travel over rough terrain, and Gradability : high speed over improved roads. The 81-mm Forward slope: 60 percent Side slope: 30 percent mortar has 360° traverse. The vehicle retains Ground clearance: 16 inches the basic M113 silhouette, the main difference Vertical obstacle: 24 inches

156 AGO 20012A Trench crossing: 66 inches nents common to those of the M113 family of Turning radius: 13 feet vehicles. Like the M113, the M106A1 is capable Ground pressure: 7.8 psi at combat of operations across lakes and streams, ex- weight tended cross-country travel over rough ter- Fording depth: Floats Armor protection : Aluminum rain, and high speed over improved roads. The Armament: 81-mm mortar with 114 rear-firing 107-mm (4.2-inch) mortar has a rounds ammunition 90° traverse. The vehicle retains the basic M113 1 .50-caliber machine- silhouette, the main difference being the gun welded-in mortar beam and a three-part cir- f. Armored Self-Propelled 107-mm Mortar, cular hatch cover on the M106A1. M106A1. (2) Specific data. (1) General characteristics. The M106A1 Length : 194 inches Width : 112% inches armored self-propelled mortar is a lightweight, Height: full-tracked, amphibious vehicle, which carries Overall : 98% inches a 107-mm (4.2-inch) mortar. The M106A1 is Reducible : 78% inches an adaptation of the M113 personnel carrier Weight: 26,140 pounds combat and uses suspension and power train compo- loaded

3»®

31 %

Wr*

w i i

Figure B—b2. Armored self-propelled 81-mm mortar, M125A1.

157 AGO 20012A I

S'. 4P*- / ^6. ** % ñ 3R»-: Í Figure B—^.3. Armored self-propelled 107-mm mortary M106A1.

Crew: (1) General characteristics. The M114 Speed: armored command and reconnaissance carrier Improved roads: 41.5 miles per hour Cross-country : 8 to 12 miles per hour is a lightweight, low silhouette, tracked vehicle Water: 3.5 miles per hour designed for security, command, and recon- Range : 295 miles (475 naissance missions. It can operate over unim- kilometers) on land proved roads and trails, soft marsh, inland Gradability : waterways, loose sand, rocky areas, and hilly Forward slope: 60 percent country, as well as snow, ice, unfrozen tundra, Side slope: 30 percent Ground clearance : 16 inches and muskeg, under all seasonal conditions in Vertical obstacle: 24 inches artic, temperate, and tropical climates. Move- Trench crossing: 66 inches ment of the tracks propels and steers the ve- Turning radius: 13 feet hicle on both land and water. Ground pressure: 8.3 psi at combat (2) Specific data. weight Length: 175% inches Fording depth : Floats Width: 91% inches Armor protection : Aluminum Height: Armament: 107-mm (4.2-inch) Overall : 91% inches mortar with 88 Reducible : 74% inches rounds ammunition Weight: 14,749 pounds 1 .50-caliber machine- (combat) gun Crew: 3 g. Armored Command and Reconnaissance Speed : Carrier, Mil A. Land : 34 miles per hour I 158 AGO 20012A Water: 3.8 miles per hour al conditions in artic, temprate, and tropical Range: 300 miles climates. Movement of the tracks propels and Maximum grade: 60 percent steers the vehicle on both land and water. Ground clearance: 1414 inches Vertical obstacle: 18 inches Trench crossing: 60 inches (2) Specific data. Turning radius: 32 feet Length : 188% inches Ground pressure: 4.63 psi Width : 82% inches Fording depth: Floats Height: Freeboard : 12 inches Overall : 80 inches Armor protection: Aluminum Reducible : 63% inches Armament : 1 7.62-mm machinegun Weight: 7,750 pounds net 1 .50-caliber machine- Capacity : gun Crew: 1 Troops : 13 h. Amphibious Cargo Carrier, Ml 16. Cargo : 3,000 pounds (1) General characteristics. The Ml 16 Speed : amphibious cargo carrier is a lightweight, low Land : 37 miles per hour silhouette, tracked vehicle designed to trans- Water: 3.7 miles per hour port cargo and personnel. It is capable of op- Range : 300 miles on land Maximum grade: 60 percent eration over unimproved roads and trails, soft Ground clearance : 15% inches marsh, inland waterways, loose sand, rocky Vertical obstacle: 18 inches areas, and hilly country, as well as snow, ice, Trench crossing: 58 inches unfrozen tundra, and muskeg, under all season- Turning radius: Pivot

Figure B—44. Armored command and reconnaissance carrier, MUA.

AGO 20012A 159 Figure B-45. Amphibious cargo carrier, M116.

Ground pressure: the front center and one on each side of the With payload: 2.69 psi rear compartment. A ring-mounted .50-caliber Net weight: 1.88 psi machinegun or an 81-mm mortar can be in¡- Fording depth: Floats Freeboard : 12 inches stalled in the cargo compartment. The vehicle Armor protection: None on basic model; has a forward compartment for the crew and armor protection a rear compartment for carrying troops and against .30-caliber cargo. A large watertight door swings down- rounds may he added at an additional ward from the rear for loading and unload- weight of 400 pounds ing. When this vehicle has a mortar-firing Armament: None on basic model; capability, it is designated carrier, tracked, M60 machinegun and 81-mm mortar, XM755. 1,800 rounds of ammunition may be (2) Specific data. added at an addi- Length: 195 inches tional weight of 248 Width: 81% inches pounds Height: Overall : 78 inches i. Amphibious Assault Vehicle, XM733. Reducible : 68% inches (1) General characteristics. The XM733 Weight: 10,500 pounds or 12,500 amphibious assault vehicle is designed for use pounds with 81-mm as an armored weapons or personnel carrier mortar kit Capacity : in remote swampy areas. The XM733 is a Crew: 2 or 3 standard Ml 16 amphibious cargo carrier with Troops: 5 normal; 13 overload armor plates bolted to the front, sides, and Cargo : 1,000 pounds normal; hull of the vehicle for protection. It has three 3,000 pounds over- pintle mounts for M60 machineguns, one in load

160 AGO 2001ZA i:? m mm wwmm —y ; m * 'ww’f'ff:1, KSS! ■ ■ " r*** i- « m-*i MBi i : fi-iir I i -9 „Ä?;r • m§^ 'Wtar v W ./ & * wÿî ’,

Figure B-1,6. Amphibious assault vehicle, XM733.

Ground pressure: Normal : 2.6 psi Overload : 3.0 psi Fording depth: Floats Freeboard : Normal: 12 inches Overload : 8 inches Armor protection: Aluminum Armament: Front: 1 7.62-mm machinegun Rear : 2 7.62-mm machinegun V and 1 .50-caliber machine- V-- gun 1 81-mm mortar j. Recovery Vehicle, Full-Tracked, M696. Figure B-i7. Carrier, tracked, 81-mm mortar, XM755. (1) General characteristics. The M696 re- Speed : covery vehicle is a lightweight, unarmored, Land : 35 miles per hour full-tracked, amphibious vehicle for repair and Water: 3.5 miles per hour Range : recovery of vehicles up to 15 tons. The sus- Roads : 260 miles pension and power train components are com- Cross-country : 175 miles mon to those of the M113 family of vehicles. Water: 22 miles The M696 is capable of operations across lakes Maximum grade: 60 percent and streams, extended cross-country travel Vertical obstacle: 18 inches Trench crossing: 58 inches over rough terrain, and high speed over im- Turning radius: Pivot proved roads. The M696 is an adaptation of

AGO 20012A 161 the M548 cargo carrier and uses the standard Gradability : 5-ton M543 crane and its on-vehicle equipment. Forward slope: 60 percent The hydraulic tow winch has two speeds, and Side slope: 30 percent Ground clearance: 16 inches the cable can be payed out under power. To Vertical obstacle: 24 inches increase lateral stability, outriggers are in- Trench crossing: 77 inches stalled and adjusted to the terrain. Spades may Turning radius: 14 feet be manually attached to sockets in the rear Ground pressure: 8 psi of the vehicle to prevent back slipping of Fording depth: Floats Armor protection : None heavy winch loads. Armament: None (2) Specific data. Length: 263 inches k. Dong Nai Swimmer Support Boat. Width: 107% inches (1) General characteristics. The swimmer Height: 114 inches support boat (SSB) is constructed of bonded Weight: 26,630 pounds gross polystyrofoam planks covered with fiber glass. Crew : 2 It can operate in moderately rough and veg- Lifting capability: 5 tons at 33 inches from rear of vehicle, etated waters, with a draft of 0.3 meter with- 2-part line; out engine or 0.6 meter with engine. Insuf- 2 tons at 129 inches ficient freeboard allows craft to take on water from rear of vehicle, when in a slight chop. Six men can manhandle 2-part line; this craft during difficult portage operations. 10 tons at 33 inches from rear of vehicle, (2) Specific data. 4-part line Length : 14 feet 3 inches Speed : Width: 6 feet 10 inches Improved roads: 38 miles per hour Height: 24 inches Cross-country : 8 to 12 miles per hour Weight : 375 pounds Water: 4 miles per hour Capacity : Range : 300 miles on land Weight : 2,100 pounds

^. C I L » Är

Figure B-48. Recovery vehicle, M696.

162 AGO 20012A ►

Figure B-U9. Dong Nai swimmer support boat (SSB).

t» ' -*

Figure B-50. Three fire team assault boats joined.

Personnel : 14 including crew, at boat (FTAB) for use in riverine operations. 150 pounds per man The FT AB is constructed of fiber glass with Speed : 25.5 miles per hour no polyurethane foamed in place between the hull load; 17 miles per hour using 40-horse- and deck. The hull has an inverted V shape power outboard with squared off transom. A 33-horsepower motor Evinrude or 35-horsepower Mercury outboard Range : 50 miles (estimated) motor provides power for FT AB. FT AB are Armor protection: None joined port and starboard for transporting Armament : None troops, cargo, light vehicles, and weapons. All l. Fire Team Assault Boat, MK-II (FTAB). weapons organic to an infantry battalion can (1) General characteristics. The U.S. be fired from floating platforms made up of Marine Corps developed the fire team assault one or more FT AB. They have good maneuver-

163 f AGO 20012A i fe

r J mrn

4 y \ S>s l Figure B-51. Boston Whaler. kbility in both open water and water with adapted for use in riverine operations. It is vegetative growth. constructed of a monolithic casting of rigid, Í (2) Specific data. light plastic foam approximately 5 centime- Lengjth : 16 feet ters thick with smooth molded fiber glass Width: 4 feet crust inside and out. It has a modified spoon Height: 20 inches Weight: 350 pounds without bow. The Boston Whaler has excellent buoy- load ancy, maneuverability, resistance to tipping, Capacity : and is unsinkable. It can be powered by any Personnel : 6, combat loaded commercial outboard motor ranging from 40 Cargo : 1,500 pounds Propulsion : Outboard motor; 4 to 100 horsepower. Maximum speed varies paddles; 2 poles from 22 to 33 knots depending on the motor Speed : 25 miles per hour with used. motor (2) Specific data. Draft: 2 % inches Armor protection: None Length : 16 feet 7 inches Width: Armament: Receptacle for M60 6 feet 2 inches machinegun pintle Transom height: 21 inches Features : Can be nested; easily Weight: 500 pounds without load portaged ; simple to Capacity : maintain and repair; Personnel : 7, combat loaded noncritical stability; Cargo : 1,750 pounds self-bailing; unsink- Speed : 25 miles per hour with able; can be joined at 40-horsepower motor port and starboard Armor protection: None m. Boston Whaler. Armament: 7.62-mm machinegun (1) General characteristics. The Boston can be mounted in Whaler is a commercially available skiff, bow

164 AGO 20012A € n. Articulated Utility Carrier, M571. Cargo space: Front unit—12 square (1) General characteristics. The M571 feet; rear unit—41 utility carrier is a small, lightweight, unar- Speed : square feet Roads : 30 miles per hour » mored, full-tracked, amphibious vehicle with Cross-country : 20 miles per hour an articulated, tracked rear unit. The rear unit Water: 2 miles per hour is powered when both units are coupled. The Range : 300 miles M571 has an average ground pressure of 1.7 to Gradability: 2.3 psi, providing good mobility in marsh, Forward slope: 60 percent Side slope: 40 percent swamps, and muskeg. The M571 floats and Ground clearance: 12 inches navigates lakes, streams, and slow-moving Vertical obstacle : 18 inches rivers although trim and stability become Turning diameter: 36.5 feet critical as the vehicle approaches its design Ground pressure: 2.34 psi maximum gross weight of 7,450 pounds. The M571 can Fording depth: Floats Armor protection : None on basic model; negotiate moderately inclined, semifirm struc- armor protection tured riverbanks and the dikes in rice paddies. against .30-caliber (2) Specific data. rounds may be added Length : 234 inches at an additional Width : 64 inches weight of 355 pounds Height : per vehicle Armament: Overall : 72 inches None on basic model; Reducible : 56 inches M60 machinegun and Weight: 5,940 pounds 1,800 rounds of am- Capacity : munition may be Crew: 2 added at an addi- Troops : 6 to 8 tional weight of 284 Cargo weight: Front unit—500 pounds pounds; rear unit— o. Cargo Carrier, Full-Tracked, M5U8. I 1,500 pounds (1) General characteristics. The M548

•m

Figure B-52. Carrier, utility, articulated (M571).

» AGO 20012A 165 i

'"'"J! *"■*

■ '111'

1 JS.!**

Figure B-53. Carrier, cargo, 6-ton, tracked (M5US). I

'"%

* •

Figure B-SIf. Marginal terrain vehicle (MTV) XM759.

166 AGO 20012A c cargo carrier is a lightweight, unarmored, full- p. Marginal Terrain Vehicle {MTV), tracked, amphibious vehicle for logistic sup- XM759. port. The suspension and power train compo- (1) General characteristics. The XM759 nents are common to those of the Ml 13 family marginal terrain vehicle (MTV) is a i/^-ton, of vehicles. The M548 is capable of operations soft-tire tracked, cargo and personnel carrier across lakes and streams, extended cross- designed to operate on dry land, in swamps, country travel over rough terrain, and high rice paddies, muskeg, and other adverse ter- speed over improved roads. Like the Ml 13, the rain normally impassable to wheeled and heavy M548 has limited mobility in marshy terrain tracked vehicles. It can transport 14 men or and a limited capability to negotiate three standard pallets of cargo with a total riverbanks and canal banks without aid. The weight of 3,000 pounds. The MTV’s wheel-and- vehicle can carry a 6-ton payload, and the cab track suspension system uses a series of free- seats four men. The cargo deck of the M548 rolling, low-pressure pneumatic tires connected can be bolted in either a high- or low-level at the tire axles by an endless chain. A sprocket position. When in the high level, it makes a and idler arrangement drives the chains and flat bed. In low level, it provides leg room for lays the tires down in front of the vehicle, sitting passengers. The cargo compartment which then rolls over them. The MTV has ex- may be enclosed by bows and a cover. Kits are cellent mobility in a delta-type riverine area. available to adapt the basic M548 cargo carrier (2) Specific data. to other uses such as ammunition carrier or Length : 245 inches prime mover. The M696 recovery vehicle is an Width : 110 inches adaptation of the M548, which uses the stand- Height: ard 5-ton M548 crane and its on-vehicle equip- Overall : 102% inches ment. Reducible : 88 inches Weight: 9.000 pounds net (2) Specific data. Capacity: Length : 232 inches Crew: 2 Width : 105% inches Troops : 14 Height: Cargo weight: 3.000 pounds Overall : 105% inches Cargo size: 52 inches by 148 inches Reducible : 76 inches (3 pallets) Weight: 15,150 pounds net Speed : Capacity: Roads: 35 miles per hour Crew : 1 Cross-country : 8 to 12 miles per hour Troops : 13 plus driver Water : 7 miles per hour Cargo weight: 12,000 pounds Range : 180 miles Cargo size: 130% by 96% inches Gradability : Speed : Forward slope: 60 percent Improved roads: 38 miles per hour Side slope: 45 percent Cross-country : 8 to 12 miles per hour Ground clearance: 30 inches Water: 3.5 miles per hour Vertical obstacle: 36 inches Range : 300 miles on land Trench crossing: 72 inches Gradability : Ground pressure: 1.5 psi Forward slope: 60 percent Fording depth : Floats Side slope: 30 percent Freeboard : 36 inches Ground clearance: 16 inches Armor protection: None Vertical obstacle: 24 inches Armament: None Trench crossing: 66 inches q. Lighter, Amphibious, 5-Ton (LARC-V). Turning radius: 14 feet Ground pressure: (1) General characteristics. The LARC- With payload : 8.5 psi V is a lightweight, aluminum hull, four-wheel, Net weight: 4.6 psi single screw, amphibious vehicle for transport- Fording depth: Floats ing cargo and personnel in over-the-shore Armor protection: None operations from ship to inland transfer points Armament: None; ring mount for .50-caliber machine- and for operations on inland waterways. Cargo gun may be mounted capacity is 5 short tons. Side panels can be over cab removed enabling a forklift to load or unload

AGO 20012A 167 palletized cargo. One 8-cylinder, 300- Light, aft: 3 feet 9 inches horsepower diesel engine provides power. The Loaded, forward: 4 feet 1 inch Loaded, aft: 4 feet 3 inches LARC-V has good surfing capability and can Armor protection : None maneuver through a surf of 3.6 meters and Armament: None plunging breakers. It can ford rivers, lakes, and canals and is marginally suitable for use r. Lighter, Amphibious, 15-Ton (LARC- in swampy or heavily irrigated terrain. It can XV). transport supplies between LST’s and prepared (1) General characteristics. The LARC- landing sites along riverbanks. XV is a medium-weight, aluminum-hull, four- wheel, twin screw, amphibious vehicle for (2) Specific data. transporting cargo and personnel in over-the- Length : 34 feet 10 inches shore operations from ship to inland transfer Width : 10 feet points and for operations on inland waterways. Height: 10 feet 2 inches Weight: 21.000 pounds net with Cargo capacity is 15 short tons. Two 8-cylinder, fuel 300-horsepower, diesel engines provide power. Capacity: The LARC-XV has demonstrated good water Crew: 2 handling characteristics and good mobility on Troops : 25 firm and semifirm soils. It is suitable for trans- ' Cargo weight: 10.000 pounds Cargo space: 16 feet by 9 feet 8 porting supplies between LST’s and prepared inches landing sites along riverbanks. The cab is for- Speed : warded while on land and aft when waterborne. Land: 30 miles per hour Dual controls allow the operator to face either Water: 9 miles per hour direction. Range : Land : 250 miles (2) Specific data. Water: 104 miles Length : 44 feet 6 inches Gradability : Width: 14 feet 7 inches Forward slope: 60 percent Height: 13 feet 8 inches Side slope: 30 percent Weight: 46,800 pounds net with Ground clearance: fuel Hull to ground : 2 feet Capacity : Propeller shroud Crew: 3 to ground: 1 foot 4 inches Troops : 56 Turning radius on Cargo weight: 30,000' pounds land: 36 feet 6 inches Cargo space: 24 feet by 10 feet (3 Vertical obstacle : 18 inches CONEXES or 12 Draft: pallets) Light, forward : 3 feet 3 inches

¡Mail: SHvft

Figure B-55. Lighter, amphibious, resupply, cargo, 5-ton (LARC-V).

168 AGO: 20012A >

Y ARMT / LARC iis?8 L

» Figure B-56. Lighter, amphibious, resupply, cargo, 15-ton (LARC-XV). Ramp opening 9 feet s. Lighter, Amphibious, 60-Ton (LARC- width: LX). i Speed : Improved roads: 30 miles per hour (1) General characteristics. The LARCH Cross-country : 8 to 12 miles per hour LX is a large, steel-hull, four-wheel, twin- Water: 9.5 miles per hour screw, amphibious vehicle for transporting Range : heavy vehicles, cargo, and personnel in over- Land: 403 miles the-shore operation from ship to inland trans- Water: 106 miles Gradability: fer points and for operations on major inland Forward slope: 50 percent waterways. Cargo capacity is 60 short tons; Side slope: 30 percent 100 tons in an emergency. Four 6-cylinder, Ground clearance: 165-horsepower, diesel engines provide power. Hull to ground: 2 feet 5% inches The draft of 2.4 meters requires a firm beach Propeller shroud 1 foot 4% inches to ground: extending into the water for a considerable Turning radius on 49 feet 10% inches distance. Its maneuverability is limited by a land: turning radius of 23 meters. Because of its Vertical obstacle: 24 inches size, the LARC-LX is limited to transporting Draft : cargo and personnel from ships to prepared Light, forward: 1 foot 5Vz inches Light, aft: 2 feet 2% inches landing sites and readily accessible inland Loaded, forward: 2 feet 9% inches transfer points. Loaded, aft: 2 feet 10% inches (2) Specific data. Armor protection: None Length: 62 feet 6 inches Armament: None Width : 26 feet 7 inches Height: 19 feet 5 inches t AGO 20012A 169 i

yr Î

Figure 3-57. Lighter, amphibious, resupply, cargo, 60-ton (LARC-LX).

r. ' .

Figure B-58. Truck, cargo, amphibious, 1 Vi-ton, 6x6, M561.

AGO 20012A c Weight: 199,000 pounds net with t. Truck, Cargo, Amphibious, 1 y^-Ton, 6x6 fuel M561. Capacity : (1) General characteristics. The M561 is Crew: 8 Troops : 125; 200 in an emer- a dual-body, wheeled, 6x6 vehicle. Its oversize, gency low-pressure tires provide an average ground Cargo weight: 60 short tons; 100 short pressure of 4.8 to 6.0 psi. The vehicle floats, tons in an emergency can navigate streams and slow-moving rivers, Cargo space: 38 feet 3 inches by 13 and can negotiate moderately firm structured feet 8 inches (3 vehicles) Ramp opening 14 feet 6 inches (2) Specific data. width : Length : 18 feet 5 inches Speed : Width : 7 feet Improved roads : 14 miles per hour Height: 5 feet 2 inches Cross-country : 8 to 12 miles per hour Weight: 6,270 pounds Water : 7 miles per hour Capacity : Range : Weight: 2,500 pounds Land : 150 miles Cargo: 255 cubic feet (54 Water : 75 miles square feet) Gradability : Personnel : 10 including operator Forward slope : 40 percent Speed : Side slope: 40 percent Improved roads: 55 miles per hour Ground clearance: Cross-country : 8 to 12 miles per hour Unloaded: 3 feet Water: IV2 to 2 miles per hour Loaded : 2 feet % inch Turning radius on 75 feet Gradability : 60 percent land: Side slope: 30 percent Vertical obstacle: 30 inches Ground clearance: 15 inches Draft : Range : 520 miles highway Light, forward: 6 feet cruise; 350 miles Light, aft: 7 feet 2 inches (estimated) cross Loaded, forward : 7 feet 11 inches country Loaded, aft: 8 feet 8 inches Vertical obstacle: 15 inches Armor protection: None Armor protection : None Armament: None Armament: None

¡$ 3 r ,y ■

Figure B-59. Truck, cargo, 5-ton, 8x8 (M656).

AGO 20012A 171 u. Truck, Cargo, 5-Ton, 8x8 (M656). v. Portable Artillery Firing Platform. (1) General characteristics. The M656 is (1) General characteristics. The portable capable of cross-country operations on semifirm artillery firing platform, designed for the. terrain. It floats and navigates lakes, streams, M102, 105-mm howitzer, permits establishing slow-moving rivers, and firm-structured river- fire bases in rice paddies and soft muddy areas banks. The average ground pressure of 11 or from which accurate artillery fires would 12 psi may prevent operations over heavily otherwise be nearly impossible. The platform irrigated and swampy terrain. consists of a 22-foot square aluminum structure with a plywood deck and adjustable legs (2) Specific data. at the corners. At the tips of these legs, in con- Length : 23 feet tact with the mud, are 4-foot square, perforated Width: 8 feet metal bases that sink into the mud and reach Height: 8 feet lOVz inches the hardpan for stability. The platform is air- Weight: 15,600 pounds Capacity: transportable by CH-47 helicopter as an ex- Weight: 10,400 pounds ternal load. Cargo : 110 square feet (2) Specific data. Personnel : 18 including crew Size 22-foot square Weight: 7,300 pounds

Figure B—60. Portable artillery firing platform.

172 AGO 20012A APPENDIX C

BOAT PROCEDURES

Section I. ASSAULT BOATS

C-l. General (1) Powered watercraft require sufficient In a riverine area, units equipped with plastic power for the boat to negotiate the waterway assault boats perform missions similar to those when traveling against known currents. assigned to dismounted units in other areas. (2) Units inspect all boats and equipment Assault boats increase mobility and permit before departure to insure that all equipment units to operate at greater speeds; cover is in operating condition and that paddles and greater distances; and carry more equipment, life preservers are aboard. Personnel insure weapons, and ammunition. Personnel conduct- that adequate fuel and lubricants are available ing reconnaissance and security tasks, main- in each boat. taining contact between friendly units, and (3) Sufficient repair parts for emergency clearing blocked waterways can use assault repairs must be available in case of breakdown. boats effectively. Units, using assault boats (4) Signals for use between boats require for transportation, secure and hold critical rehearsal. Personnel insure that radio equip- terrain features or relieve or reinforce isolated ment is operating properly and on the correct units. Assault boats may transport part of a frequency. larger force that uses other means of trans- (5) In case a boat is swamped or am- portation for combat operations. Units nor- bushed, all personnel must be aware of the mally use assault boats on relatively secure rendezvous points along the route. routes and not for assaults on known enemy c. Certain missions require that an automa- positions. tic weapon be mounted on the boat. The ground mount for this weapon must be available in C-2. Planning the boat in case the weapon has to be used a. Careful planning is necessary before using ashore. At least one compass and one watch assault boats on inland waterways. Some and, if possible, a radio and binoculars are streams and canals are navigable for only necessary for each boat. short distances. Prior training of boat operators is essential. Adequate reconnaissance is C-3. Equipment necessary before movement. Although the a. Boat Selection. Several factors influence course of a river or stream often provides the the performance of a boat: hull form, hull easiest and safest route of advance, it also material, weight, type of motor and propeller, channels movement and may lead to an am- location of the motor, and distribution of bush. Careless or hasty selection of routes can weight. In general, the intended use is the result in delays or loss of equipment and men. determining factor in choosing a specific type b. When the use of assault boats is contem- of boat. The width, depth, and velocity of the plated, planners consider both the prepara- current are considerations in selecting a boat tion phase and the actual water movement. for military use. Rubber boats are chosen when Certain aspects peculiar to the use of boats secrecy and stealth are the prime determining require special attention. factors. Paddles or poles, wrapped with cloth,

AGO 20012A 173 produce less noise than unwrapped poles. Use (2) Avoid hitting floating objects and of native boats may be advantageous, in some sandbars. cases, because they are built to operate in the (3) Do not allow the motor to run for area and are less conspicuous than military long periods at idle or very low speed. Carbon craft. Locally made rafts may also be available builds up rapidly in slow-running, 2-cycle for use. engines. b. Stowage. (4) Slow the engine before shifting. A (1) Personnelfast, stow improper items ofshift boat can equip- cause engine break- ment according to approved load plans for down in a critical situation. rapid inventory and accessibility, even in dark- (5) Allow the motor to warm up before ness. operating at high speed. Accelerate and Typical items in each assault boat are— decelerate smoothly to avoid straining the Anchor and 30 feet of line _ . _ _ 1 engine. Mooring lines, 10 feet with eye on each end. 2 (6) For 2-cycle engines, mix gasoline and Bailing can i Repair parts for outboard motor shearpins, oil thoroughly and in proper proportion. Fail- propeller cone, propeller, spark plugs) - _ 1 set ure to use enough oil or to mix well can cause Collapsible plastic water container . 1 the motor to burn out. Too much oil results in Gas cans 2 heavy carbon deposits. WP and smoke grenades ... 4 (7) Handle the fuel line with care to pre- Emergency rations 5 First aid kit _ 1 vent damage where it joins the connectors. Seizing line (30 foot) 1 b. Preventive Maintenance. Hooded flashlight with colored lens inserts. 1 (1) Keep the boat and motor clean and Camouflage net 1 lubricated according to the technical manual Paddles 6 (TM) for the item. Particular emphasis is Poles (12 foot) 2 necessary on boat fittings, underwater body, (2) By attaching individual weapons and and motor lower unit. equipment to themselves with a line, personnel (2) When operating in brackish or salt can retrieve these items if the boat is swamped water, take the boat out of the water after use. or overturned. Clean the bottom regularly and flush the motor (3) Personnel securely stow other sup- with clean, fresh water. plies, equipment, and crew-served weapons to (3) Include a set of spare spark plugs prevent their loss or injury to personnel if the with each motor. Operators remove, inspect, boat capsizes. Crew-served weapons have a and clean or replace them according to the TM marker float and line attached to assist in re- for the particular motor. trieval. Each boat in the formation carries a (4) If the boat strikes an object in the variety of supplies and equipment so that the water, the hull and motor lower unit require loss of one boat does not result in the abor- inspection both for cracks and for damage to tion of the mission. the propeller, propeller cap, cotter key, and shearpin. Operators replace damaged or worn C-4. Care of Boats and Motors parts when discovered because minor defects The key to dependable service from outboard can unbalance the motor and cause failure at motors and assault boats is meticulous organi- high revolutions per minute. zational maintenance and proper operation. (5) Carry spare shearpins. Use only the A boat or motor used properly in normal correct-issue shearpins. When issue pins are operations more likely withstands the abuse it not available, an improvised pin of equally gets under combat conditions. Recommended soft or softer material than the authorized one precautions in the use of boats and motors is permissible. are— a. Proper Operation. C-5. Navigation (1) Operate at a.moderate Boat operators speeds andto slow other key personnel normal wear and deterioration of both boat train in the basic principles of river naviga- and motor. tion before their unit begins operation on

174 AGO 20012A waterways. Boat operations may appear sim- going downstream. Waterway channels and ple, but certain techniques require mastering. river obstacles indicate their locations by Training also includes use of native watercraft. natural signs. By learning these signs and b. Stretches of waterways are known as watching for them, the boat operator can navi- curve and reach: the curve is a turn in the gate the rivers and streams safely and com- waterway course; the reach is a straight por- fortably and without damage to his boat or tion of the waterway. motor. The boat operator requires thorough c. The boat operator can read a waterway training before operating the boat alone. more easily when going upstream than when d. The greatest current velocities and the

I :

I -TTTTTTTTT

LEGEND. -Whirlpool. — Current. Boat movement.

Figure C—l. Moving from one channel to another.

AGO 20012A 175 steepest gradients are generally found near boat to overturn or be torn apart. A boat that the source of a river. Velocities may vary at overturns in sweepers exposes occupants to any point of the river within short stretches double danger. The tree branches can puncture or between points across a channel. Flow is pneumatic life vests or catch and hold men swiftest where the channel constricts and under water. slowest where the stream spreads out broad h. When moving from one channel to an- and shallow. In a meandering stream, centrif- other channel that is perpendicular to the first, ugal force throws the water to the outside of the boat operator navigates at right angles curves so that the deepest water is normally with the current into which he is traveling. near the outside bends. Sandbars and shallow He passes on the downstream side of the per- water are normally on the inside of curves. In pendicular channel, proceeds upstream a short spite of this general rule, underwater obstruc- distance, and then turns back into the flow of tions remain a problem. These obstructions the new current. A power boat never goes into can be present even in the deepest channels, fast water at full throttle. The operator re- particularly in tidal waterways. duces speed to about half until he knows what e. The surface of the water directly to the lies ahead (fig. C-l). front is a key to successful navigation. Lightly i. Reconnaissance determines that the river rippled water, where no wind is blowing, or canal is of sufficient width and depth to ac- usually indicates shallow water. A long un- commodate the boat or watercraft used. If a dulating wave indicates deep water and fast unit is moving only a short distance or to a current. A smooth surface usually indicates well-defined debarkation point, a hasty route deep water and slightly lessened velocity. A selection may be the only preparation neces- vee in the surface of the water generally in- sary. The length of the move increases the dicates an obstruction lying parallel with the chance of a navigational error. For a short direction of current. Current velocity and the move, a simple plan committed to memory size of the obstruction together determine the usually suffices. For example, “We will move size of the vee. The vee is only an indication of west until we reach the canal intersection about the size of that portion of the obstruction ly- 1,500 meters from here.” ing very near the water surface; it does not j. The use of a navigator and an observer indicate the total size of the obstruction. A is the best method to locate an exact position rolled surface, at a particular point, usually on an inland waterway. Unit personnel train indicates an obstruction, such as a log or tree in the performance of these duties. The navi- lying perpendicular to the direction of current. gator requires a map, a compass, a flashlight, f. In tidal waterways, silt deltas or shoals and a pencil. During darkness, he lies under a are often found on both ends of midchannel poncho on the floor of the boat. The poncho islands and on both sides of the mouths of en- prevents anyone on or near the waterway from tering waterways. The tidal flow backing up seeing a light that he may be using. The ob- into tributaries usually forms a shoal across server, well forward in the boat, calls the the mouth. Breaks in the shoal are near the turns, bends, intersections, and other land- shore rather than in midstream. marks to the navigator. With the aid of his g. The coxswain (boat operator) positions compass, the navigator associates this infor- himself where he can see the river course and mation with his present position on the river the water surface. Occupants of the boat re- and records it for future use. The observer and main seated so they do not obstruct the the navigator work together to maintain a operator’s view or suddenly shift the balance knowledge of their location at all times. By us- of the boat. The coxswain avoids ripples, boils, ing this navigational method, the boat can and other indications of disturbed water be- move to any accessible predesignated landing cause they can force his boat into obstructions sites. This is particularly important on patrol that can tear out its bottom. He also avoids missions when boats provide transportation sweepers, trees that have been pulled into the for infiltration into enemy areas. river or stream by collapsing banks, or trees k. Another aid to navigation is a strip map rooted to the bottom. A collision may cause a showing critical points drawn on a piece of

AGO 20012A luminous tape. A time-distance method is also ticularly suitable to maintain visual surveil- available. The time from the point of origin to lance of one or both banks. These formations the first checkpoint is noted and compared permit excellent firepower to the front and with the entire distance to travel. This pro- good firepower to one or both flanks. vides an estimate at the time required to complete the movement. If time of arrival at C-8. Control and Coordination destination is critical, reverse planning by the A simple, rapid, and reliable means of boat-to- time-distance method provides the required boat communication is necessary. Arm and starting time. hand signals are satisfactory, but waterborne elements require additional immediate-action C-6. Organization procedures and backup communication means a. Each assault boat transports at least four to insure smooth functioning. The commander persons including the coxswain, who is an ex- assigns checkpoints along the route. Reconnais- perienced operator, trained in river navigation. sance aircraft communicate directly with a He may or may not also be the boat comman- waterborne element either by using radio, der. Other personnel perform duties to fulfill when available, or by dropping messages. Use the requirements for navigation, observation, of a simple, rapid means of identification is rowing, poling, etc. The size of the boat deter- necessary to coordinate the waterborne move- mines the size of the crew. ment with other friendly forces in the area. b. Normally, an element moving on water consists of at least two boats to provide some C-9. Reaction to Enemy Fire depth, flexibility, and safety if one boat comes a. The reaction of troops moving in assault under enemy fire, is swamped, or is swept into boats to fires from an enemy outpost or am- obstructions. The number of men, weapons, bush depends on the mission. When the mis- and boats necessary for the movement depends sion requires avoiding contact, continued on the mission, but units of more than eight movement by waterway may be extremely boats normally form into smaller maneuver difficult. The waterborne element may wait elements. When assigning personnel to boats, until darkness and then move under cover of the commander tries to maintain tactical unity. the opposite bank. It may be necessary to dismount and continue the movement on foot. C-7. Formations b. When the commander has authority to The tactics of small waterborne units are sim- fight, he has several possible courses of action. ilar to those of other small mounted and (1) When time is critical, the element dismounted elements. Normal formations (col- maintains forward movement and executes a umn, parallel columns, vee, wedge, and coordinated plan for suppressive fire on the echelon) are applicable to water movement. enemy position. The situation and mission influence the choice (2) An assault team may attack the am- of formation. bush force or place a smokescreen between it a. The column formation, or a variation, is and the boats. When possible, the ambush frequently a choice because it allows all craft force and enemy positions are overrun. to use the same water and cover. Therefore, c. A mission to seek out and eliminate en- the risk of accidental grounding decreases. A emy forces encountered requires a more de- disadvantage of the column formation is its liberate attack on the enemy force. For ex- provision of minimum firepower, surveillance, ample, when the leading boat comes under and security to the front. enemy fire, personnel in the two lead boats b. The vee formation permits excellent fire- beach their craft and return the enemy’s fire. power to the front and good firepower to each The element leader goes ashore and, using all flank. It is useful during periods of reduced available cover and concealment, moves for- visibility when units maintain surveillance of ward to reconnoiter the ambush site. He de- both banks and maintain boat-to-boat visual cides how best to use his force to destroy the contact. enemy position quickly. By radio or arm and c. The wedge or echelon formations are par- hand signal, he orders the element to beach all

AGO 20012A 177 boats and to move forward. At least one auto- maintains all-round security and continues to matic weapon remains at the boat assembly improve the position until it departs. area. Boat operators protect their boats with c. Secrecy of movement is difficult when automatic or individual weapons. After cap- using a motor and traveling against the cur- ture or destruction of the enemy, the element rent. At night, motor noise can be heard up continues the mission. to 8 kilometers away. (The noise from some newer types of motors travels less than 500 C— H ©. vemeirafl meters.) Movement with the current, without a. For administrative moves on extremely using the motor, reduces noise. wide rivers, boats normally move along the d. Movement may be continuous, by succes- center of the river beyond the range of effec- sive bounds, or by alternate bounds. FM 17- tive small-arms fire. On narrower waterways, 36 provides an explanation of methods of to take advantage of natural concealment, movement. movement is as close to the shoreline as is consistent with the water mine threat. Boats €-n. Nighf Operations maintain an interval of 45 to 90 meters to Movement after dark assists in avoiding de- maintain dispersal and to prevent collisions. tection by the enemy. Special considerations Boats always maintain their relative positions for moving on waterways at night are as fol- in the formation. The two lead boats operate lows: as a team, moving from one observation point a. Waterways are more difficult to read, and to another. Sharp bends in a river frequently dangerous areas are more difficult to detect. obscure the view of the river ahead. Person- b. All noises are audible at greater dis- nel from one of the two lead boats go ashore tances. to reconnoiter the river beyond the curve. c. Coordination with friendly units is man- Automatic weapons from the other boat cover datory. the personnel ashore. Footprints along the d. Lights and light-producing weapons such banks of the waterway may indicate the pres- as white phosphorous (WP) grenades and ence of enemy troops; waterfowl, suddenly flares are effective, both offensively and de- alarmed and flying toward the unit, usually fensively. indicate the movement of humans along the e. Concealment along waterway banks is river. Tributaries emptying into the waterway more effective. along the route are not entered unless re- /. Deception is more effective when units quired by the mission. Many of these tribu- use native craft. taries may not be navigable, and entering g. Detailed advance planning and rehears- them may result in damage to the boats or als are necessary to insure prompt reaction by may unnecessarily delay the movement. When all personnel. islands are encountered, the boats move h. Standing operating procedure (SOP) through the near channel, avoiding open, ex- stowage of equipment insures its location posed areas. and use without lights. b. The element leader may order halts to i. Since enemy forces frequently employ send messages, rest, eat, or reconnoiter spe- reconnaissance by fire, friendly units with- cific areas. The area selected for a halt should hold fire until obviously the enemy is firing provide cover, concealment, and good firing at the boat. positions and favor defense. The element Seefîî®® DO. Î^OOF9 CAMELS organization, but an infantry platoon is us- a. Each unit forms boat teams when it un- ually the basis of the team. Positioning boats dertakes a waterborne operation. A boat team in the formation achieves unit integrity or consists of the Army troops embarked in one dispersion, as required. watercraft. An armored troop carrier (ATC) b. The senior Army man in each craft is boat team may not correspond exactly to unit normally the boat team commander. He and

AGO 20012A Figure C-2. AMMI barge moored alongside barracks ship. his designated assistant supervise the loading (2) Unless a dry ramp landing is prob- of Army personnel and equipment. The boat able, crew-served weapons remain in man- team commander also controls and directs the portable sections and are not assembled prior actions of embarked personnel during the to landing. They are not loaded until neces- movement. sary, and then only under careful supervision. c. This section, primarily for guidance of b. Individuals either wear or otherwise pro- boat team commanders and their assistants, tect all individual equipment. They wear hel- contains information on types of procedures mets and lifejackets at all times. They wear employed. The unit SOP may modify the pro- packs if shock-absorbent seats are available; cedures herein. if not, personnel sit on their packs. Individual weapons are clear; safety is on; and maga- C-13. Preparation for Movement zines are removed while onboard the ATC. All a. Major threats to embarked troops dur- personnel sit or lie in a braced position to ing movement are shrapnel and mine. A mine best absorb shock from below. Their move- detonated near a boat can incapacitate a large ment about the ATC cargo well is minimal. number of men if the boat team commander When standing, their weight is evenly distri- has failed to take proper precautions. Ac- buted on both legs, and their knees are flexed. cidental firing of weapons is also a hazard. C-T4. Loading (1) The boat team stows and secures supplies and equipment to prevent their becom- a. The boat team commander organizes his ing missile hazards. team to expedite loading and securing equip-

AGO 20012A 179 ment in the ATC. Procedures for loading (7) Insure that— through the bow ramp, from shore, pier, or (a) Men are in assigned positions. AMMI barges are relatively simple (fig. C-2). (b) Muzzles of weapons are all pointed They require commonsense, safety precau- outboard. tions, and a reasonably even distribution of c. During Movement. weight in the cargo space. Troops and vehicles (1) Keep movement of troops in the car- load, prepared for speedy unloading. go well to a minimum. b. AMMI barges normally are(2) moored Insure along- that all personnel wear hel- side APB’s and APL’s. Loading from these mets, lifejackets, and packs. barges follows the same general procedures (3) Continually inspect for potential mis- as loading from a pier. To prevent congestion sile hazards. in companionways, on deck, or on the AMMI (4) Check troops for proper body posi- barge, members of boat teams remain in des- tions. ignated assembly areas until notified of their (5) Coordinate with coxswain to train boat’s arrival alongside. After notification, the selected troops in immediate action procedures. team moves to the designated loading point (6) Keep troops awake and alert. During on the AMMI barge and loads aboard its boat. lengthy movements, personnel may sleep. (7) Provide immediate action assistance C—15. Boat Team Commander's Checklist as requested. a. Preparation. d. Assault Landing. (1) Supervise boat team in assembly and (1) Check individual equipment prior to loading areas. debarkation. (2) Appoint boat team members to re- (2) Supervise loading and locking of in- quired duties. dividual weapons. (a) Assistant boat team commanders. (3) Supervise assembly of equipment (b) Two .50-caliber gunners. going ashore. (c) Four 7.62-mm machinegun gun- (4) Supervise removal of lifejackets pri- ners. or to landing. (d) Two grenadiers. (5) When ramp is fully down, lead the (e) Two bowline handlers/man-over- boat team out as fast as possible. board lookouts. C-16. Immediate Action Procedures (3) Assign personnel and equipment to positions in the boat in accordance with the a. Embarked troops may assist boat crews ground tactical plan. during the movement. Selected individuals re- (4) Reconnoiter the route from assem- ceive training in performing boat crew duties. bly area to loading point. This provides trained personnel when the boat (5) Muster boat teams in assembly area crew requires assistance. at required time. b. Immediate action procedures that may b. Loading. require assistance from embarked troops are— (1) Inspect each member for uniform, (1) Responding to enemy fire. Embarked rations, and ammunition as well as adjustment troops may replace wounded boat crewmen or of equipment. fire organic grenade launchers and automatic (2) On order, lead boat team from as- weapons from inside the cargo well. Firing sembly area to loading station. from maneuvering boats in a large formation (3) Report boat team readiness to load- is extremely dangerous and requires strict ing station officer. fire discipline. Engine and weapon noise requires gunners’ alertness to insure effective (4) Supervise loading of crew-served fire control. Gunners firing from the cargo weapons and equipment. well fire their weapons over the gunwale and (5) On order, commence and supervise normally need a fire controller. The controller loading. insures that all personnel firing from the car- (6) Inform coxswain (crew chief) of the go well receive and understand fire orders. ATC when all men and equipment are aboard.

180 AGO 20012A (2) Assisting in damage control. When (ft) Move over gunwale, keeping as low the ATC crew becomes involved in extensive as possible on the side away from heaviest fire. firefighting or damage control, they request (c) Begin watching for approaching assistance from the embarked troops in man- boats. Do not swim to shore. ning weapons, moving cargo, shoring, or as- (d) Float on back and close to water signing men to work with boat crew person- surface to reduce effects of underwater explo- nel. Embarked personnel keep clear of access sions and chances of being hit by boat pro- routes and working space around the damaged pellers. area. However, initiative helps to reduce dam- (e) Consider removing lifejacket to age. For example, if a large hole is opened be- present a smaller target. low the waterline in the cargo well area, em- (/) When burning oil is floating on the barked troops may be able to stop the flow of water, personnel must swim underwater and water quickly by stuffing mattresses into the surface only to take a breath, and then only hole and using the pipe bunk frames for shor- after splashing an area clear of oil. ing. Designated personnel know the location (6) Man overboard. All persons require and characteristics of firefighting equipment. training to react to the call “man overboard.” (3) Securing a beached boat. A boat may When a man is seen in the water, shout beach unexpectedly as a result of breakdown “Man overboard,” adding “port side” (left) or or combat damage. If possible, the boat is “starboard” (right), as the case may be. Des- towed off immediately and/or the troops and ignated personnel observe through the two crew are transferred. However, the embarked ports in the ramp ; and if, possible, a man is troops may assist in establishing local security high enough on the bow ramp to point to- until the boat is towed off or the troops and ward the person in the water. When any boat crew are transferred to another boat. Boat reports a man overboard, all boats in the move- teams develop a plan for immediate execution. ment group receive the notification and are (4) Assisting in towing operations. The given the location of the boat from which he boat crew, unassisted, normally accomplish fell. towing operations. When under fire, however, the boat crew may man all boat crew stations C-17. Assault Landings and execute a tow with assistance of em- a. Although an organized enemy may not barked troops. Expeditious towing requires oppose the landing, embarked troops always rapid and proper line handling. Troops par- conduct an assault landing. The landing con- ticipating in waterborne operations require a sists of two phases : preparation and movement familiarity with towing arrangements. ashore. (5) Abandoning boat. Before troops b. Troops remove lifejackets prior to land- abandon a boat, the boat is normally taken ing and leave them in the boat. Just before under tow or run aground. The troops may landing, troops put on packs, load and lock transfer to another craft, or they may have to weapons, and assemble equipment to be cargo into the water under fire. When abandon- ried ashore. ing a boat under fire, embarked troops— c. When the ramp is fully down, troops de- (a) Wear lifejacket and helmet. Take part the boat quickly. If a dry ramp landing is weapons if conditions permit. not possible, lines, beach matting, or planks assist in crossing mud.

AGO 20012A 181 APPENDIX D

CANAL-CROSSING TECHNIQUES FOR MECHANIZED VEHICLES

D-l. General test reports. This appendix provides informa- Combat experience under internal defense con- tion on these canal-crossing techniques. Each ditions is inundated areas has demonstrated technique is applicable to both the Ml 13 the need for developing means for expediting armored personnel carrier (APC) and the M- canal crossings of mechanized and armored 114 command and reconnaissance vehicle. Spe- cavalry units. This need particularly applies cific techniques, discussed in succeeding para- in the Mekong River Delta of South Vietnam, graphs, include the following: where muddy-bottomed, steep-banked, swift- a. Capstan-anchor. current canals have caused loss of operational b. Push bar. momentum and, occasionally, complete termi- c. Balk aluminum bridging. nation of the operations. d. Push method. e. Employment of demolitions. D—2. Techniques of Canal Crossing f. Brush fill. Several effective techniques of expediting canal g. Towing. crossings and vehicle recovery have been de- h. Block and tackle (waterborne). veloped and reported in interim reports and i. Block and tackle (landborne).

1 X

$*■ m

Figure D—l. Troops prepare to sink the anchor.

182 AGO 20012A D-3. Capstan-Anchor Vehicle Recovery ï£1s.£i' a. The capstan-anchor method of self-recovery, depicted in figures D-l through D-6, is one of the most successful techniques developed for existing steep-banked canals. b. This expedient features steel adapters permanently bolted to the vehicle drive sprocket and aluminum capstans fastened to the adapter by means of a single T-lug. c. It uses auger-type ground anchors and standard marine-type anchors as “dead men” (fig. D-l). Auger-type ground anchors consist of augers, either 6- or 8-inch diameter and auger eyes, permanently affixed to 6-foot long steel pipes. The %-inch steel pipes for the 6-inch auger, and the 1%-inch for the 8- inch auger are satisfactory. Timbers, buried at ground level directly in front of the ground anchor eye, distribute the pull over a large area and provide a firm anchor. Failure to use the timber may bend the anchor shaft. Personnel fasten a 1-inch nylon rope to the capstans and pass the rope through the eyes of the imbedded anchors, take up all slack in the rope, and tie it to the anchor. Normal sprocket Figure D—2. The anchor is sunk, using the vehicle on action allows the vehicle to recover itself. The equipment materiel (OEM) crowbar. direction of pull must remain at 90°. The rope j. Log bearings. climbs the rim of the capstan and becomes k. S-hook. entangled in the sprocket and track if the ve- l. Swift-current crossings. hicle turns sideways during the recovery.

Figure DS. Nylon rope is threaded through the eye of anchor. 183 AGO 20012A. hole. (A ^-inch-square drive socket wrench assists in tightening the T-bolt.) (c) To secure the rope to the left side of the vehicle, extend about 12 inches of the rope through one of the holes on the outside ■r*: flange, starting from the inboard side. Pass this end back through the adjacent clockwise hole. Now securely wind the main body of the rope over the loose end clockwise around the drum two or three complete turns. (d) The procedure for securing the rope on the right side is similar to that for the left side. On both sides of the vehicle, extend the rope forward from the underside of the capstan drum. r?v%- (e) After securing the rope on both drums on the vehicle, select an immovable ob- i&a ject, or dead man, as described in paragraph D-3c, as nearly in front of the vehicle as Figure D-U* Nylon rope is threaded through the outer possible so that the ropes directly approach flange and wrapped on the capstan. the drums. Remove all slack from the ropes d. A well-trained crew, using this field ex- and secure to the immovable object or dead pedient, can cross a waterway in from 15 to man. Using one long rope with each end se- 20 minutes. cured to a drum and the middle allowed to (1) Operations after vehicle is immobile, slip around or through the immovable object (a) Remove sufficient mud from is better than using two separate ropes. How- around the adapter to expose the mounting ever, two separate ropes are satisfactory, pro- shroud, locating pins, and threaded center vided tension on each rope is approximately hole. equal. (&) Install the drum by alining the (/) Place the vehicle transmission in holes in the drum with the pins on the adapter low range (1-2) and slowly proceed out of the and screwing the T-bolt firmly into the center mired area.

Figure D-5. The recovery is completed.

184 AGO 20012A ■Buried timber

s Capstan

er-A2 JL

Detail of ground anchor

5°

Figure D-6. Schematic drawing of the capstan-anchor recovery.

(2) Capstan installation procedure for D-4. Push Bar the Ml 14. Installation of capstans to fit the a. A locally fabricated push bar, developed Ml 14 is similar to that outlined in the sub- to facilitate M113 crossing of the innumerable paragraphs above. small canals found in the Mekong Delta region, is shown in figures D-7 through D-12.

AGO 20012A 185 Figure D—9. Closeup of steel adapter mounted on vehicle tow eye.

Figure D-7. Front view of M113 with push bar attached.

Figure D-8. Steel adapters mounted on~MHS tow-eyes^.

186 AGO 20012A TS m '■fXc jas*

¿¿¿gsKw:

^¿‘-3

síS

BTTO £4.

Figure D-10. A ball-and-socket joint affords universal action to the push foot.-

tS“*~ -%"^rf-3Sï-^5-s» ^ .- -77 - J » i* ''«îirv.s'j,-!''„-.¿«sc •>>« V ^ i'v’- *■ i.--r.-*; ■. -"' ;í-y

>,r, vV

Figure D—ll. The pushing operation starts. Both vehicles use 1—2 drive range.

b. The fabricated push bar replaces the log- d. The wooden 4- by 4-inch timbers shown pushing method that required dismounted in the figures are adequate for average cross- troops to position the log between the pushed ings. These timbers require reinforcement at and the pushing vehicle. the center point to prevent buckling outward c. This field expedient is in an early stage under heavy stress. of development and requires development of a e. The push bar remains on top of the ve- small hand-operated winch to raise or lower hicle until required. the “push foot.”

AGO 20012A 187 raar^-

Figure D-12. The exit is completed.

D-5. Balk Aluminum Bridging a. Balk aluminum bridge sections of 8- and 15-foot lengths are available through normal supply channels. The sections are buoyant and are suitable for spanning short gaps, either dry or wet or to corduroy a road or canal bank (figs. D-13 through D-15). b. Units, using items available through normal supply channels, can fabricate a launcher í attachment for the APC to carry and launch a 30-foot deck balk bridge.

« Figure D-H. Vehicle begins movement across canal. D-6. Push Method a. The push method (figs. D-16 and D-17) ¡5Sr employs one or more carriers pushing a mired $ carrier. Normally, push bars are 4- by 4-inch timbers or short sections of balk aluminum bridging. Small logs may substitute for the timbers or balk aluminum bridging. b. Units use the push method extensively in crossing paddies, bogs, and narrow canals.

Figure D-13. Section of bridging being placed Daisy chain refers to the use of two or more over dry gap. vehicles to push the mired vehicle. ( 188 AGO 20012A Units, use TNT or composition C4 as the explosive when reducing obstacles. Troops use shovels to dig holes or the steel shaft of the ground anchor to drill holes to emplace explosive. The exit site, prepared by demolition, may not be suitable for unassisted exit and will often require a push or pull expedient. c. To simplify the calculations for obstacle reduction by demolitions, a single distance “X” in feet determines charge sizes and locations, expressed in terms of this “X” distance. Charges consist of 10 pounds of explosive per foot of depth of the charge. Figure D-18 explains how to calculate this distance and how to determine the depths of the charges. Figure D—15. Corduroy road assists exit on To create a breach in the obstacle sufficiently far bank of canal. wide to permit easy exit normally requires two charges, 5 feet apart. b-7. Employment of Demolitions d. Use of demolitions with standard breach- a. A frequent obstacle encountered is the ing techniques can breach or weaken large ¡exit bank of a canal or river that is too steep dikes. ¡for the M113 and M114 to climb. Addition- ally, dikes that separate rice paddies some- e. Applicable training literature adequately itimes become obstacles when they are impos- outlines detailed techniques of charge prepa- Isible to climb or breach by impact. Many vari- ration, fusing, and firing of demolitions. ations and degrees of conditions exist when 'crossing canals—the vehicle may be swim- D-8. Brush Fill ming, or it may have firm contact with the This method is a field expedient in the truest bottom ; the crest of the bank may be above or sense. Brush fill relies entirely on vegetation, below the top of the vehicle ; the bank may be which is abundant throughout the country. It vertical or sloped. is an effective and simple means of crossing b. The employment of demolitions to assist muddy bogs and canals (figs. D-19 and D-20). in exiting a canal is not a crossing means.

3rtSrr:

^st=t

Figure D—16. Using a timber, a vehicle pushes the mired vehicle.

AGO 20012A 189 i

«*■

i*C sir; *•*

Figure D—17. “Daisy chain'* method of pushing. D-9. Towing operation, and all vehicles pull in unison at Use of the towing technique is extensive dur- his command. ing operations in inundated areas. In many instances, vehicles sink to a depth that makes D-11. Block and Tackle (Landborne) attachment of the cable to the towing hook The block-and-tackle method is a substitute for difficult. To overcome this difficulty, the unit the capstan-anchor method. With a suitable may attach a 100-foot towing cable to the tow- dead man on the far bank, the pulling vehicle ing hook before the lead vehicle enters a canal does not have to be on the far bank (fig. D- or bog. 22). D-10. Block and Tackle (Waterborne) D-12. Log Bearings a. The waterborne method of vehicle recov- a. In some instances, simultaneous lifting ery is limited in application and is shown only and pulling of vehicles are necessary. A simple for purposes of illustrating the ingenuity often way to provide this lift is to place logs or required in negotiating inundated areas. heavy timbers across the top of vehicle located b. This method is unique in that the effort, at the edge of a canal. The tow cable passes in this instance, pulls the mired vehicle into over these logs or timbers. the obstacle rather than out of it. Equipment b. For this method of recovery, at least two required to use this technique is available vehicles are necessary on the recovery bank. through normal supply channels. One vehicle, with the logs, redirects the angle c. Figure D-21 shows vehicle 1 mired in of pull so that the vehicle in the waterway is mud on the bank of a canal and vehicles 2 lifted as well as moved forward. As the ve- through 9 waterborne on the canal. Canals hicle in the waterway moves up and out, the may be from 9 to 12 meters wide. A block vehicle with the logs gradually moves forward and tackle threaded with cable connects the (fig. D-23). left front lifting eye of vehicle 2 to the towing hook of vehicle 1. Vehicles 3 and 5 are dead D-13. S-Hook men for vehicles 2 and 4 to keep them near the a. The S-hook is a simple device, easily center of the waterway. All vehicles use tow- manufactured, that provides a means of ating cables to pull in the direction shown by taching one end of a tow cable to a vehicle arrows. An individual on vehicle 4 controls the track.

190 AGO 20012A D FT (Craters) ✓

LLEI

CASE I Top surface of vehicle is lower than crest of bank. Distancexin feet = 5+distance D in feet.

X (8)

/ ft m X.8 X.8 i(r)4'4 < 2 T X 8 it (Craters)

Canal

Charge depths

EXAMPLE (CASE I) Distance x in feet = 5+d¡stance D in feet. Assume D is 3 feet, x =5+3=8 x =8

D FT FT

- X (Craters) ¿li « r ïïâ CASE II Top surface of vehicle is higher than crest of bank. Distancexin feet=5—distance D in feet.

X .2 X (2) 2 '2(sH i i X .2 I I X ,2 T(T> / 2 '2 X 2) (Craters) ^

Canal *—I---** Charge depths • -rr/r EXAMPLE (CASE II) Distance x in feet = 5-distance D in feet Assume D is 3 feet x =5-3=2 x =2

NOTE: The location of the crest of the river or canal bank is estimated and is the point from which measurements are made.

Figure D-18. Distance calculation for canal bank reduction.

AGO 20012A 191 Block & tackle Current i

Current

%í &<& ft

Figure D—21. Recovery technique using the block and iTC tackle (waterborne).

Figure D-19. Brush fill is placed in the canal.

Tree or anchor with block Í K WM 50lt 3/4-inch cabl 100 able

*s U m « Vi. æ i

Figure D-22. Recovery technique using the block and Figure D-20. Vehicle traverses canal without tackle (landbome). difficulty.

Log bearings 50 ft 3/4 inch cable 50 or 100 ft cable

2 * Q-

Figure D-23. Logs on top of an Ml 13 provide lift. t 192 AGO 20012A b. With one end of a two cable fastened to D-14. Swift-Current Crossings the track and the other end fastened to a dead a. Mechanized units often encounter diffi- man, a vehicle can pull itself from a canal culty crossing wide canals or rivers with swift (fig. D-24). The S-hook fastens to the eye of currents. the tow cable and then hooks into an opening in the track. b. On most streams in the Mekong Delta, c. If, in moving one track length, the vehicle exit sites require careful selection ; and, in is not free of the obstacle, a vehicle crewman many cases, engineer preparation is necessary. adjusts the hook. With each readjustment, the Therefore, swimming vehicles must arrive at cable is shortened to maintain tension between the designated exit point even though the cur- the “dead man” and the vehicle. rent tends to sweep them downstream.

Vehicle unable to exit without assistance Deadman because of steep bank

«/.s m m. i'«*« bl m Si « att to er a», by m í*' iV*: % Sfi » Step 1. Vehicle preparing to exit canal.

Deadman Track motion

Canal

Step 2. Exit complete.

Figure D-2U. Sketch of the S-hook method of self-recovery.

> AGO 20012A 193 c. A very simple and effective method is farther upstream the men need to be to exert available to prevent the vehicle from being sufficient lateral pull. If required, an additional swept downstream by the current: using a rope, fastened to the rear lifting eye assists nylon rope tied to the upstream front lifting in maintaining proper direction of movement. eye and dismounted troops on the far bank to Normally, one rope plus the propulsion of the pull the vehicle into the desired exit. A squad vehicle is adequate (fig. D-25). (or more) of men on the far bank position themselves upstream and, as the carrier en- d. A nylon rope is strong, lightweight, and ters the water and makes the crossing, keep- buoyant and does not become waterlogged ing the rope taut. The swifter the current, the through extensive use.

Squad of men

NORMAL CURRENT Direction of pu Exit site

Flow Flow . Swimming M113

Entrance site

STRONG CURRENT Squad Additional line Exit site p ¿gb may be necessary to avoid broaching

Flow . Swimming M113 Flow —■;... • I’.-.'-. :r ,~r. ' ‘ ' ’ -i'

‘Entrance site

Figure D-25. Diagram of the swift-current crossing technique (schematic).

194 AGO 20012A APPENDIX E LOAD PLANS

E-l. General termining factor. The weight method provides In a riverine area, watercraft transport troops, a means to estimate watercraft requirements supplies, and equipment to an area of opera- rapidly. It is not accurate enough for compu- tion (AO) and provide continuous support tation of watercraft requirements when the within the AO. The success of the ground watercraft carry major items of equipment, tactical operation depends on planning, pre- supplies, and personnel in mixed loads. paring, and executing water movements rap- Example: Weight to be transported. idly and efficiently. Personnel (178x240 lb) 42,720 Cargo .33,000 E-2. Planning Considerations Assault boats (16x356 lb) 5,696 Total weight 81,416 When planning for waterborne movements, commanders and staff officers require famil- Total weight _ 81,416 _ ACL - 22,000 ~ iarity with the type and the characteristics of 3.7 or 4 armored troop carriers (ATC) available watercraft. Considerations in deter- required mining the number of watercraft required to support a mission follow: E-5. Space Method a. Dimensions of the cargo compartment and a. The space method is a convenient method the location and dimensions of the cargo door for computing watercraft requirements for (or ramp). battalion waterborne operations. The number b. Allowable cargo load (ACL) of the type of spaces required for personnel, weapons, am- of watercraft used for the operation. The Navy munition, supplies, and vehicles normally does river assault squadron (RAS) commander not change from one operation to the next, or provides this information. with every change in allowable cargo load. The c. Number of personnel, amount and con- majority of computations remain constant; figuration of equipment, and amount of sup- therefore, use of the space method decreases plies requiring transportation. overall planning time. b. A space is the weight of a combat- E-3. Determining Watercraft Requirements equipped soldier and his proportionate share After considering the foregoing factors and of handcarried supplies and equipment—about eliminating or replacing nontransportable 240 pounds. items with transportable items, the planner c. In converting weight to spaces, the plan- uses the following methods to determine ner considers only whole or half spaces. He watercraft requirements : carries fractions to the next higher half or a. Weight method. whole space. For example, 8.1 equals 8.5 ; 8.6 b. Space method. equals 9.0. c. Type of load method. d. The planner converts major items of equipment (heavy weapons, vehicles, or assault E-4. Weight Method boats) into spaces by dividing the weight of The basis for this method is the considera- each item by 240. He converts additional sup- tion that total weight transported is the de- plies not carried by the individual soldier into

AGO 20012A 195 spaces by dividing their total weight by 240. E—6. Type of Load Method e. To determine the number of spaces a a. The type of load method uses a prepared watercraft provides, the planner divides the list of personnel, vehicles, equipment, and sup- ACL by 240. In converting ACL to spaces, he plies for each particular type of watercraft. considers only whole spaces. He reduces frac- Planners develop sufficiently different loads to tions to the next lower whole space. For ex- include all combinations of personnel, weap- ample, 22,000-*-240 = 91.6 = 91 spaces. ons, supplies, and equipment normally trans- /. The maximum spaces available for per- ported by watercraft. Preparation of different sonnel normally do not exceed 60 percent of types of loads provides flexibility in planning the total. For example, 60 percent of 91 spaces waterborne operations. equals 54.6. Reducing this to the next lower b. Figures E-l through E-9 depict typical whole number provides 54 spaces for person- types of loads. These figures show sample loads nel and 37 spaces for supplies and equipment. only and use the lightest weight equipment

1. Pers 11,0401b Rifle plat 44 FO (81-mm mort) 1 Medic 1 46 X 240 (lb) = 11,040 lb 2. Sup 3,265 lb Rations 46 (pers) X 2 (days) = 92 (rations) 92 + 4 = 23 (cases) x 25 (lb) = 5751b Water 46 (pers) X 2 (gal per day) = 92 (gal) x 2 (days) = 184 + 5 (gal can) = 37 (cans) X 50 (lb) 1,850 lb MOGAS 100 (gal) + 5 (gal can) = 20 (cans) X 42 (lb) = 840 lb 3. Ammo 5801b Rifle 5.56-mm 3 (cases X 60 (lb) = 1801b 90-mm rcl rifle 2 X 10 (rd) X 10 (lb) 200 lb Mise ammo 200 lb 4. Assault boats 4 (each) X 356 lb = 1,424 lb 1,424 lb Subtotal 16,319 lb 5. Available for other sup and equip 5.691 lb Total ACL 22,000 lb Figure E-l. Example of type 1 load for ATC’s. 1. Pers 12,480 lb Rifle plat 44 FO (81-mm mort) 1 Medic 1 81-mm mort sqd 6 52 x 240 lb = 12,480 lb 2. Wpns 94 lb 1 81-mm mort 941b 3. Sup 3,590 lb Rations 52 (pers) X 2 (days) = 104 (rations) 104 + 4 = 26 (cases) X 25 lb = 650 lb Water 52 (pers) X 2 (gal per day) = 104 (gal) X 2 (days) = 208 (gal) + 5 (gal) = 42 (cans) X 50 (lb) 2,100 lb MOGAS 100 (gal) + 5 (gal can) = 20 (cans) X 42 (lb) = 840 lb 4. Ammo 1,640 lb Rifle 5.56-mm 3 (cases) X 60 (lb) = 180 lb 90-mm rcl rifle 2 x 10 (rd) x 10 (lb) = 2001b 81-mm mort 1 X 80 (rd) = 80 rd 80 + 4 = 20 (cases) X 53 (lb) 1,060 lb Mise ammo 2001b 5. Assault boats 4 (each) X 356 (lb) = 1,424 lb 1,424 lb Subtotal 19,228 lb 6. Available for other sup and equip 2.772 lb Total ACL 22,000 lb

Figure E-2. Example of type 11 load for ATC’a.

196 AGO 20012A available. (Example: M3 baseplate is used in- quire armor protection, removal of the canopy stead of the heavier, more common M23A1 for permits equipment or supplies to extend higher the 81-mm mortar; and the new lightweight than the height of the armor plate. The load is inner ring is used for the 4.2-inch mortar.) within the weight limitations in either case. Many other combinations can be chosen. The Figure E—10 shows loading data and a dia- weight shown as “available for other supplies gram of an ATC. and equipment” provides space for additional supplies and equipment that subordinate com- E-7. Water Movement Forms manders designate. c. The length of some waterborne operations The planner uses the following water movement forms in planning, preparing, and con- requires the serving of hot meals in the AO. ducting waterborne operations to insure time- ATC transport mess teams, equipment, and ly and coordinated effort by all forces involved. rations to the AO. Mess teams may prepare a. Water Movement Table. The Army bat- meals en route or after the troops debark. talion commander and the Navy RAS com- d. The height of the armor protection on mander jointly prepare this table. Based on ATC’s limits cargo heights to that of the ar- the landing plan, this table provides movement mor. However, when the cargo does not re-

1. Pers 12,9601b Kifle plat 42 FO (81-mm mort) 1 Medic 1 Engr 10 "ST x 240 = 12,960 lb 2. Sup 3,715 lb Rations 54 (pers) X 2 (days) = 108 rations 108 + 4 = 27 (cases) X 25 (lb) = 675 lb Water 54 (pers) X 2 (gal per day) = 108 (gal) X 2 (days) = 216 + 5 (gal can) = 44 (cans) X 50 (lb) 2,200 lb MOGAS 100 (gal) + 5 (gal can) = 20 (cans) x 42 (lb) = 8401b 3. Ammo 6801b Rifle 5.56-mm 3 (cases) x 60 (lb) = 1801b 90-mm rcl rifle 2 X 10 (rd) X 10 (lb) = 2001b Mise ammo 3001b 4. Assault boats 4 (each) X 356 (lb) = 1,424 lb 1,424 lb Subtotal 18,779 lb 5. Available for other sup and equip 3.766 lb Total ACL 22^000 lb' Figure E-3. Example of type III load for ATC’s.

1. Pers 2,880 lb Rifle co HQ 6 FO team (4.2-in mort) 2 FO team (105-mm how) 3 Medic 1 Ï2"x 240 = 2,880 lb 2. Sup 1,490 lb Rations 12 (pers) X 2 (days) = 24 rations 24 + 4 = 6 (cases) X 25 (lb) = 1501b Water 12 (pers) X 2 (gal per day) == 24 (gal) X 2 (days) = 48 (gal) + 5 (gal can) = 10 (cans) X 50 (lb) = 5001b MOGAS 100 (gal) + 5 (gal can) = 20 (cans) X 42 (lb) = 8401b 3. Assault boats 3 (each) X 356 (lb) = 1,068 lb 1,068 lb Subtotal 5,438 lb 4. Available for other sup and equip 16.562 lb Total ACL 22,000 lb Figure E-t. Example of type IV load for ATC’s.

AGO 20012A 197 1. Pers 6,720 lb Rifle co HQ 6 FO team (4.2-in mort) 2 FO team (105-mm how) 3 ( Medic 1 2 sqd 81-mm mort 12 81-mm mort FDC 4 W x 240 lb - 6,720 lb 2. Wpns 1881b 2 81-mm mort 1881b 3. Sup 2,3401b Rations 28 (pers) x 2 (days) — 66 rations — 56 + 4 — 14 (cases) X 26 (lb) 3501b Water 28 (pers) X 2 (gal per day) — 56 (gal) x 2 (days) — 112 (gal) + 5 (gal can) — 23 (cans) X 50 (lb) — 1,150 lb MOGAS 100 (gal) + 6 (gal can) — 20 (cans) X 42 (lb) - 8401b 4. Ammo 81-mm mort 2 (mort) X 80 (rd) — 160 rd 160 + 4 - 40 (case) X 53 (lb) - 2,120 lb Mise ammo 2001b 5. Assault boats 5 (each) x 356 lb - 1,780 lb 1,780 lb Subtotal 13,340 lb 6. Available for other sup and equip 8.6601b Total ACL OT5TF Figure E-5. Example of type V load for ATC’s.

1. Pers 5,040 lb 4.2-in mort plat 21 x 240 lb - 5,040 lb 2. Wpns 1,280 lb 2 4.2-in mort 1,280 lb 3. Sup 1,965 lb Rations 21 (pers) X 2 (days) — 42 rations 42 + 4 — 11 (cases) x 25 (lb) - 2751b Water 21 (pers) X 2 (gal per day) — Í 42 (gal) X 2 (days) - 84 (gal) + 5 (gal cans) — 17 (cans) X 50 (lb) - 8501b MOGAS 100 (gal) + (gal can) — 20 (cans) X 42 (lb) — 8401b 4. Ammo 4,320 lb 4.2-in mort 100 (rd) +2-50 (cases) x 82 (lb) - 4 (each) x 356 (lb) - 4,100 lb Mise ammo 4201b 5. Assault boats 1,424 lb 1,424 lb Subtotal 14,029 lb 6. Available for other sup and equip 7,971 lb Total ACL 22,000 lb Figure E-6. Example of type VI load for ATC’e.

data for the operation. It is usually an appen- weight. When ATC transport cargo and per- dix to the water movement plan annex. Figure sonnel in addition to types of loads, the cargo E-ll illustrates a partly completed water and equipment are listed by item and weight. movement table. The watercraft loading table is usually an b. Watercraft Loading Table. Army com- appendix to the water movement plan annex. manders prepare this table to specify the per- The Navy commander normally receives a sonnel, equipment, and vehicles loaded on each copy for information. Figure E-12 illustrates watercraft. The watercraft loading table a sample table. need list only the type of load number and € 198 AGO 20012A 1. Pers 4.2-in mort plat 2,400 lb 10 X 240 lb 2,400 lb 2. Wpns 6401b > 1 4.2-in mort 640 lb 3. Sup 1,116 lb Rations 10 (pers) X 2 (days) - 20 rations 20 + 4-5 (cases) x 25 (lb) - 1251b Water 10 (pers) X 2 (gal per day) - 20 (gal) x 2 (days) - 40 + 5 (gal can) - 8 (cans) X 50 (lb) 2001b MOGAS 100 (gal) + 5 (gal can) - 20 (cans) X 42 (lb) - 4. Ammo 8401b 11,162 lb 4.2-in mort 250 (rd) + 2 — 125 cases 125 x 82 (lb) - 10,250 lb . Mise ammo 2001b 6. Assault boats 2 (each) x 366 (lb) - 7121b Subtotal 15,318 lb 6. Available for other sup and equip 6.682 lb Total ACL 22,000 lb Figure E-7. Example of type VII load for ATCe.

1. Pers 9601b Bn S4 and spt plat 4 x 240 9601b 2. Sup 20,9501b Cl I 5.000 lb Cl II, IV, VI, VII, VIII, IX, and X 1.000 lb Cl III 250 lb Cl V 14,700 lb Subtotal 21,910 lb Available for other sup and equip sait Total ACL 22,000 lb Figure E—8. Example of type VIII load for ATC'e.

1. Pers 2,160 lb 105-mm how sec 9 X 240 — 2. Wpns 5,236 lb I 1 105-mm how (towed) 3. Ammo 1,020 lb 105-mm how 20 (rd) x 61 lb 4. Veh 13,580 lb 1 2%-ton trk WWN Total 21,996 lb Total ACL 22,000 lb Figure E-9. Example of type IX load for ATC’e.

> AGO 20012A 199 -31 ft 2 in- <

-10 ft 4 in- -14 ft 10 in- 6 ft 9 ft 6 in

Main deck

3 ft 11 in

5 ft 5 in

10 ft 4 in 14 ft 10 in 6 ft 31 ft 2 in LOADING DATA

Length ot cargo compartment -31 ft 2 in Width of cargo entrance - 9 ft 6 in Width of cargo compartment - 9 ft 6 in Height of cargo entrance with canopy - 5 ft 9 in Height of cargo compartment with canopy- 5 ft 9 in to 7 It 10 in Allowable cargo load - 22,000 lb Height of armor protection - 3 ft 11 in to 5 ft 5 in Í Figure E-10. Loading data for ATC (schematic).

200 AGO 20012A € i. ï

I •i 0440 0450 0500 0850 B/l, 0900 WHITE Co A RAS—7 4/ATC 1-4 A/2, 4, 6, 8 3, Firing pos C/3 A/3 2 sqd hv 1 /ATC 5 vie LS-3 mort plat Remain D/l 0410 1 S4 cbt 1 /ATC 6 afloat tns ATC (CPT Smith) (LTJG Brown) 0455 0505 0855 A/l, 0900 RED Co B HAS—7 4/ATC 7-10 A/l, 3 0440 5, 7 3, A/3 Firing pos 1 'ATC 11 C/4 2 sqd hv vie LS-3 mort plat

Figure E-ll. Example of water movement table (partly completed).

Appendix Headquarters- To Date

Watercraft Watercraft loaded with Loading area/site Remarks Ground Naval Chalk Hull and time unit number number unit

Figure E-12. Typical watercraft loading table format.

201 AGO 20012A i

INDEX

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page Advance guard 4-13/(7) (a) 32 Preparation for movement C-13 179 4-146(2)(a) 40 Army aviation: Afloat base 1-3 (g) 4 Airmobile operations 6-35a 94 2-26 7 Ambush : Air cushion vehicle (ACV) - 4-6c(l) (6), 24 Enemy 6-41a 96 d(3)(e), 25 Friendly 6—416 96 4- 31 Artillery positioning 1 6-35c 94 3c(6)(c), 5- 57 Combat service support3 .. 6-35d 94 /, 5-16 60 Helicopter-emplaced artillery .5-17 60 Air defense artillery 6-6e(3) 73 6-9 77 Air reconnaissance 4-146(6) (6) 44 Helicopters 4-6c(l)(c), 24 Airboats 4-6c(l) (g) 24 5- 36, 57 5-3/ 57 6- 14 80 Airborne forces 4-le 20 Interdiction : Aircraft, fixed-wing 4-6c(l)(/), 24 Day 6-42a 96 5—3a 57 Night 6-426 96 Airmobile operations . . 4-8c 26 Medical evacuation 6-356 94 Ambush : Operating with airboats and Concept 5-2 la 60 air cushion vehicles: Execution 5-21c 61 Armed reconnaissance 6-43c 96 Planning 5-216 61 Blocking force 6-43e 96 Ambush/counterambush 5-20—5-22 60—62 Finding and fixing 6-43<£ 96 Amphibious operations l-5d 6 4 Reaction force 6-43/ 96 Antitank platoon 4-15e 48 Security 6-436 96 Area: Army forces: Contested - - 2-66 8 Divisional 3-8 15 Enemy-controlled 2-6a 8 Nondivisional 3-9 15 Friendly-controlled 2-6e 9 Landing 4-13e(2), Artillery : 32 105-mm, mounted in ATC or 4-14c(l) 44 Of operations l-3i, LCM(6) 6-10 77 4 155-mm, SP, mounted in LCM 4-76 26 (8) 6-8 77 Rendezvous _ 4-146 (4) (a) 41 Riverine _ l_3 Air defense 6-6e(3) 73 a 4 Barge-mounted : 2-2, 7 Positions 6-7a 74 2-3 7 Reconnaissance, selection, Armored cavalry operations 4-10 27 Armored personnel carriers and occupation of position (RSOP) 6-76 74 (APC) 4-6c(l) (d) 24 Armored reconnaissance/airborne Security 6-7c 77 Countermortar radar 6-6/(7) 74 assault vehicle (ARAAV) 4-10c 27 Defense of the battery posi- Armored troop carriers: tion area 6-6e 72 Assault landings C-17 181 Distance measuring equip- Boat team commander’s ment (DME) 6-6/(6) 74 checklist: Fire support 4-6d(3)(d), 25 Assault landing _C-15d 180 4-126(3),(4) 28 During movement C-15c 180 6-3—6-15 69-80 Loading C-156 180 Fire support coordination _ _ 6-5 70 Preparation C-15a 180 Fire support coordination Immediate action procedures .C-16 180 center 6-5e 70 Loading -.C-14 179 6-5/ 71 c 202 AGO 20012A Paragraph Page Paragraph Page Artillery—Continued Boat: Helicopter-emplaced 5-17 60 Air -..4-60(1) (p), 24 6-9 77 5-3/, 57 Observation, fire direction, Assault - l-3o, 5 survey, and ammunition: 4-6c(l)(6), 24 Concrete-piercing and de- 4-126(6), 28 lay fuze 6-6/(4) (c) 73 4- 31 13c(6)(6), Smoke 6-6/(4) (a) 73 /<2)(6), 35 VT fuze 6-6/(4) (b) 73 5- 57 3d Positioning 6-6c 72 6- 61 21d Raid by fire --5-10 58 Four-man, lightweight fabric -4-14d(8) (e) 46 Reconnaissance, selection, and Procedures : occupation of positions . —6-6

AGO 20012A 203 Paragraph Page Paragraph Page Center—Continued Service support: Sector operations and intelli- Basic considerations 7-1 97 gence coordination 1-3Î, 4 Responsibilities 7-2 97 5- 58 Support 14-146(6) 43 0, 6- 69 Support coordination2 center .. l-3m, 5 , 6-4a 70 5- 58 10, Changes, recommended l-2e 3 6- 69 2, Characteristics : 6-4a 70 Of riverine area —1-5 5 Command and control: Of riverine operations 1-36, 4 Attachment 3-5c 13 1-5 a, 5 Close support _.3-56 13 4-7 26 Joint task force 3-5a 13 Checkpoints 4-146 (4)(c) 41 Communications : Civil affairs: Artillery CCB 6-28 90 Civil-military relations 9-2 114 Battalion : Community relations and Afloat base 6-27a 90 other special considerations.9-12—9-14 120—122 Command and control: Operations on initial CCB .6-276(2) 90 entry : Helicopter --6-276(1) 90 Battalion combat Debarked 6-27c 90 base 9-14d 122 Embarked company 6-27d 90 Checklist on initial Heliborne battalion 6-27e 90 entry 9-14e 122 Brigade 6-26 89 Establishment of Afloat base 6-26a 89 camps 9-146 122 Command and control 6-26c 89 Semipermanent base CCB 6-26c(2) 89 camps 9-14c 122 Helicopter 6-26c(l) 89 Planning, direction, and Land base 6-266 89 coordination 9-13 121 Division signal battalion sup- Purpose and concept 9-12 120 port: Consolidation psychological Brigade support 6-25c 89 operations : Division main/division Planning and concept 9-11 120 base 6-256 88 Purpose 9-10 120 Equipment 6-22 85 Military civic action: Other ships and boats 6-29 90 Concept 9-5 115 Radio : Coordination and direction 9-4 115 Multichannel : Purpose 9-3 115 Ship-to-ship 6-246 88 Operations . 9-1 114 Ship-to-shore 6-24a 88 Populace and resources control : Typical riverine force com- Concept 9-6 116 munications : Control of refugees, eva- Afloat base 6-2 la 85 cuees, and displaced Land base 6-216 85 persons 9-9 118 Concept : Execution . 9-8 117 Ambush 5-2 la 60 Planning and direction .. 9-7 116 Riverine operations 4-la 20 Claymore antipersonnel mine . . __.5-216(2) 61 Conduct of operations .. 4-8 26 Clearance of tunnel and cave Contested area 2-66 8 complexes 4-17, 50 Control measures 4-4, 23 50 4-18 4- 41 146(4) Clearance of water obstacles 5-23—5-25 66 Clearance, route 4-3/ 23 Counterambush : Close air support 4-146(6)(c), 44 On land 5-22c 62 6-13 80 Planning 5-226 62 Close support . _ 3-56 13 Security during 5-22a(2), 62 Combat : (5) 62 Base 1-3;, 4 Water 4-13/(8), 38 4-126(7), 28 5- 62 22c(l) 4-14c(5) 44 Planning 5-22c(2) 63 Patrol . 5-26 56 Countermortar radar 6-6/(7) 74

204 AGO 20012A ParaGraph Page Paragraph Page Crossing inland waterways: Operations : Dismounted 4-14d(8) 45 Ambushes 2-7 c 9 Mechanized 4-14d(9(c), 47 Defensive 2-76, 9 D-l—D-14 182—193 4-14d(3), (4) 45 Offensive 2-7« 9 Deception plans 4-6a(3), 23 Use of waterways 2-7d 9 4—125(11) 29 Organization 2-5 8 Defense of base areas : Positions 4-16—4-18 49—50 Base defense areas: Regional forces .. 2-56 8 Base 8-4a(l) 108 Regular armed forces 2-5« 8 Forward defense 8-4a(2) 108 Village militia 2-5c 8 Reconnaissance and Engineer intelligence and recon- surveillance . 8-4a(3) 108 naissance support .6-18 83 Concept 8-2 106 Environment, riverine . 1-3«, 4 Defense against enemy mor- 2-2, 7 tar, rocket, and recoilless 2-3 7 rifle attack: Equipment, riverine . l-2d, 3 Active defense measures .8-13 112 B-l—B-7 126—153 Passive defense measures 8-14 112 Escape -5-26d(3) 67 Defense of the afloat base Evasion : planning 8-11 110 Equipment 5-27 67 Fundamentals : Rules _5-28 67 Basic considerations 8-3 106 Exfiltration, enemy 2-76(5) 9 All-round defense —8-3d 107 Fire control 4-146(4) (/) 43 Defense in depth 8-3e 107 Fire support _4-6d(3) (d), 25 Dispersion 8-35 107 4- 126(3), (4), 28 Integrated and coor- 6-3—6-15 69—80 dinated measures .8-3? 107 Fire support coordination 6-5 70 Maximum use of of- Fire support coordination center .. 6-5e, 70 fensive action 8-30 107 / 71 Mutual support 8-3c 107 Fixed-wing aircraft 4-6c(!) (/), 24 Responsiveness 8-3/ 107 5- 3« 57 Security 8-36 106 Flank guard 4-13/(7)(6), 35 Time available 8-3i 107 4-146(2)(6) 46 Use of terrain 8-3a 106 Flotation gear for individual Mission --.8-1 106 soldier .4-14d(8) (d) 46 Planning and organizing the Footmarches 4-6c(l) (i) 24 base defense: Force, reaction 4-3e, 22 Control measures 8-8 109 4-6d(4), 25 Frontage and depth 8-6 109 e(4)(c), 25 Organizing the base 4-8a, 26 defense 8-9 110 4-9, 27 Other security measures .8-7 109 4-14d(l) 44 Planning 8-5 109 Forces : Defense of the battery position area 6-6e 72 Airborne -4-le 20 Definitions (See Specific terms.) Army: Destruction of tunnel and cave Divisional ..3-8 15 complexes . 4-18 50 Nondivisional 3-9 15 Distance measuring equipment Blocking 4-6d(3) (c) 25 (DME) 6-6/(6) 74 Enemy 2-4—2-7 8,9 Dogs, scout 5-7 58 Friendly 3-2 12 Enemy : Activities 2-7 9 Host country: Base areas 2-6a 8 Air Force 2-8«(2) 10 2-7d 9 Army --.2-8«(l) 10 Boobytraps 4-14d(7) 45 Civilian agencies 2-8 e 11 Capabilities 2-7 9 Irregular 2-8d 11 Controlled area 2-6o. 8 Navy 2-8«(3) 10 Forces 2-4—2-7 8,9 Paramilitary 2-86 10 Mission 2-5 8 Police — 2-8c 10

AGO 20012A 205 Paragraph Page Paragraph Page Forces—Continued Tactical air reconnais- Naval : sance and air battle- Other 3-12 16 field surveillance: River assault flotilla _3-ll 16 Aerial photography _6-S2c(2) 91 River assault Infrared imagery 6-32c(4) 91 squadron 3-llc, 16 Side-looking airborne 4—6c(l)(a), 24 radar 6-32c(3) 91 d(3)(c), 26 Visual observation ..6-32c(l) 91 4-12b(3),(4), Security and counterintelli- (6), 28 gence 6-33 93 4— Sociological, political,1 and 3c6) (o) 31 /(2)(a), 34 economic considerations 6-31 90 5- Internal defense and internal3 de- c 57 River support velopment operations: squadron 3-116 16 Search and clear 4-36 22 Riverine l-3d 4 Search and destroy 4-3a 22 Formations 4-6d(2) 25 Secure and occupy 4-3c 22 Waterborne 4-13/(7), 35 Water way patrols 4-3d 22 4-146(3) 41 Forms of maneuver 4-86 26 Joint operations 3-1 12 Four-man lightweight fabric boat -4-14d(8) (e) 46 Joint task force 3-5a 13 Friendly controlled area _2-6c 9 Killing zone l-3n 5 Grapnel with line (propelled) 4-14d(8) (c) 46 Land base 4 Guard : 1- 3/, 2— 7 2a Advance 4-13/(7)a) 35 Landing : 4-146(2)(a) 40 Flank 4-13/(7)(6), 35 Areas - 4—13e(2), 32 4-146(2)(6) 40 4—14c(l) 44 Rear 4-13/(7) (e) 38 Assault 4—14c 44 4-146(2)(c) 41 Time . 4—13e(4) 32 Liaison 4-5 23 Heavy mortar platoon 4-156 48 Load plans: Helicopters 4-6c(l)(c), 24 Determining watercraft re- 5- quirements 3E-3 195 6, 57 6- Planning considerations1 E-2 195 4 80 Host country: Space method E-5 195 Air Force 2-8a(2) 10 Type of load method E-6 196 Army 2-8a(l) 10 Weight method E-4 195 Civilian agencies 2-8e 11 Loading plan 4-136(l)(d) 30 Irregular 2-8d 11 E-l—E-7 195- •197 Navy 2-8a(3) 10 Long-range patrol 5—4 57 Paramilitary 2-86 10 Police 2-8c 10 Main body 4-13/(7)(d), 38 4-146(2)(d) 41 Immediate action 4-146 ( 5 ) 43 Maintenance : Infantry, mechanized 4-14d(9), 46 Considerations influencing 5- 59 organization of units1 7-10 101 1 Infiltrators 1-56 5 Destruction of supplies and Initial objectives -.4-126(4), 2g equipment 7-13 103 4-13e(5) 34 Direct support 7-11 101 General 7-7 Intelligence : 99 Collection considerations 6-32 91 Operations : Ground surveillance and Combat base 7-9 c 101 reconnaissance 6-32d 92 Division base camp 7-9a 100 Mobile intelligence and Land base/afloat base 7-96 100 civil affairs team, Patrol base 7-9c 101 (MICAT) 6-32/ 92 Organizational 7-14 103 Sources .6-326, 91 Principles of support for 6- 83 riverine operations1 7-8 100 8 Specialized intelligence Repair parts and operational agencies 6-32e 92 readiness float items 7-12 102

206 AGO 20012A Paragraph Page Paragraph Page Maneuver : Night: Forms — 4—8b 26 Operations 4-2c 22 Scheme 4-6d, 25 Patrol 5-5 57 4-136(1) (a), c, 30 Objectives, initial 4-126(4), 28, 4-14d 44 Observation — -4-13e(5) 34 Marches, foot — 4-6c(l)(t) 24 4-26 20 Marginal terrain assault bridge --4-14d(9) (c)2 47 Observation, fire direction, survey, Marshaling : and ammunition: Plan.... 4-136(1) (e) 30 Concrete-piercing and delay Security 4-12/ 30 fuze 6-6/(4) (c) 73 Measures, control 4-4, 23, Smoke 6-6/(4) (o) 73 4- 146(4) 41 VT fuze 6-6/(4) (6) 73 Mechanized infantry 4-14d(9), 46, 5- Offensive : 11 59 Actions .4-6d(l) 25 Medical 7-15—7-19 103,104 Special considerations 7-19 104 Operations 4-lc, 4-3 20, 22 Support of a land base 7-16 103 Operations : Support of an afloat base 7-17 103 Airmobile 4—8c 26 Support of waterborne Amphibious l-5d 6 operations 7-18 104 Area of 1-3/, 4-76 4, 26 Methods of movement .. 4-6c(l) 24 Armored cavalry 4-10 27 Military police 7-20—7-23 104,105 Battalion 4-12— 28— PW operations 7-22 105 4-15 48 Security operations 7-23 105 Conduct of 4-8 26 Traffic control 4-146(4) («), 43, Division/brigade 4-7—4-11 26,27 7-21 105 Enemy : Mine, claymore 5-216(2) 61 Ambushes 2-7c 9 Mity Mite 4-17a 50 Defensive 2—76, 4—14d 9 Mission, enemy 2-5 8 (3),(4) 45 Mobility 4-2a 20 Offensive 2-7o 9 Motorized patrol 5-6 58 Use of waterways 2-7d 9 Movement : Joint 3—1 12 Methods --.4-6c(l) 24 Mobility in _ _ 4-2c 20 Phase 4-6e 24 Night '4—2a 22 Security during __4-6c(3), 24, Offensive 4-lc, 4-3 20, 22 4-126(3), 28, Phasing 4-6 23 4-13/(8), 38, Reaction l-3/i(2) 4 4- Riverine 11-36, l-5a, 4, 5 4d(6) 45 4-7 26 To contact _ — 4-14d 44 Truck 4-6c(l) (e) 24 Historical examples _ _ ... 1-4 5 Water 4-146, 39 Swamps and forests 5-13—5-19 59, 60 5- Waterborne 1l-3e, 4-126, d, 4, 28 2 59 4-13, 29,30 Naval forces .3-10—3-13 16—18 4-14 39 Other .3-12 16 Organization, enemy 2-5 8 River assault flotilla staff .3-lla 16 River assault squadron .. .3-llc 16 Patrol : 4—6c( 1) (a), 24, Base 1—3fc 4 d(3)(c), 25, Combat 5-26 56 4-126(3),(4), 28, Long-range 5-4 57 (6), Motorized — 5-6 58 4- Night 15-5 57 3c(6) (a), 31, /(2) (a), 34, Reconnaissance 5-2c 66 5- Security 3 6-2a 56 c 57 River support squadron .3-116 16 Waterway 4-3d 22 Naval gunfire: Phasing operations: Observation and communica- Movement phase 4-6c 24 tions .6-15c 81 Planning phase 4-6a 23 Organization ...... 6-156 81 Scheme of maneuver 4-6d, 4-136 25 Navy watercraft .4-6c(l)(a), 72, (1) (®) » c, 30 B-l—B-7 126—153 4-14d 44

AGO 20012A 207 Paragraph Page Paragraph Page Phasing operations—Continued Reference data : Staging and loading 4-66 23 Army riverine equipment and Withdrawal and return move- characteristics — B-5—B-7 152,153 ment 4-6e 25 Equipment characteristics and data B-7 153 Plan: Organic equipment B-6 152 Assault . 4-136(1)(6),e 30 Other Army equipment _ _ B-6 152 Deception 4-6o(3), 23 Navy riverine equipment and 4-126(11) 29 characteristics : Loading . 4-136(1)(d), 30 Descriptive data B-4 126 E-l— 195— E-7 197 Navy flotilla equipment: Marshaling 4-136(1)(e) 30 River assault Water movement 4-136(1)(c),/ 30 squadron B-16 126 River support Planning: squadron B-la 126 Phase 4-6a 23 Other Navy equipment: Sequence 4-136 30 Positions, enemy 4-16—4-18 49, 50 Craft B-26 126 Ships B-2a 126 Potable water: Vietnamese Navy ships Denial 5- 19, 6-19c 60, 84 and craft: Sources 6- 19a 83 Prepositioning 4-6c(2) 72 Craft B-36 126 Artillery 6-66(1) 71 Ships B-3a 126 Regional forces, enemy 2-56 8 Psychological operations Regular armed forces, enemy 2-5e 8 (PSYOP) : Release point 4-146(4) (d) 43 Concept : Rendezvous area 4-146 (4) (a) 41 Types of reorientation River assault squadron 3-lle, 4-6c, 16, efforts 6-37o 94 (l)(a),d(3) 24, Planning and coordination 6-39 95 (c),4-126 25, Purpose 6-38 95 (3),(4),(6), 28, 4- 31, 13c(6)(a), Types of PSYOP: /(2)(a), 34, Consolidation PSYOP 6-38c(2) 95 5- 57 3c Tactical PSYOP 6-38c(l) 95 Fire 6-6/(2), 73, Purpose 1-1 3 6-12 79 Radar, countermortar . 6-6/(7) 74 Observation and com- Raids 5-8—5-12 58,59 munications 6-12c 80 By fire 5-10 58 Riverine : Planning considerations 5-9 58 Area (environment) l-3a, 2-2, 4, 7, Reaction : 2-3 7 Force 4-3e, 22, Characteristics 1-5 5 4—6d(4), 25, Equipment 1-2 3 e(4) (c), 25, B-l— 126— 4—8a, 4-9, 26, 27 B-7 153 4— Force 1l-3d 4 4d(l) 44 Operations 1-36(2) 4 Historical examples 1-4 5 To enemy ambush ___5-22c(2), 63 Nature 1-26,1-4, 3, 5, 5- 21-5 5 2d(3) 65 Rear guard 4-13/(7)(c), 38 Operations 1-36, l-5a 4,5 4-146(2)(c) 41 Concept 4-la 20 Route clearance - 4-3/ 20 Reconnaissance : Rules for engagement 6-4"‘ 69 Air .4-146(6) (6) 44 25, Patrols 5-2c 56 Scheme of maneuver 4-6d, 4-136 (D(a),c, 30, Platoon 4-15a 48 4-14d 44 Reconnaissance, selection, and Scope 1-2 3 occupation of position 6-6d 72 Scout dogs 5-7 58 Recovery vehicle, M696 4-14d(9) 47 Search and clear 4-36 22 (c) (4) Search and destroy 4-3a 22

208 AGO 20012A Paragraph Page Paragraph Page Riverine—Continued Towing D-9 190 Sector operations and intelligence Threats to unit movements 4-6c(3) (a) 24 coordination center (SOICC) 1-31,5-10, 4,58, Time of landing 4-13e(4) 32 6-2, 6-4o 69, 70 Traffic control 4-146(4) (e), 43, Secure and occupy -4-3c 22 7-21 105 Security : Trail party 4-13/( 7) (c), 38, Base - 3-6,8-1— 13, 4-146(2)(e) 41 8-14 106—112 Truck movement 4-6c(l) (e) 24 During movement 4-6c(3), 24, Tunnel and cave complexes: 4-126(3), 28, Clearance 4-17 50 4-13/(8), 38, Destruction 4-18 50 4—14d(6) 45 Examples 4-16— 49— Marshaling 4- 14-18 50 2/ 30 Patrols 5— U.S. Air Force: 2o 56 Sequence, planning . 4-136 30 Airlift and close air support.. 3-15, 19, 4-66 23 Stagring and loading 4-146 { 6), (c) 44, Start point 4-146(4)(6) 41 6-13, 80, Supply 7-3—7-6 97—99 6-36 94 Resupply : Forces 3-14,3-15 19,19 During tactical operations 7-6 99 Of a land base 7-4 98 Vehicle: Of an afloat base 7-5 98 Air cushion (ACV) __4-6c(l) (6), 24, Classes of supply 7-56 98 <2(3) (e), 25, Class I 7-56(1) 98 4- 13c(6)(c), 31, Classes II, IV, 5- 3/, 57, VI, and IX ...7-56(2) 98 5-16 60 Classes III and Armored reconnaissance/ III(A) 7-56(3) 98 airborne assault 4-1 Oc 27 Classes V and Recovery, M696 4-14d(9)(e)4 47 V (A) 7-56(4) 99 Village militia, enemy 2-5c 8 Periodic resupply 7-5a 98 Warning order .4-12e(l) 30 Survival 6-25e(l) 67 Water: Rules 5-29 68 Movement 4-146,5-12 39,59 Survival, evasion, and escape 5-26—5-29 67, 68 Forms: Swamps and forests, military Watercraft loading characteristics 5-14 59 table _E-76 198 Water movement Tactical airlift 6-34—6-36 94 table E-7o 197 Air force 6-36 94 Plan 4-136(1) (c), 30, Army aviation 6-35 94 4-13/ 34 Airmobile operations 6-35a 94 Table .4-13/(3),(4) 35 Artillery positioning 6-35c 94 Obstacles, type 5-24 66 Combat service support .. 6-35d 94 Potable : Medical evacuation 6-356 94 Denial 5-19, 6-19c 60, 60 Tactical area of responsibility Sources 6-19a 60 (TAOR) 1—36 4 Waterborne: Tank battalion 4-11 27 Formations 4-13/(7), 35, Task organization 4-12c 29 4-146(3) 41 Techniques of canal crossings D-2 182 Mechanized infantry 4-14d(9)(a) 46 Balk aluminum bridging D-5 188 Operations l-3e, 4, Block and tackle: 4-126, d, 28, 29, Land D-ll 190 4-13,4-14 30,39 Waterborne D-10 190 Watercraft, naval 4-6c(l)(a), 24, Brush fill D-8 189 B-l— 126— Capstan-anchor D-3 183 B-7 153 Employment of demolitions .. D-7 189 Waterway patrols 4-3d 22 Log bearings D-12 190 Withdrawal: Push: And return movement 4-6e 25 Bar D-4 185 Waterborne .. 4-6e(4), 25, Method D-6 188 4-13d, 31, S-hook -..D-13 190 4—14« 47 Swift current crossings D-14 193 Zone, Killing l-3n 5

AGO 20012A 209 By Order of the Secretary of the Army: <

HAROLD K. JOHNSON, General, United States Army, Official: Chief of Staff. KENNETH G. WICKHAM, Major General, United States Army, The Adjutant General.

Distribution : To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-11 requirements for Riverine Operations.

it U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1968—81S-11T/20012A c » 3000020890 ►

/ <

s M m*

UUl rn v>

5 <